Owner`s Manual (MV-8800_OM)
MV-8800_e.book 1 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Owner’s Manual
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” (Owner’s Manual; p. 2), “USING THE UNIT
SAFELY” (Owner’s Manual; p. 4–5), and “IMPORTANT NOTES”
(Owner’s Manual; p. 6–7). These sections provide important information
concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel
assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by
your new unit, the Owner’s Manual, Screen Guide, and Appendices
should be read in its entirety. These manuals should be saved and kept
on hand as a convenient reference.
Copyright © 2006 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any
form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
Roland International Web Site: http://www.Roland.com
MV-8800_e.book 2 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug
does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified
by the manufacturer.
12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
not operate normally, or has been dropped.
For the U.K.
WARNING:
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the
letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
M-2
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 3 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Introduction
Introduction
Checking the included items
Checking the included items
The MV-8800 package contains the following items.
If any of the included items are missing, please contact a “Roland Service Center” or an “authorized Roland distributor” as
listed on the “Information” (p. 338).
❑ MV-8800
❑ AC cable
❑ Mouse
❑ Owner’s Manual (the document you are reading)
❑ Screen Guide
❑ Appendices
❑ Mouse pad
❑ Content Discs (CD-ROM)
The MV-8800 Contents CD-ROM contains the demo songs and
pre-installed patches. To use this data to restore the contents of
your hard disk, read the included booklet “MV-8800 Content
Discs.”
❑ Booklet “Content Discs”
❑ Short pin
When the MV-8800 is shipped from the factory, a short pin is
installed in the PHONO jacks.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-3
MV-8800_e.book 4 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the triangle.
In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for general
cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic
animals or pets.
001
● Before using this unit, make sure to read the
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.
..........................................................................................................
001-50
● Connect mains plug of this model to a mains
socket outlet with a protective earthing
connection.
..........................................................................................................
002b
● Do not open or perform any internal modifications
on the unit. (The only exception would be where
this manual provides specific instructions which
should be followed in order to put in place
user-installable options; see p. 323–324,
p. 325–326.)
..........................................................................................................
003
● Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts
within it (except when this manual provides
specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer
all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
..........................................................................................................
004
● Never use or store the unit in places that are:
❍ Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating
duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or
are
❍ Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors);
or are
❍ Humid; or are
❍ Exposed to rain; or are
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the powercord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
007
● Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is
level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
..........................................................................................................
008a
● The unit should be connected to a power supply
only of the type described in the operating instructions, or as marked on the rear side of unit.
..........................................................................................................
008e
● Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also,
the supplied power cord must not be used with
any other device.
..........................................................................................................
009
● Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord,
nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can
damage the cord, producing severed elements
and short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and
shock hazards!
..........................................................................................................
010
● This unit, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be
capable of producing sound levels that could
cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for
a long period of time at a high volume level, or at
a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience
any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should
immediately stop using the unit, and consult an
audiologist.
..........................................................................................................
011
● Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable
material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind (water,
soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
❍ Dusty; or are
❍ Subject to high levels of vibration.
..........................................................................................................
M-4
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
..........................................................................................................
MV-8800_e.book 5 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
❍ The power-supply cord, or the plug has been
damaged; or
❍ If smoke or unusual odor occurs
❍ Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
spilled onto the unit; or
❍ The unit has been exposed to rain (or
otherwise has become wet); or
❍ The unit does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance.
..........................................................................................................
013
● In households with small children, an adult should
provide supervision until the child is capable of
following all the rules essential for the safe
operation of the unit.
..........................................................................................................
014
● Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
..........................................................................................................
● The unit should be located so that its location or
position does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
..........................................................................................................
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
● Immediately turn the power off, remove the power
cord from the outlet, and request servicing by your
retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an
authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the
“Information” page when:
Introduction
012a
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
101a
102b
● Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply
cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
103a
● At regular intervals, you should unplug the power
plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all
dust and other accumulations away from its
prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from the
power outlet whenever the unit is to remain
unused for an extended period of time. Any
accumulation of dust between the power plug and
the power outlet can result in poor insulation and
lead to fire.
..........................................................................................................
104
● Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
placed so they are out of the reach of children.
..........................................................................................................
106
● Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on
the unit.
015
● Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share
an outlet with an unreasonable number of other
devices. Be especially careful when using
extension cords—the total power used by all
devices you have connected to the extension
cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat
up and eventually melt through.
..........................................................................................................
016
● Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page.
..........................................................................................................
022a
● Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord
before attempting installation of the circuit board
(DIMM; p. 324, p. 326).
..........................................................................................................
023
● DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional
audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a
level that could cause permanent hearing loss.
Damage to speakers or other system components
may result.
..........................................................................................................
026
● Do not put anything that contains water (e.g.,
flower vases) on this unit. Also, avoid the use of
insecticides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray
cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any
liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft cloth.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
107b
● Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet
hands when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
108a
● Before moving the unit, disconnect the power plug
from the outlet, and pull out all cords from external
devices.
..........................................................................................................
109a
● Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
..........................................................................................................
110a
● Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning
in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out of
the outlet.
..........................................................................................................
115a
● Install only the specified circuit board(s) (DIMM).
Remove only the specified screws (p. 324,
p. 326).
..........................................................................................................
118a
● Should you remove any screws (for the bottom
cover, option cover, and grounding terminal) and
short pin (for the PHONO jacks), keep them in a
safe place out of children’s reach, so there is no
chance of them being swallowed accidentally.
..........................................................................................................
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-5
MV-8800_e.book 6 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
INPORTANT NOTES
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on pages 2
and 4–5, please read and observe the following:
355b
Power Supply
301
● Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is
being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by
an inverter (such as a refrigerator, washing machine,
microwave oven, or air conditioner), or that contains a
motor. Depending on the way in which the electrical
appliance is used, power supply noise may cause this unit
to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is not
practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a
power supply noise filter between this unit and the
electrical outlet.
307
● Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the
power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions
and/or damage to speakers or other devices.
308
● Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the
POWER switch is switched off, this does not mean that the
unit has been completely disconnected from the source of
power. If you need to turn off the power completely, first
turn off the POWER switch, then unplug the power cord
from the power outlet. For this reason, the outlet into which
you choose to connect the power cord’s plug should be
one that is within easy reach and readily accessible.
Placement
351
● Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To
alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or
move it farther away from the source of interference.
352a
● This device may interfere with radio and television
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such
receivers.
352b
● Noise may be produced if wireless communications
devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity
of this unit. Such noise could occur when receiving or
initiating a call, or while conversing. Should you
experience such problems, you should relocate such
wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from
this unit, or switch them off.
***
● Observe the following when using the unit’s CD-R/RW
drive. For further details, refer to “Cautions when using the
CD-R/RW drive” (p. 30).
❍ Install the unit on a solid, level surface.
❍ Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while the
drive is operating.
354a
● Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near
devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed
vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes.
Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
360
● Depending on the material and temperature of the surface
on which you place the unit, its rubber feet may discolor or
mar the surface.\nYou can place a piece of felt or cloth
under the rubber feet to prevent this from happening. If
you do so, please make sure that the unit will not slip or
move accidentally.
M-6
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
● When moved from one location to another where the
temperature and/or humidity is very different, water
droplets (condensation) may form inside the unit. Damage
or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in
this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must
allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation
has completely evaporated.
Maintenance
401a
● For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth
or one that has been slightly dampened with water. To
remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a mild,
non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe the
unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth.
402
● Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any
kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or
deformation.
Additional Precautions
552
● Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents
of data that was stored on a CD-R/RW disc once it has
been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability
concerning such loss of data.
553
● Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s
buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks
and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
554
● Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
556
● When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the
connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you will
avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s internal
elements.
557
● A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during
normal operation.
558a
● To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s
volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use
headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about
those around you (especially when it is late at night).
559a
● When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box
(including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise,
you will need to use equivalent packaging materials.
562
● Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use
cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit.
The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be
extremely low, or impossible to hear. For information on
cable specifications, contact the manufacturer of the cable.
Handling CD-ROMs
801
● Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside
(encoded surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM
discs may not be read properly. Keep your discs clean
using a commercially available CD cleaner.
MV-8800_e.book 7 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Important Performance and Image Data
Emergency Procedures
813
The following procedures are to be used as
emergency measures only, and are not recommended
for normal operation.
811
● Once a hard disk fails to function normally, all data that
has been stored on it could be destroyed.
All hard disks eventually wear out. We recommend that
you consider the hard disk not as a permanent storage
site, but as a place to store data temporarily. We also
recommend that you back up important performance and
image data that cannot be recorded again onto the
external media that is supported by your device. For
instructions on how to make such backups, refer to the
owner’s manual for your device.
Note that Roland assumes no liability whatsoever,
including monetary compensation, for the loss of any
recorded content in the event of the malfunction of, or
physical damage to the hard disk, or for any direct or
incidental damages resulting from the loss of such data.
Precautions Regarding Setup and Use
● If the device fails to respond to operational commands or
does not complete operations, turn off the power. If the
power does not shut off following normal shutdown
procedures, disconnect the power plug.
If the unit does not operate normally when the power is
turned on again, it may mean that the hard disk has been
damaged. In such instances, consult your dealer or the
nearest Roland Service Center. Note, however, that it may
not be possible to recover any data from the hard disk
once it has been lost.
If your device features drive check capabilities, use the
drive check function to regularly confirm that there are no
problems, even when the device is operating normally.
For more detailed information on the shutdown and drive
check procedures, refer to the Owner’s Manual.
812
● Certain hard disk setup procedures and usage conditions
may result in the corruption of recorded data,
malfunctioning, or physical damage to the disk, so be sure
to observe the following precautions.
❍ Do not subject the hard disk to vibration or shock,
especially while the unit is in operation.
❍ Do not set up the unit in any location where it may be
affected by vibration from external sources, or on any
surface that is not stable and level.
❍ If the device includes a cooling fan, ensure that the fan
and the side panel air vents remain unobstructed.
❍ Do not leave the unit in any environment subject to
temperature extremes; for example, in a closed
automobile in summer or outdoors during winter.
❍ Do not use the unit in conditions of high temperature
and humidity or in any location subject to rapid
temperature changes.
❍ Do not unplug the power cord or switch off any circuit
breakers in the circuit to which the unit is connected
while the power is turned on.
❍ Do not move the unit while the power is turned on or
immediately after turning off the power. When
transporting the unit, first turn off the power and
confirm that the display screen has gone off,
disconnect the power plug, then wait at least two
minutes before moving the device.
Copyright
851
● Recording, duplication, distribution, sale, lease,
performance, or broadcast of copyrighted material
(musical works, visual works, broadcasts, live
performances, etc.) belonging to a third party in part or in
whole without the permission of the copyright owner is
forbidden by law.
852
● This product can be used to record or duplicate audio or
visual material without being limited by certain
technological copy-protection measures. This is due to the
fact that this product is intended to be used for the
purpose of producing original music or video material, and
is therefore designed so that material that does not
infringe copyrights belonging to others (for example, your
own original works) can be recorded or duplicated freely.
853
● Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a
copyright held by a third party. We assume no
responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements
of third-party copyrights arising through your use of this
unit.
204
* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
206j
* Windows® is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows® operating system.”
207
* Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
209
* Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
***
* Dolby is a registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories.
***
* DTS is a registered trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
***
* ADAT is a registered trademark of Alesis Corporation.
***
* The Akai MPC2000 and MPC2000XL is a product manufactured by Akai Professional M.I. Corporation.
220
* All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-7
INPORTANT NOTES
Handling Hard Disks
Introduction
INPORTANT NOTES
MV-8800_e.book 8 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Main features
Unifying the entire music production process
The MV-8800 contains a sampler, sequencer, effect processor, mastering functionality, and music CD-burning
functionality, unifying the entire music production process; collecting materials ➔ creating your song ➔
completing a final master.
● Sampler section featuring high capacity, a broad range of file import capability,
and synthesis functionality
• High-capacity sampling
The sampler section at the heart of the MV-8800 features 64 voices of simultaneous polyphony. The unit is
shipped with 128 MB of sampling memory that allows a maximum of approximately 24 minutes of sampling
(monaural). You can add commercially-available DIMM memory to expand the memory (maximum 512 MB).
• Broad range of file import capability
You can acquire musical material not just by sampling/resampling, but also by importing files from the internal
CD-R/RW drive, from the USB. Numerous formats are supported, including Roland S-700 series, Akai
MPC2000(XL), Akai S1000/3000, WAV/AIFF, and music CD.
• Powerful synthesis functionality
Materials obtained by sampling/resampling/importing can be processed by a variety of powerful editing
functionality such as Chop, Time Stretch, and Normalize. The MV-8800 also provides sophisticated filtering,
envelope, and LFO sound parameters taken from Roland’s line of synthesizers.
● Newly developed sequencer that unifies MIDI and audio
• Newly-developed sequencer
The MV-8800 comes with a newly developed sequencer that seamlessly handles MIDI and audio, and also
lets you create songs by placing patterns in the desired order. A variety of editing functionality is also provided,
including piano-roll and drum-grid editing.
• Audio tracks with BPM Sync
The eight stereo audio tracks work in tandem with the sampler section, and allow you to directly record vocals
or acoustic instruments while the sequencer runs. BPM Sync functionality lets you synchronize the tempo
without affecting the pitch of the recorded phrases.
• MIDI tracks that can also control external MIDI devices
The 128 MIDI tracks provide a Play Quantize function that corrects the timing during playback without
modifying the data that you actually input. The performance data can be sent not only to the internal sampler
section, but also from two MIDI outputs.
You can also use piano roll, event list and drum grid editing in both the large LCD screen and external VGA
display.
• Pattern-based music production
You can easily create new songs by combining patterns of several measures.
• Large velocity pads
The sixteen large velocity pads respond to both velocity and aftertouch, giving you fingertip control over subtle
performance nuances. There’s a Roll function, and a Multi Level function that lets you assign a single sample
to the sixteen pads at sixteen different velocity levels.
M-8
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 9 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Main features
● Three effect processors
The MV-8800 contains three effect processors that you can use when processing samples, resampling, or to
add finishing touches to your song; multi-effect, reverb, delay/chorus. The multi-effect provides 25 different
algorithms using COSM technology.
● Mastering toolkit for producing music CDs
The same type of mastering toolkit found on Roland’s acclaimed VS series is also provided on the MV-8800,
allowing you to apply professional-quality multi-band compression when creating a two-track (stereo) mix for
a music CD. You can use the internal CD-R/RW drive to burn the mastered data directly to a music CD.
● Internal hard disk, and USB connectivity to your computer
All of your working data within the MV-8800 can be saved as a “project” on the internal hard disk. A single USB
cable is all you need to connect the MV-8800 to your computer, letting you transfer audio data between the
MV-8800’s internal hard disk and your computer.
● V-LINK functionality
V-LINK (
) is a function that allows music and images to be performed together. By using MIDI to
connect two or more V-LINK compatible devices, you can easily enjoy performing a wide range of visual
effects that are linked to the expressive elements of a music performance.
The MV-8800 lets you use the velocity pads and sliders to switch video clips or control video effects on units
such as the Edirol PR-50 or MD-P1.
● Output video that’s synchronized to your performance
Images can be output to an external display in synchronization with your music.
You can use the velocity pads to switch these images, or make them switch in synchronization with the
sequencer playback.
● Direct connection for turntables
In addition to the mic/line input jacks for connecting microphones or instruments, the MV-8800 provides phono
input jacks for connecting a turntable.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Introduction
Main features
M-9
MV-8800_e.book 10 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Contents
Introduction........................................................................................................................................ 3
Checking the included items .......................................................................................................... 3
USING THE UNIT SAFELY............................................................................................................... 4
INPORTANT NOTES ........................................................................................................................ 6
Main features.................................................................................................................................... 8
Panel descriptions......................................................................................................................... 18
Top Panel ...............................................................................................................................................18
Rear Panel..............................................................................................................................................23
CD-RW Drive (Front Panel)....................................................................................................................25
Preparing your equipment and making connections................................................................. 26
Turning on the power .................................................................................................................... 28
Turning off the power..............................................................................................................................29
Using the CD-R/RW drive.............................................................................................................. 30
Recommended discs ..............................................................................................................................31
Inserting a disc .......................................................................................................................................31
If the disc tray fails to open.....................................................................................................................31
Basic operations............................................................................................................................ 32
Moving the cursor ...................................................................................................................................32
Editing the value of a parameter.............................................................................................................32
Using the F (function) buttons ................................................................................................................32
Using the SHIFT button ..........................................................................................................................33
Inputting text ...........................................................................................................................................33
To zoom-in/zoom-out the waveform display...........................................................................................34
Stopping the output of the sampler.........................................................................................................34
Velocity pad operations ................................................................................................................ 35
Performing with the velocity pads...........................................................................................................35
Switching a pad bank .............................................................................................................................36
Naming a pad bank ................................................................................................................................37
Fixed Velocity function............................................................................................................................37
Multilevel function ...................................................................................................................................37
Hold function...........................................................................................................................................38
Roll function............................................................................................................................................38
Quick Start ........................................................................................................................................ 39
Listening to the demo songs........................................................................................................ 39
Loading a project ....................................................................................................................................39
Start playback the demo song ................................................................................................................40
About the demo songs............................................................................................................................40
Using the velocity pads................................................................................................................. 41
Performing instrument sounds................................................................................................................41
Performing audio phrases ......................................................................................................................42
Creating a song.............................................................................................................................. 43
Recording a pattern ................................................................................................................................43
Saving a project......................................................................................................................................45
Assembling additional materials.................................................................................................. 46
Importing sound from an audio CD.........................................................................................................46
Sampling sounds using a mic.................................................................................................................48
Try using the various functions ................................................................................................... 50
M-10
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 11 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Quick Start
1—An overview of the MV-8800......................................................................................... 51
Introduction
Contents
Basic structure............................................................................................................................... 51
Sampler structure .......................................................................................................................... 52
Mixer structure............................................................................................................................... 55
Effect structure .............................................................................................................................. 56
Sequencer structure...................................................................................................................... 57
Data structure ................................................................................................................................ 59
About modes.................................................................................................................................. 61
1
2
3
2—Importing data ........................................................................................................................ 63
4
Loading the pre-installed patches ............................................................................................... 63
Importing the WAV or AIFF files................................................................................................... 65
5
Options when importing..........................................................................................................................67
6
Importing from an audio CD ......................................................................................................... 70
The options during import.......................................................................................................................72
7
Loading sound libraries of other model ...................................................................................... 73
Auditioning or previewing before you import ..........................................................................................74
8
Playing the imported data immediately (Quick Assign)............................................................. 75
Assigning a sample to a patch................................................................................................................75
Assigning a sample to an audio phrase..................................................................................................75
Assigning a patch by chopping a sample ...............................................................................................76
Assigning multiple samples to a patch ...................................................................................................77
Assign multiple samples as audio phrases.............................................................................................78
9
10
11
Importing SMF (Standard MIDI File) data .................................................................................... 79
Loading audio phrases from the hard disk ................................................................................. 80
Loading effect settings from the hard disk ................................................................................. 81
12
13
3—Sampling .................................................................................................................................... 83
14
Making initial settings for sampling............................................................................................. 83
Sampling......................................................................................................................................... 84
15
Advanced sampling ................................................................................................................................88
Applying effects while you sample..........................................................................................................88
16
4—Making Instrument settings .......................................................................................... 89
17
Assigning the patch to a part ....................................................................................................... 89
Making instrument settings .......................................................................................................... 90
18
About maximum polyphony and Voice Reserve.....................................................................................91
19
Limit the performance data received by a part ........................................................................... 92
Copying the settings of a part to a different part ....................................................................... 93
Initializing the settings of a part................................................................................................... 94
20
5—Creating a patch .................................................................................................................... 95
22
21
Making a patch settings ................................................................................................................ 95
23
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Master Index
Naming a patch ......................................................................................................................................97
Registration a patch in the patch library .................................................................................................97
Loading a patch from the patch library ...................................................................................................98
Saving a patch to the hard disk ..............................................................................................................99
Loading a patch from the hard disk ......................................................................................................100
Deleting the patch.................................................................................................................................101
Deleting a sample that’s used by more than one partial / audio phrase / audio event .........................101
M-11
MV-8800_e.book 12 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Contents
Making a partial settings............................................................................................................. 102
To adjust the pitch ................................................................................................................................104
To adjust the brightness of the sound by filter......................................................................................104
To adjust the way in which the volume changes ..................................................................................104
To add modulation to the sound ...........................................................................................................104
Making a sample settings .....................................................................................................................105
Finding a zero-cross point ....................................................................................................................106
Playing multiple samples together........................................................................................................106
Naming a partial ...................................................................................................................................107
Copying a partial...................................................................................................................................107
Deleting the partial................................................................................................................................108
Deleting a sample that’s used by more than one partial / audio phrase / audio event .........................108
Changing the assignment of partials ....................................................................................................109
6—Making audio phrase settings .................................................................................. 111
Editing the settings of an audio phrase .................................................................................... 111
Making an audio phrase play in synchronization with the sequencer...................................................113
Adjusting the pitch ................................................................................................................................113
Replacing an assigned sample .................................................................................................. 114
Making the waveform of an audio phrase zoom-in .................................................................. 115
To create a patch by dividing an audio phrase (Chop) ............................................................ 116
To copy an audio phrase ............................................................................................................ 117
Saving audio phrases to the hard disk...................................................................................... 118
Deleting the audio phrase and the sample................................................................................ 119
Deleting a sample that’s used by more than one partial / audio phrase / audio event .........................119
Saving an audio phrase as a WAV-format or AIFF-format file ................................................ 120
7—Editing a sample ................................................................................................................. 121
Viewing a list of samples ............................................................................................................ 121
To emphasize or reduce the high-frequencies of the sample (Emphasis)............................ 122
Saving method of edited sample (Overwrite or Duplicate) ...................................................................122
To maximize the level of a sample (Normalize) ........................................................................ 123
To Change the length of a sample (Time Stretch) .................................................................... 124
Deleting unnecessary portions of a sample (Truncate)........................................................... 125
If the following message appears during truncation .............................................................................126
Converting a stereo sample to monaural (Set mono) .............................................................. 127
Applying a fade-in to the sample (Fade-in) ............................................................................... 128
Applying a fade-out to the sample (Fade-out) .......................................................................... 129
Assigning a sample to a partial or audio phrase...................................................................... 130
Saving a sample as a WAV-format or AIFF-format file............................................................. 130
8—Using the sequencer........................................................................................................ 131
Overview....................................................................................................................................... 131
The Song Mode and The Pattern Mode ..................................................................................... 132
Silencing a specific track during playback (Mute) ................................................................... 133
Playing only a specific track (Solo) ........................................................................................... 134
Using the velocity pads to switch Track Mute and Solo.......................................................... 135
Applying quantization during playback (Play Quantize).......................................................... 136
Transmitting MIDI Program Changes at the beginning of a Pattern or Song ........................ 137
M-12
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 13 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Quick Start
Changing the playback tempo.................................................................................................... 138
Introduction
Contents
Using the Tap function to set the tempo...............................................................................................138
Changing the tempo or time signature at the specified location of the song ........................................138
Using the locator ......................................................................................................................... 140
Moving to a locate point........................................................................................................................140
Editing a locate point ............................................................................................................................141
Naming a locate point...........................................................................................................................141
Deleting a locate point ..........................................................................................................................141
1
2
Using markers.............................................................................................................................. 142
Setting a marker point ..........................................................................................................................142
Moving to a marker point ......................................................................................................................142
Moving to the next (previous) marker ...................................................................................................142
Deleting a marker point ........................................................................................................................142
3
4
Using the velocity pads to play patterns................................................................................... 143
5
Assigning a pattern to a pad.................................................................................................................144
6
9—Recording a song / pattern ......................................................................................... 145
7
The work flow of recording......................................................................................................... 145
Creating a new song.................................................................................................................... 146
8
Starting a new song with your favorite settings (User Track Template) ...............................................147
Creating a new pattern ................................................................................................................ 148
9
Changing a name / length / tempo of a pattern ....................................................................................149
Recording MIDI tracks (instrument or external MIDI sound module) ..................................... 150
10
Events Handled with MIDI Tracks ........................................................................................................150
Adding MIDI tracks for recording MIDI data .........................................................................................151
Recording your pad performance just as you play (Realtime Recording) ............................................152
Step recording ......................................................................................................................................156
Inputting events in rhythm-machine style (Drum Grid) .........................................................................158
11
12
Recording audio tracks or audio phrases................................................................................. 160
13
Adding audio tracks for recording data.................................................................................................160
Directly recording an audio input (Direct Recording)............................................................................161
Recording performance of audio phrases ............................................................................................163
14
Placing patterns in the pattern track ......................................................................................... 164
Creating the pattern track .....................................................................................................................164
Placing patterns in the pattern track .....................................................................................................165
15
Undoing a recording or editing operation (Undo/Redo) .......................................................... 166
16
10—Editing a song / pattern .............................................................................................. 167
17
Selecting the song that you want to edit................................................................................... 167
Selecting a pattern....................................................................................................................... 168
Editing entire tracks .................................................................................................................... 169
18
19
Deleting tracks......................................................................................................................................169
Combining multiple MIDI tracks into one (Merge Tracks).....................................................................170
20
Editing a region you specify (Sequence Editing) ..................................................................... 171
Selecting a region quickly (Quick Region)............................................................................................173
Inserting blank measures at the specified time (Insert Measure) .........................................................174
Deleting specified measures (Delete Measure)....................................................................................175
Pasting the performance data of a pattern into a song.........................................................................176
21
Editing note events in a MIDI track (Piano Roll Editing) .......................................................... 177
23
22
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Master Index
Note event editing in the PIANO ROLL EDIT screen ...........................................................................179
Selecting a region quickly (Quick Region)............................................................................................180
M-13
MV-8800_e.book 14 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Contents
Editing events individually ........................................................................................................ 181
Event list editing ...................................................................................................................................181
Inserting performance data (Create Event) ..........................................................................................182
Erasing performance data (Erase) .......................................................................................................183
Copying performance data (Copy & Paste)..........................................................................................183
Editing a system exclusive message....................................................................................................184
Audio event parameter .........................................................................................................................185
Pattern event parameter.......................................................................................................................186
List of available editing commands ........................................................................................... 187
Moving performance data (Move).........................................................................................................188
Copying performance data ...................................................................................................................189
Correcting the timing of performance data (Quantize) .........................................................................191
Editing note accents (Change Velocity)................................................................................................192
Editing the length of the notes (Change Duration) ...............................................................................193
Moving the performance data backward or forward (Shift Timing).......................................................194
Thinning out the performance data (Data Thin)....................................................................................195
Transposing notes (Transpose)............................................................................................................196
Extracting specific note events (Split Notes) ........................................................................................197
Entering data with a smooth succession of values (Create Continuous Data).....................................198
Modifying data in a selected region (Change Continuous Data) ..........................................................199
Saving a portion of performance data in the library (Copy As MIDI Clip) .............................................200
Saving a region of a song as a pattern (Copy As New Pattern) ...........................................................200
Restricting the type of events that will be edited (View Filter)................................................ 201
Note length (Step time) and the number of ticks...................................................................... 202
Copying a pattern ........................................................................................................................ 203
Initializing (Erasing) patterns ..................................................................................................... 203
Saving a song (or pattern) in SMF format (Save As SMF) ....................................................... 204
Note regarding saving to SMF..............................................................................................................204
Saving a song as SMF (Standard MIDI file) data .................................................................................204
Saving a pattern as SMF (Standard MIDI File) data.............................................................................205
Loading a song from another project ........................................................................................ 206
11—Using the Mixer ................................................................................................................. 207
Adjusting the volume balance of each part .............................................................................. 207
Adjusting the tone of an instruments or audio track ............................................................... 208
12—Using effects ....................................................................................................................... 209
Switching the effects on/off........................................................................................................ 209
Selecting an effect ....................................................................................................................... 210
Setting the effect parameters ..................................................................................................... 211
Storing the current effect settings in the library ...................................................................... 212
Saving a current effect setting to the hard disk ....................................................................... 213
Using the C (Control) knobs to operate parameters ................................................................ 214
Changing the MFX routing.......................................................................................................... 215
Applying an effect to the sound from an input ......................................................................................215
Applying MFX to an instrument or audio track......................................................................................216
Applying an effect to the master out .....................................................................................................216
Analog Modeling Bass ................................................................................................................ 217
Playing from the Effect knobs...............................................................................................................217
Playing from a MIDI track/the velocity pads/an external MIDI device...................................................218
M-14
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 15 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Quick Start
13—Automating mixing operations (Automation) ............................................. 219
Introduction
Contents
Automating operations of Mixer Channel ................................................................................. 219
Mixer parameters that can be recorded and played back ....................................................................219
Recording mixer operations for a Mixer Channel .................................................................................219
Playback mixer operations ...................................................................................................................220
Automating mute operations for each track ............................................................................. 221
1
Recording mute operations ..................................................................................................................221
Playback mute operations ....................................................................................................................222
Editing the recorded mute data ............................................................................................................223
Viewing the mute data of only a specific track......................................................................................224
2
3
Automating operations for each C (Control) knob ................................................................... 225
Recording C (Control) knob operations ................................................................................................225
Playback C (Control) knob operations to control effect parameters .....................................................226
4
5
14—Creating an audio CD ................................................................................................... 227
6
The work flow of creating an audio CD ..................................................................................... 227
Combining a song / pattern into two tracks (Mixdown) ........................................................... 228
Achieving the ideal volume and loudness for an audio CD (Mastering) ................................ 230
Writing the mastered data to CD ................................................................................................ 232
Playing an audio CD .................................................................................................................... 234
7
8
9
15—Project and disk management ............................................................................... 235
10
Managing projects ....................................................................................................................... 235
11
Loading a project ..................................................................................................................................235
Naming a project ..................................................................................................................................236
Protecting a project...............................................................................................................................236
Deleting a project..................................................................................................................................237
Saving a project....................................................................................................................................238
Saving a project with a different name .................................................................................................238
Creating a new project..........................................................................................................................239
Deleting unused portions of a sample ..................................................................................................240
Backing up a project to a CD-R/RW disc..............................................................................................241
Restoring a project ...............................................................................................................................241
12
13
14
15
Folder structure ........................................................................................................................... 242
Managing files (File Utility) ......................................................................................................... 243
16
Changing the current drive ...................................................................................................................243
Changing the current folder ..................................................................................................................244
Creating a folder ...................................................................................................................................245
Renaming a folder or file ......................................................................................................................245
Copying a file or a folder.......................................................................................................................246
Moving a file to another location (Move)...............................................................................................247
Deleting a folder or file..........................................................................................................................248
17
Disk management ........................................................................................................................ 249
20
18
19
Formatting a disk ..................................................................................................................................249
Naming a disk.......................................................................................................................................250
21
22
23
Master Index
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-15
MV-8800_e.book 16 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Contents
16—Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800....... 251
Switching between the two operating modes........................................................................... 251
How to confirm the operating mode......................................................................................................251
Using a mouse ............................................................................................................................. 252
About the mouse ..................................................................................................................................252
Basic operation.....................................................................................................................................252
Mouse operations .................................................................................................................................253
Explanation of screens shown in the external display ............................................................ 255
Operations using the external display....................................................................................... 271
Quick Tour ............................................................................................................................................271
Using the mouse to edit sequence data (SONG screen or PATTERN screen)....................................276
Using the mouse to edit a MIDI track (PIANO ROLL EDIT screen) .....................................................277
Step Recording.....................................................................................................................................280
Changing the color theme of the SONG screen and PATTERN screen ................................. 282
Switching between SONG screen and PATTERN screen ........................................................ 283
17—Using the velocity pads to display images (Pix Jam)........................... 285
Importing images......................................................................................................................... 285
Switching images by playing the pads..................................................................................................286
Switching images in synchronization with sequencer playback ...........................................................287
18—Connecting to your computer via USB ........................................................... 289
To start communication with your computer............................................................................ 289
Copying files from your computer to the MV-8800................................................................... 290
Backing up a project from the MV-8800 to your computer...................................................... 292
Using your computer to delete unwanted files......................................................................... 293
To stop communication with your computer............................................................................ 294
19—Using MIDI devices ........................................................................................................ 295
Playing a connected external MIDI sound module ................................................................... 295
Using the sliders to control an external MIDI sound module (Assignable Sliders) ...............................296
Playing the MV-8800 from an external MIDI device .................................................................. 297
Recording your playing from a MIDI keyboard .....................................................................................297
Using the MV-8800 in Multi Timbre Sampler Mode..............................................................................298
Playing audio phrases from an external MIDI device ...........................................................................300
Controlling MFX from an external MIDI device.....................................................................................301
Synchronizing the MV-8800 with a connected external sequencer ........................................ 302
Synchronizing with an external device (Master) ...................................................................................302
Synchronized operation with external devices (Slave) .........................................................................304
Monitoring the MIDI connection status ..................................................................................... 309
20—About V-LINK...................................................................................................................... 311
What is V-LINK?........................................................................................................................... 311
The MV-8800’s V-LINK functionality.....................................................................................................311
Using the MV-8800 to operate an external V-LINK device (V-LINK Master) ........................... 312
Example connections ...........................................................................................................................312
Switching V-LINK on/off........................................................................................................................312
Making V-LINK settings ........................................................................................................................312
V-LINK Function chart ..........................................................................................................................313
Using V-LINK from an external device (V-LINK Slave)............................................................. 314
About the V-LINK messages ................................................................................................................315
Note regarding using the V-LINK..........................................................................................................315
M-16
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 17 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Quick Start
21—Other functions ................................................................................................................. 317
Introduction
Contents
Settings for the entire MV-8800 .................................................................................................. 317
Settings for the MV-8800’s velocity pads .................................................................................. 318
Setting for the MV-8800’s sliders and buttons.......................................................................... 319
Checking the system status ....................................................................................................... 321
1
Viewing the system information............................................................................................................321
Testing the installed memory................................................................................................................321
Resetting the MV-8800’s parameters to the factory settings................................................................322
2
3
22—Adding options ................................................................................................................. 323
4
Expanding the memory ............................................................................................................... 323
Precautions for expanding memory......................................................................................................323
Exchanging the memory (removing and installing)...............................................................................324
5
6
23—Ajout d’options ................................................................................................................. 325
7
Expansion de la mémoire ........................................................................................................... 325
Precautions concernant l’extension de la mémoire ..............................................................................325
Echange de la mémoire (retrait et installation) .....................................................................................326
8
9
Master Index .................................................................................................................................. 327
10
11
Information ..................................................................................................................................... 338
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Master Index
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-17
MV-8800_e.book 18 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Panel descriptions
Top Panel
SENS knobs
Adjusts the input sensitivity.
PHONE knob
Adjusts the headphone level.
MENU button
When this button is lit orange, you can press it to display
a menu. Screens for which a menu is available are
indicated by a
(menu icon) at the left of the function
display area.
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
This is a 320 x 240 pixel display screen with backlight.
Contrast knob
Adjusts the contrast of the LCD screen.
DISK indicator (red)
This indicator lights when the MV-8800 is transferring
data to/from its hard disk or CD-R/RW drive.
● When the DISK indicator is lit, you must never turn off the
power or subject the MV-8800 to vibration such as striking a
pad. Doing so may cause malfunctions.
SHUTDOWN button
To shut down the MV-8800, press this button. You must
perform the shutdown operation when you are finished
working with the MV-8800.
Master output knob
Adjusts the overall volume.
SAMPLING button
The SAMPLING screen (Screen Guide; p. 209) will
appear.
IMPORT button
The IMPORT screen (Screen Guide; p. 219) will appear.
menu icon
function display area
F (function) buttons
The [F1]–[F5] buttons correspond to functions displayed
at the bottom of the screen.
The functions available will depend on the screen shown
in the screen.
EXIT button
Press this button to return to the previous screen or to
cancel an operation.
MIDI indicator (green)
This indicator lights when MIDI data is received at the
MIDI IN connector.
UNDO/REDO button
You can press this button to cancel (UNDO) the results of
an editing command in sequencer section. If you then
press the button again, you can cancel the UNDO (i.e.,
REDO).
● [UNDO/REDO] will light orange if UNDO is available (i.e., if
the previous processing has been preserved). After you
perform UNDO, [UNDO/REDO] will blink, indicating that
REDO is available.
button
Press this button when you want to use the V-LINK
functionality (it will light blue). This lets you control
externally-connected V-LINK compatible video equipment
from the MV-8800, allowing you to “perform” on the video
device.
M-18
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 19 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Introduction
Panel descriptions
Panel descriptions
EFFECTS button
Accesses the EFFECTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 229)
(indicator lit orange). The MV-8800 provides built-in MFX
(multi-effect), delay/chorus, and reverb effects.
C (control) knobs
These control knobs let you adjust effect parameter
values directly.
Sliders
Normally you will use these as mixer sliders. The
parameters that are adjusted by the sliders will change
depending on the screen shown in the LCD. The
Assignable Slider function and the V-LINK function will
also change the parameters controlled by these sliders.
MIXER button
Accesses the MIXER screen (Screen Guide; p. 235)
(indicator lit orange).
PROJECT button
Accesses the PROJECT MENU screen (Screen Guide; p.
162) (indicator lit orange), letting you load or save a
project.
INSTRUMENTS button
Accesses the INSTRUMENTS screen (Screen Guide; p.
114) (indicator lit orange), where audio data recorded
using the sampler or imported from another source can be
prepared for use as an instrument. These instruments are
managed as “patches” and can be recalled for use at any
time.
AUDIO PHRASES button
Accesses the AUDIO PHRASES (Screen Guide; p. 152)
screen (indicator lit orange). An “audio phrase” is a piece
of audio data with an appreciable length (e.g., a rhythm
pattern of several measures). Here you can manage and
edit audio phrases.
DISK/USB button
Accesses the DISK/USB MENU screen (Screen Guide; p.
188) (indicator lit orange). Here you can perform
maintenance on the internal disk, use the CD player
function, and communicate with your computer via USB.
SONG button
Accesses the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8)
(indicator lit orange). Used to play, record, and mix-down
songs.
PATTERN button
Accesses the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91)
(indicator lit orange). Used to play and record patterns.
MASTERING button
Accesses the MIXDOWN / MASTERING MENU screen
(Screen Guide; p. 196) (indicator lit orange). Here you can
use the mastering tool kit to add the final finishing touches
to the two-channel audio data (WAV file) created by
mixing down the sequencer playback.
ASSIGNABLE SLIDER button
Press this button when you want to use the sliders as
controllers to transmit MIDI messages (indicator lit
orange).
SYSTEM button
Accesses the SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p.
172) (indicator lit orange), letting you make system
settings for the MV-8800.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-19
MV-8800_e.book 20 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Panel descriptions
MULTILEVEL button
This button assigns a different level of velocity (playing
strength) to each of the sixteen velocity pads. Striking pad
1 will produce a velocity level of 7, and striking pad 16 will
produce a velocity level of 127 (p. 37).
● If MULTILEVEL=on or FIXED VELOCITY=on, the force with
which you strike the pad is ignored.
● Multilevel will be enabled for the velocity pad that you
pressed immediately before pressing [MULTILEVEL].
FIXED VELOCITY button
This button makes a velocity pad ignore the force
(velocity) with which you actually strike; the pad will
always produce a specified velocity value (indicator lit
orange). Use the PAD screen (Screen Guide; p. 174) to
specify the velocity value.
EVENT ERASE button
While recording sequence data, you can erase a specific
note message by holding down [EVENT ERASE] and
pressing the pad that corresponds to the unwanted note
message.
PAD BANKS button
Accesses the PAD BANKS popup (Screen Guide; p. 5).
By switching the sixteen velocity pads to another bank
you can use a larger variety of musical sources. Six patch
banks and 32 audio phrase banks are provided.
QUICK EDIT button
This button lets you edit the sounds that are assigned to
the velocity pads. Strike the pad whose sound you want to
edit, and then press [QUICK EDIT] to access the
PARTIAL EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 125) or AUDIO
PHRASE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 155), where you
can immediately edit the sound of that pad.
M-20
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
CLIPBOARD button
This button lets you temporarily store data for the sound
assigned to a velocity pad. Hold down the pad that you
want to store and press [CLIPBOARD], and the pad data
will be copied to the clipboard (the indicator will light red).
When the red indicator is lit, hold down [CLIPBOARD] and
strike a different velocity pad; the data will be copied from
the clipboard to the velocity pad you struck.
● The contents of the clipboard are preserved until you
perform one of the following actions.
• Turn off the power
• Load a project
• Overwrite the clipboard by copying data to it
• Press [DELETE]+[CLIPBOARD]
DELETE button
To delete the material (partial or audio phrase) assigned
to a velocity pad, hold down [DELETE] and strike that pad.
ROLL button
By holding down [ROLL] and striking a velocity pad you
can produce a roll (rapidly repeated strikes).
● The spacing between notes of the roll can be set by the PAD
screen (Screen Guide; p. 174) Pad Roll Interval parameter,
or in a popup accessed by pressing [SHIFT] + [ROLL].
● While you’re playing a roll, aftertouch data is converted to
velocity.
HOLD button
By holding down [HOLD] and striking a velocity pad you
can make the pad stay in the pressed state (the indicator
will light red). Press [HOLD] once again to cancel the hold
function (the indicator will go dark).
VELOCITY PADS
Use these pads to input sequence data and play samples.
Since the pads are velocity-sensitive (i.e., each pad
detects the force with which you strike it), you can use
them to add dynamic variation to your performance. The
pads are also sensitive to polyphonic aftertouch; they can
respond to the force with which you press them after the
initial strike.
MV-8800_e.book 21 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Introduction
Panel descriptions
Panel descriptions
Numeric keys
Use these keys to input sequence data, alphabetical
characters for names, or numerical parameter values.
These keys make it easy to input numerical values in
rapid succession.
DEC/INC buttons
These buttons decrement ([DEC]) or increment ([INC]) the
value of a parameter. If you continue holding down a
button, the value will change continuously.
If you hold down [SHIFT] while you press [DEC] [INC] or
turn the VALUE dial, the amount of the increase or
decrease will be multiplied by ten.
Cursor buttons
Use these buttons to select items from a menu or list, or
to move to the parameter that you want to adjust.
By operating the CURSOR buttons while holding down
[SHIFT], you can zoom-in or zoom-out on a desired
portion of the performance data (the Zoom function).
VALUE dial
Use this to increase or decrease the value of a parameter.
Turn the dial toward the left to decrease the value, or
toward the right to increase it.
SHIFT button
Use this button to access multiple functions provided by a
single button. To use a function enclosed by a blue frame
on the top panel (e.g., STEP REC or MARKER SET), hold
down [SHIFT] and press the desired button. If you want to
rapidly increase or decrease the value of a parameter,
hold down [SHIFT] and use [DEC] [INC] or the VALUE
dial.
ENTER button
Finalizes the numerical data that you entered by numeric
keys. This button can also function as an execute/confirm
button for the command at the cursor location in the
screen.
PREVIEW TO (
) / PREVIEW FROM (
) buttons
PREVIEW [TO (
)] plays the sequence data from a
point slightly earlier than the current location.PREVIEW
[FROM (
)] plays the sequence data for a short time
starting at the current location. By using these two
functions in conjunction with each other you can easily
find a precise location in your song.
The preview length is set by the GLOBAL screen (Screen
Guide; p. 173) Preview Length parameter.
AUTO PUNCH button
This function automatically enters and exits record mode
over a specified region of the sequence. When you press
[AUTO PUNCH] the indicator will light orange. When you
begin recording in this state, actual recording will begin at
the punch-in point (recording start location) you specify.
When you arrive at the punch-out point (recording end
location), recording will end automatically. To turn off the
Auto Punch function, press [AUTO PUNCH] once again
(the indicator will go dark).
The auto punch region is set in the RECORDING
PARAMETER screen that appears when you press
[REC ( )].
LOOP ON button
Press this button when you want playback or recording to
loop (continue repeating). LOOP [ON] will light orange. If
you begin sequence playback or recording in this state,
recording or playback will continue repeating between the
loop start time and loop end time you specify. By using the
Loop function in conjunction with the Auto Punch function,
you can perform Loop Recording.
The loop region is set by the Loop Top and Loop End
parameters in the LOOP popup (in the SONG screen,
press [MENU] ➜ and select Loop).
LOOP QUICK SET button
This button sets the current measure as the beginning of
the loop. You can then immediately begin loop recording
to capture a phrase or other idea.
The length of the loop is specified by the Quick Loop
Length parameter in the LOOP popup (in the SONG
screen, press [MENU] ➜ select Loop).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-21
MV-8800_e.book 22 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Panel descriptions
LOCATOR button
Accesses the LOCATOR popup (Screen Guide; p. 59) will
appear. You can place locator marks at ten desired time
locations in the sequence data. The Locator function lets
you jump instantly to one of these stored locations.
BEAT indicator (red/green)
Blinks (green) at each beat of the currently specified
tempo. When the sequencer is running, it will blink red on
the first beat (the downbeat) of each measure, and blink
green on other beats.
STEP buttons
Pressing these buttons by themselves will move the
current time location in units of the Step Time. If you
continue holding down the button, the time will move
continuously.
TOP (
) button
Sets the current time to 0001-01-000 (measure 1 - beat 1
- tick 0); i.e., the beginning.
If you hold down [JUMP] and press one of these buttons,
you will move to the next or previous marker in the
sequence data.
JUMP button
[JUMP] + STEP [ ] [ ] moves the time location to the
previous or next marker.
[JUMP] + MEAS [
][
] moves the time location to
the previous or next event.
[SHIFT] + [JUMP] displays the JUMP popup (Screen
Guide; p. 60), where you can directly input a time location
and jump to it.
MEAS buttons
Pressing these buttons by themselves will move the
current time in units of a measure. If you continue holding
down the button, the time will move continuously.
If you hold down [JUMP] and press one of these buttons,
you will move to the next or previous event in the
sequence data.
BPM/TAP button / MARKER SET button
Pressing this button once will display the BPM/TAP
popup, where you can specify the tempo of the sequencer
in units of BPM (quarter note Beats Per Minute). By
pressing [BPM/TAP] three or more times at the desired
tempo, you can set the sequencer to that tempo. In either
case, you are free to set the tempo whenever the Tempo
track (p. 138) is not being used.
By pressing [SHIFT] + [BPM/TAP] you can store a marker
in the sequence data.
● If you’re using the tempo track, you can’t use [BPM/TAP] to
change the tempo. If you want change the tempo in this way,
disable the tempo track.
M-22
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
STOP ( ) button
Stops the sequencer.
PLAY ( ) button
Plays the sequencer. Pressing [PLAY ( )] in REC
standby mode (the REC indicator blinking red) will start
recording.
REC ( ) button
Use this when you want to record. Pressing this once will
enter REC standby mode (the indicator blinks red). In
REC standby mode, press [PLAY ( )] to begin recording
(the indicator will light red). During recording, press
[REC ( )] once to stop recording (punch-out; the
indicator blinks red). However, the sequencer will not
stop, but will continue playing back.
While the sequencer is stopped, you can press [SHIFT] +
[REC ( )] to show STEP REC screen (Screen Guide; p.
62), AUDIO PHRASE STEP REC screen (Screen Guide;
p. 63), or PATTERN STEP REC screen (Screen Guide; p.
110).
MV-8800_e.book 23 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Panel descriptions
Rear Panel
USB
This connector lets you connect the MV-8800 to your
computer to transfer files.
FOOT SWITCH
You can connect a separately sold foot switch (e.g.,
Roland DP-2, BOSS FS-5U) here, and use it to control the
MV-8800 in a variety of ways.
OUTPUT DIGITAL A, B
These are digital audio output connectors. “A” is a coaxial
type connector, and “B” is an optical type connector. You
can switch these to output either the master out audio or
the audio from the MULTI OUTPUT bus.
● The DIGITAL OUT jacks support IEC60958 (consumer).
Introduction
Panel descriptions
ANALOG INPUT PHONO
You can connect a turntable (record player) to these
jacks.
● The PHONO jacks provide a PHONO equalizer.
● If you use the MIC/LINE jacks, you cannot use the PHONO
jacks simultaneously.
● If you’re not using the PHONO jacks, insert the included
short pin. This will prevent noise from being introduced via
the PHONO jacks.
Grounding terminal
Use this if you’ve connected a turntable. By connecting
this to the grounding wire (“earth”) of your turntable you
can reduce the hum or buzz that may otherwise occur.
OUTPUT PHONES
You can connect a set of headphones here.
OUTPUT MASTER
These are the analog master output jacks. Connect them
to your playback system or powered monitor speakers.
ANALOG INPUT MIC/LINE
These are analog input jacks. You can connect
microphones or line-level devices here.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-23
MV-8800_e.book 24 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Panel descriptions
POWER ON switch
Turns the power on/off.
MOUSE
Connect the included mouse to this connector.
AC inlet
Connect the included power cable here.
VGA OUT
Connect a VGA display to this connector.
Cooling fan vent
The MV-8800 contains a cooling fan that prevents the
internal temperature from becoming too high. The warm
air is exhausted from this vent.
MIDI (IN/OUT A/OUT B)
Use these connectors to transmit/receive MIDI messages
to or from other MIDI devices.
● Do not place any obstructing object in front of the cooling fan
vent. Doing so may make the MV-8800 overheat, causing
malfunctions.
M-24
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 25 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Panel descriptions
CD-RW Drive (Front Panel)
CD-R/RW drive tray
The tray will open when you press the CD-R/RW disc
eject button. This drive can handle CD-ROMs and music
CDs, and can also write data to CD-R discs or CD-RW
discs.
Disc access indicator
This indicator will light when the disc is being read or
written.
● Never remove the disc while the disk access indicator is lit.
Doing so will damage the data and/or the disc.
Introduction
Panel descriptions
Emergency disc eject hole
This is an emergency eject switch for the CD-R/RW disc.
If the power has been turned off (e.g., due to a power
failure), the tray will not open when you press the
CD-R/RW disc eject button. In this case, you can eject the
tray by pushing a straightened paper clip into this hole.
● Never use the emergency disc eject hole to eject the disc
while the MV-8800 is operating. Doing so will damage the
disc and/or the drive, and may make the disc jump out of the
tray.
CD-R/RW disc eject button
Press this button to open the CD-R/RW disc tray.
● If the MV-8800’s internal system is accessing the CD-R/RW
drive, pressing this button may not eject the CD tray. This is
a safety feature, not a malfunction.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-25
MV-8800_e.book 26 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Preparing your equipment and making connections
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn
off the power on all devices before making any connections.
Power amp
Monitor speakers
(powered)
Mixer, etc.
MD Recorder, etc.
Headphones
Sound module
Foot Switch
Microphone
Computer
VGA monitor
Mouse (included)
Grounding
terminal
Power cable
(included)
To power outlet
Edirol
UM-1EX, etc.
device
e.g., PR-50
M-26
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Turntable
MV-8800_e.book 27 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Preparing your equipment and making connections
Cautions when making connections
● AC inlet
Use the included power cable to connect the MV-8800 to an AC outlet.
● Connection cables
When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume level of equipment connected to the inputs
(ANALOG INPUT) may be low. If this happens, use connection cables that do not contain resistors.
● PHONO jacks
❍ If you’re not using the PHONO jacks, insert the included short pin. This will prevent noise from being
introduced via the PHONO jacks.
❍ You cannot use the PHONO and MIC/LINE analog inputs at the same time. If you
make connections to MIC/LINE, the PHONO input will be disabled.
● MIC/LINE jacks
Priority
❍ Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers. This can be
remedied by:
• Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).
• Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from speakers.
• Lowering volume levels.
❍ This instrument is equipped with balanced (TRS) type jacks. Wiring diagrams
for these jacks as shown in the illustration. Make connections after first
checking the wiring diagrams of other equipment you intend to connect.
● Grounding terminal
❍ Use this if you’ve connected a turntable. By connecting this to the grounding wire (“earth”) of your turntable
you can reduce the hum or buzz that may otherwise occur.
● Foot switch
If you are using a BOSSs FS-5U, set the polarity switch of the FS-5U as
shown in the illustration.
Polarity switch
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Introduction
Preparing your equipment and making connections
M-27
MV-8800_e.book 28 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Turning on the power
● Once the connections have been completed (p. 26), turn on power to your various devices in the order specified.
By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other
devices.
1. Make sure that the audio devices connected to the MV-8800 are powered-off.
2. Set the rear panel POWER ON switch to the ON position.
The LCD backlight (illumination) will light, and the opening screen and the MV-8800’s system software version
will be displayed.
● This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few seconds) after power up is required before
the unit will operate normally.
● When you turn on the power, you may hear a sound even though the MASTER knob is turned down; this is not
a malfunction.
● While the opening screen is displayed, the MV-8800 is checking its system and loading data required for
startup. Please wait until it is ready to operate.
● When the MV-8800 starts up, the project being worked with when the system was last shut down will be loaded
automatically.
● If you want to select and load a different project, press [F5](Select Proj). The SELECT PROJECT popup will
appear. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to choose the desired project, and then press [F5](Select). Alternatively, you
can create a new project by pressing [F1](Create New).
● To adjust the contrast of the display, turn the CONTRAST knob located at the right of the LCD.
3. When start-up is complete, the PATTERN screen will appear.
If desired, you can change settings so that the SONG screen appears when start-up is complete. Refer to the
Power Up Mode parameter (Screen Guide; p. 173).
4. Turn on the power of your audio equipment.
5. Use the MV-8800’s MASTER knob and the volume controls of your audio equipment to
adjust the volume appropriately.
M-28
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 29 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Turning on the power
Turning off the power
You must perform the Shutdown operation before turning the power off. The Shutdown operation saves the
stored parameters before powering-off, and safely stops the hard disk.
If you turn off the power without performing Shutdown, or if you turn off the power
before “You May Turn Off.” is displayed, the data and the MV-8800 itself will be
damaged. Roland will accept no responsibility for any damage that results from your
failure to perform the Shutdown operation.
1. Press [SHUTDWON].
A message of “SHUTDOWN Are you sure?” will appear.
2. Press [F5](Yes).
A message of “Save Current Project before SHUTDOWN?” will appear.
● If the Project Protect setting is turned on for the current project, the message in step 2 will not appear.
3. Press [F5](Yes).
The current project will save. When save process is completed, the “SHUTDOWN Completed. You May Turn
Off.” message will appear.
● If you press [EXIT] in step 3, shutdown will be cancelled. If you want to shutdown without saving the current
project, press [F1](No).
4. Turn down the volume of all connected equipment
5. Turn off the rear panel POWER ON switch.
Make sure that the “You May Turn Off.” message is displayed before you turn off the power.
If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the POWER switch, then unplug the power cord from
the power outlet. Refer to “Power Supply” (p. 6).
● When you turn off the power, you may hear a sound even though the MASTER knob is turned down; this is not
a malfunction.
● While the Shutdown process is occurring, system parameters and project data is being saved. This will require
a certain amount of time before the MV-8800 is ready for you to turn off the power.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Introduction
Turning on the power
M-29
MV-8800_e.book 30 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using the CD-R/RW drive
Access indicator
Emergency eject hole
Eject button
● Cautions when using the CD-R/RW drive
• Place the MV-8800 on a stable and level surface that is not subjected to vibration by external sources. If the
unit is tilted significantly, this may adversely affect the operation of the CD-R/RW drive.
• If you move the unit between locations of dramatically differing temperature and humidity, condensation
(water droplets) may form on the CD-R/RW drive. Using the unit in this state will cause malfunctions; leave
the unit for several hours to allow the condensation to disappear before attempting to use it.
• Never attempt to use the emergency eject hole to eject the disc tray when the MV-8800 is operating (when
the MV-8800’s DISK indicator or the CD-R/RW drive access indicator are lit).
• Remove the disc from the disc tray before you turn the power on or off.
• Remove the disc from the disc tray when transporting the MV-8800.
• Do not place anything other than a disc bearing the
the disc tray. Doing so will damage the CD-R/RW drive.
logo (e.g., wires, coins, any other type of disc) on
• Do not touch the lens. Doing so will make it impossible for data to be read or
written normally, and you may experience skips during playback or recording.
• If the lens becomes dusty, you may clean it using a commercially-available lens
blower-brush sold for use with camera equipment.
● Cautions for CD-R/RW disc handling
Lens
• Do not use a conventional audio CD player to play back a CD-R/RW disc used to back up a project. Doing
so will produce a high-volume sound that can damage your hearing and/or your speakers.
• Do not bend a disc, since this may make the disc unreadable or unwritable, and may cause malfunctions.
• Do not drop or stack discs.
• Do not place heavy objects on a disc or subject it to strong impact.
• To hold a disc, insert your finger in the hole and grasp it by the outer edge as
shown in the diagram. Do not allow fingerprints or scratches to occur on the
recording surface (the unprinted side), since this can make the data unreadable.
• Do not use discs in excessively dusty locations.
• Do not leave discs in direct sunlight or in a closed automobile.
• Do not leave a disc in the CD-R/RW drive for an extended time.
• To protect the disc, store it in its original case.
• Do not affix foreign objects such as labels to the label surface of the disc.
• When writing the title etc. on the label surface of the disc, use a soft felt-tipped marker.
• If the disc becomes soiled, use a soft dry cloth to wipe it lightly from the center of the disc
straight toward the outer edge. Do not wipe in a circular direction.
• Do not use cleaning agents such as cleaners or sprays made for vinyl records, or
solvents such as benzene.
M-30
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 31 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Introduction
Using the CD-R/RW drive
Using the CD-R/RW drive
Recommended discs
• We recommend CD-R discs made by the following manufacturers:
Taiyo Yuden Corporation, Mitsui Chemical Corporation, Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation,
Ricoh Corporation, Hitachi Maxell Corporation
• We recommend CD-RW discs made by the following manufacturers:
Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation, Ricoh Corporation
Inserting a disc
● Make sure that the disc is firmly seated in the CD-R/RW drive tray. If the disc is not correctly in position, it may
catch inside the drive and may be impossible to remove.
1. Press the eject button.
2. Open the disc tray.
3. Align the hold of the disc with the round retainer in the center of the CD-R/RW drive.
4. Press the disc downward until it locks into the three catches of the retainer.
● To check whether the disc is correctly in position, try lightly rotating the outer edge of the disc with your finger.
Make sure that the disc does not come off the retainer or fail to rotate smoothly.
5. Push the disc tray all the way in.
If the disc tray fails to open
If, due to a power failure or other reason, the power is turned off with a disc in the tray, you won’t be able to
eject the disc tray by pressing the eject button. If this happens, insert a straightened paper clip (or similar
object) into the emergency eject hole to eject the tray.
● Never use the emergency eject hole to eject the disc tray when the MV-8800 is operating. Doing so may
damage the disc and/or drive, and may cause the disc to fly out.
● The software locks the eject button while the MV-8800 system is using the CD-R/RW drive. This means that
pressing the eject button in such cases will not eject the tray. This is a design feature for reasons of safety, and
is not a malfunction.
1. Turn off the power of the MV-8800.
2. Insert a straightened paper clip (or similar object) into the emergency eject hole. The disc
tray will be ejected.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-31
MV-8800_e.book 32 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Basic operations
Moving the cursor
Each screen displays various parameters (items to set) or menus (items to select). To edit the value of a
parameter, move the cursor to the value you want to edit. To select a menu item, move the cursor to the
desired item. The cursor is enclosed in a frame as shown below.
Use CURSOR [
][
][
][
] to move the cursor.
Cursor
Cursor (highlighted)
Black characters
on white background
(value display)
● Finalizing a menu selection
Press [ENTER] to finalize the selected menu item. The selection or command (operation) will be executed.
Editing the value of a parameter
To edit the value of a parameter, use the VALUE dial or [DEC] [INC].
● VALUE dial
Turn the VALUE dial toward the right to increase the value, or
toward the left to decrease it.
You can hold down [SHIFT] and use the VALUE dial to change a
value in larger steps.
decrease
increase
● [DEC] / [INC]
Press [INC] to increase a value. Press [DEC] to decrease a value.
You can continue holding down [DEC] or [INC] to make the value continue changing (“repeat”). At this time,
you can hold down the other button as well to make the value change even faster (“turbo repeat”). You can
hold down [SHIFT] and use [INC] [DEC] to change a value in larger steps.
Using the F (function) buttons
The top panel F-buttons ([F1]–[F5]) have various functions assigned to them depending on the screen shown.
These buttons correspond one-to-one with the function names shown at the bottom of the screen.
M-32
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 33 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Basic operations
Using the SHIFT button
Some buttons have more than one function assigned to them; use [SHIFT] to access these additional
functions.
Hold down [SHIFT] and press the desired button.
In this manual, operations accessed using [SHIFT] are indicated as [SHIFT] + [(button name)]. Use [SHIFT]
to access the functions whose names are printed inside a blue frame on the panel of the MV-8800.
● You can use the Shift Lock parameter (Screen Guide; p. 175) to change the operation of the SHIFT button.
Inputting text
Here’s how to input alphanumeric characters, such as when specifying a file name.
1. Move the cursor to the desired location.
The cursor is the highlighted character, as shown below.
Cursor (highlighted)
2. Turn the VALUE dial.
Input the desired character. To move to the next place (toward the right) the right cursor button.
If you use the VALUE dial to input characters, turning the dial toward the right will select characters in the order
of “(a blank space) ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / 0–9 : ; < = > ? @ A–Z [ \ ] ^ _` a–z { | } ~ • ”.
● File names may not contain a blank space or certain symbols (“ * / : ; < > ? \ | •).
● Volume label names may not contain a blank space, lowercase characters, or certain symbols (“ * + , . / : ; < =
> ? [ \ ] | •).
• [F1](History)
You can recall (and re-input) up to the ten most recent names you input in the EDIT NAME popup since turning
on the power. Selects the name at the cursor in the history list then press [ENTER].
• [F2](Insert Space)
Inserts a space at the cursor location.
• [F3](Delete)
Deletes the character at the cursor location. Characters at the right of the cursor will be moved forward to fill
the gap.
• [F4](A➜a/a➜A): switch character case
Switches the character at the cursor location between uppercase and lowercase.
● Using the numeric keys to input characters
You can use the numeric keys to input alphanumeric characters. To select one of the various characters
(letter, number, or symbol) that appear on a numeric key, press the key a number of times. For example, if you
repeatedly press [3], you will cycle through the available choices for that key, which are: 3 → G → H → I → 3.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Introduction
Basic operations
M-33
MV-8800_e.book 34 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Basic operations
To zoom-in/zoom-out the waveform display
In screens that display a waveform (such as the AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen), you can use the following
button operations to zoom-in or zoom-out the waveform display.
Button
Operation
[SHIFT] + CURSOR [
]
Zoom-out the time axis display
[SHIFT] + CURSOR [
]
Zoom-in the time axis display
[SHIFT] + CURSOR [
]
Zoom-out the amplitude (volume level) display
[SHIFT] + CURSOR [
]
Zoom-in the amplitude (volume level) display
When editing the waveform, you will be able to work more accurately if you zoom-in (magnify) the waveform
display so that you can see the editing points in greater detail.
If you want to see the overall picture of the entire waveform, you can zoom-out the display.
Stopping the output of the sampler
If you press [SHIFT] + [STOP ( )], all currently playing sounds (audio phrases, partials, external MIDI
devices) and the sequencer will stop.
You can use this to forcibly stop the sound if a long audio phrase is playing.
● Outputs the Note off messages from a MIDI OUT connector.
M-34
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 35 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Introduction
Velocity pad operations
Velocity pad operations
Performing with the velocity pads
The sound source that is played by the velocity pads will change depending on the current track.
● The part that is actually being played by the pads is shown in the following location. In the example shown here,
an instruments part 1 is being played.
• A.Phrs=Audio phrase
• Part01=Instrument part 1
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the track you want to play from the pads.
The selected track (the current track) will be highlighted. The sounds played by the velocity pads will change
depending on the type of track you’ve selected (MIDI track, audio track, or pattern track).
Current track
Audio source
MIDI track
Instruments or Note number
Audio track
Audio phrase
Pattern track
Pattern
3. Strike the VELOCITY PADS.
The volume will vary depending on the force (velocity) with which you strike the pads. Some sounds will also
change when you apply pressure (aftertouch) to a pad after striking it.
● There will be no sound if no partial is assigned to the pad (note number) you strike, or if no audio phrase is
assigned. You’ll need to assign a sound to the pad as described in “Playing the imported data immediately
(Quick Assign)” (p. 75).
● If the sound to be played is an audio phrase, you can have the volume change according to the force used in
tapping the pads by switching Velocity Control to On. For details, refer to “AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen”
(Screen Guide; p. 155).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-35
MV-8800_e.book 36 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Velocity pad operations
Switching a pad bank
A “pad bank” is a group of settings for the sixteen pads of the top panel. By switching pad banks you can
access a large number of sounds. The MV-8800 provides the following number of pad banks.
Current track
Audio source
Number of banks (total available sounds)
MIDI track
Patch
6 (6 x 16 = 96)
Audio track
Audio phrase
32 (32 x 16 = 512)
Pattern track
Pattern
8 (8 x 16 = 128)
1. Press [PAD BANKS].
The red PAD BANKS indicator will light, and the PAD BANKS popup (Screen Guide; p. 5) will appear.
2. Select the desired pad bank.
Turn the VALUE dial to change pad banks.
3. Press [PAD BANKS] once again.
The red PAD BANKS indicator will go dark, and the popup will disappear.
● Directly selecting a pad bank
You can switch pad banks by directly specifying a number.
1. Hold down [PAD BANKS], and strike the VELOCITY PADS (1–16) that corresponds to the
desired pad bank.
The pad bank will switch. You can switch between pad banks 1–6 for instruments, or between pad banks 1–
16 for audio phrases.
● You can’t use this method to switch to audio phrase pad banks 17–32. Press [PAD BANKS] and use the VALUE
dial or the numeric keys to specify the bank number.
M-36
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 37 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Velocity pad operations
Naming a pad bank
1. Press [PAD BANKS].
The PAD BANKS indicator (red) will light, and the PAD BANKS popup (Screen Guide; p. 5) will appear.
2. Press [F1](Name).
The EDIT PAD BANK NAME (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear. Input the desired bank name.
3. When you’ve finished entering the name, press [F5](OK).
Fixed Velocity function
Here’s how you can disable the velocity sensitivity of the pads.
1. Press [FIXED VELOCITY].
The indicator will light orange, and the FIXED VELOCITY function will be turned on. In this state, the pads will
produce a fixed velocity (initial value = 127) regardless of how strongly you strike them.
You can set the velocity value as desired. Refer to “Fixed Velocity Level” (p. 174).
● To turn off the FIXED VELOCITY function, press [FIXED VELOCITY] once again to make the indicator go dark.
Multilevel function
Here’s how you can use the sixteen velocity pads to play a single partial over sixteen different velocity levels.
1. Strike the VELOCITY PADS whose sound you want to play over sixteen pre-determined
velocity levels.
The sound you play will be selected.
2. Press [MULTILEVEL].
The indicator will light orange, and the MULTILEVEL function will be turned on. In this state, pad 1 plays a low
velocity and pad 16 plays the maximum velocity.
● Your actual playing strength is ignored while MULTILEVEL is on.
● To turn off the MULTILEVEL function, press [MULTILEVEL] once again to make the indicator go dark.
● The pad you strike determines which of the sixteen velocity levels are produced.
Pad
Velocity
Pad
Velocity
Pad
Velocity
Pad
Velocity
1
7
5
39
9
71
13
103
2
15
6
47
10
79
14
111
3
23
7
55
11
87
15
119
4
31
8
63
12
95
16
127
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Introduction
Velocity pad operations
M-37
MV-8800_e.book 38 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Velocity pad operations
Hold function
Here’s how you can “hold down” a velocity pad without having to actually keep your finger on it.
1. Press and hold the pad you want to “hold.”
2. While continuing to press the VELOCITY PADS, press [HOLD].
The HOLD indicator (red) will light, and the HOLD function will be turned on. Now that pad will continue
sounding even after you take your finger off of it.
● To defeat HOLD, press [HOLD] once again to make the indicator go dark.
Roll function
Here’s how you can play a roll (rapidly repeated strikes).
1. Press and hold [ROLL], and strike the VELOCITY PADS that you want to roll.
A roll will be played on the pad as long as you continue pressing [ROLL].
You can change the interval (spacing) of the roll. Refer to “Pad Roll Interval” (p. 174).
M-38
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 39 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Quick Start
Quick Start
Listening to the demo songs
The MV-8800 comes equipped with a wide variety of features for creating songs. To get a better idea of what
these functions are, try listening to the demo songs.
Loading a project
A project containing a demo song was saved to the MV-8800’s internal hard disk when the unit was shipped
from the factory. Use the following procedure to load the project containing the demo song to the MV-8800’s
memory.
1
2
Press [PROJECT].
The PROJECT MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 162) will appear.
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] to select the LOAD PROJ icon, and
press [ENTER].
The LOAD PROJECT screen (Screen Guide; p. 164) will appear.
The project saved on the hard disk are listed in the display.
3
Move the cursor to the project that you want to load, and press
[F5](Execute).
The display will ask “Save Current Project before loading project?”
4
Press [F5](Yes) or [F1](No).
F-button
Action
[F1](No)
The selected project will be loaded without saving the current project.
[F5](Yes)
The current project will be saved, and then the selected project will be loaded.
The project is loaded to the MV-8800’s memory.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-39
MV-8800_e.book 40 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Quick Start
Start playback the demo song
This procedure plays back the demo song in the loaded project.
1
Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
(QS_SONG.bmp)
2
3
Press [PLAY ( )].
The PLAY indicator will light, and the demo song playback will begin.
Press [STOP ( )].
The PLAY indicator will go dark, and the demo song playback will stop.
About the demo songs
Use of the demo song supplied with this product for any purpose other than private, personal enjoyment
without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law. Additionally, this data must not be copied,
nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder.
For more details about the demo songs, refer to the booklet “MV-8800 Content Discs.”
M-40
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 41 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using the velocity pads
Quick Start
Try tapping the velocity pads to play a variety of different sounds.
Performing instrument sounds
Using the velocity pads
Tap the velocity pads to play drum kits, piano, and other instrument sounds.
1
Press [INSTRUMENTS].
2
3
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select the part to which you want to play.
The INSTRUMENTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 114) will appear.
The selected part number is highlighted. The highlighted part is called the current part.
Strike the velocity pads.
The patch assigned to the current part plays.
If you want to use the MV-8800 in even more advanced ways, read the following pages.
• Velocity pad operations (p. 35)
• Making an instrument settings (p. 111)
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-41
MV-8800_e.book 42 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Quick Start
Performing audio phrases
Tap the velocity pads to perform drum loops, vocal phrases, and other sounds.
1
Press [AUDIO PHRASES].
2
Strike the velocity pads.
The AUDIO PHRASES (PAD) screen (Screen Guide; p. 152) will appear.
You will hear the sound of audio phrases.
If you want to use the MV-8800 in even more advanced ways, read the following pages.
• Velocity pad operations (p. 35)
• Making an audio phrase settings (p. 111)
M-42
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 43 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Creating a song
Quick Start
Try using the sequencer to record a performance.
Recording a pattern
Creating a song
This procedure records performances with the velocity pads to patterns.
Setting up a pattern
1
Press [PATTERN].
The PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91) will appear.
2
The PATTERN LIST screen (Screen Guide; p. 96) will appear.
3
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select a pattern with the name “(Empty)” and
press [F5](Select).
Press [F1](Pattern List).
A pattern (with a time signature of 4/4 and length of two measures) without anything recorded to it is
set up, and the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91) is displayed.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-43
MV-8800_e.book 44 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Quick Start
Setting up tracks
4
5
6
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select the MIDI track which name is “MIDI
Track 1.”
Press [F2](Track Param).
The TRACK PARAMETER popup (Screen Guide; p. 11) will appear.
Using the Output Assign parameter, select the part for the instrument
to be played by the track.
When you tap the velocity pads, the sounds for the selected part are played.
(QS_TRACK_PARAMETER.bmp)
7
Once you have determined the part to be performed, press [F5](Close).
Recording the performance
8
9
Press [REC ( )].
The REC indicator will blink, and the PATTERN RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup (Screen
Guide; p. 101) will appear.
Press [PLAY ( )].
The REC indicator and PLAY indicator will light, and recording will begin.
Start the performance. The performance is recorded to the pattern.
10
When you’ve finished recording, press [STOP ( )].
The REC and PLAY indicators will go dark, and recording will stop.
Playing back the performance
11
12
13
Press [TOP (
)].
The current time location will return to the beginning of the pattern.
Press [PLAY ( )].
The PLAY indicator will light, and the pattern playback will begin.
Press [STOP ( )].
The PLAY indicator will go dark, and the pattern playback will stop.
If you want to use the MV-8800 in even more advanced ways, read the following pages.
• Using the sequencer (p. 131)
• Recording a song / pattern (p. 145)
• Editing a song / pattern (p. 167)
M-44
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 45 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Quick Start
Quick Start
Saving a project
To prevent the loss of the recorded performance data due to unanticipated accidents, save the data to the
MV-8800’s internal hard disk.
Creating a song
1
2
Press [PROJECT].
The PROJECT MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 162) will appear.
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] to select the SAVE PROJ icon, and press
[ENTER].
A message of “Save Current Project?” will appear.
(QS_SaveCurrent.bmp)
3
Press [F5](Yes).
The project in the MV-8800's memory is saved to the internal hard disk.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-45
MV-8800_e.book 46 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Assembling additional materials
Performances with the MV-8800 can also involve importing sounds from audio CDs and sampling sounds
using a microphone, and then performing using the velocity pads. Using the sounds you assemble enables
you to create highly original works.
Importing sound from an audio CD
Here’s how to import sounds from an audio CD, then assign them to audio phrases.
Viewing the audio CD contents
1
2
3
4
Insert your audio CD into the CD-R/RW drive.
Press [IMPORT].
The IMPORT screen (Screen Guide; p. 219) will appear.
Press [F1](Select Drive).
The SELECT DRIVE popup (Screen Guide; p. 6) will appear.
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “Audio CD,” and press [F5](Select).
The contents of the audio CD are displayed.
(QS_IMPORT_CD.bmp)
Specifying the range and importing the sounds
5
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select the CD track that you want to import,
and press [F5](Import).
The SET TIME popup (Screen Guide; p. 225) will appear.
M-46
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 47 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Quick Start
Set the point in the CD track at which importing is to start with the In
Time parameter and the point at which importing is to stop with the
Out Time parameter, then press [F5](Execute).
Quick Start
6
Assembling additional materials
The sounds in the specified range on the CD track are sampled and imported into wave memory. The
RESULT popup (Screen Guide; p. 211) will appear.
(QS_IMPORT_RESULT.bmp)
Creating audio phrases from samples
7
8
Press [F3](Quick Assign).
The Select Quick Assign message (Screen Guide; p. 213) will appear.
Press [F3](AsgnToAPhrs).
The AUDIO PHRASE QUICK ASSIGN popup (Screen Guide; p. 214) will appear.
(QS_Q_ASGN_TO_APHRS.bmp)
9
Set the pad bank number and pad number to which you want to assign
the sample with the Assign To parameter, then press [F5] (Execute).
The sample will be assigned to the specified velocity pad.
After pressing [AUDIO PHRASES], you can then tap the velocity pad to play the sampled audio CD
sound.
If you want to use the MV-8800 in even more advanced ways, read the following pages.
• Importing data (p. 63)
• Making audio phrase settings (p. 111)
• Editing a sample (p. 121)
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-47
MV-8800_e.book 48 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Quick Start
Sampling sounds using a mic
You can sample sounds using a mic and assign the sounds to patches.
Inputting audio with a mic
1
2
3
4
Connect a mic to the left ANALOG INPUT (MIC/LINE) jack.
Press [SAMPLING].
The SAMPLING screen (Screen Guide; p. 209) will appear.
Set the Input Select parameter to Analog(L).
The LEVEL meter fluctuates when the audio from the mic is input.
Adjust the audio input level using SENS knobs.
Adjust the audio input level so that the level meters move as high as possible in the range of -12 dB –
0 dB.
(QS_SAMPLING.bmp)
Sampling
5
6
7
Set the Sample Type parameter to Mono.
The input audio is monaurally sampled.
Press [F5](Start).
The sampling will begin. Input the audio.
7. Press [F5](Stop).
The sampling will stop. The input audio is recorded to the wave memory as a sample.
The RESULT popup (Screen Guide; p. 211) will appear. You can preview the recorded sample by
holding down the [F4] (Preview) button.
(QS_SAMPLING_RESULT.bmp)
M-48
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 49 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Quick Start
With the Original Key parameter, set the note number you want to use
for the performance with sampled pitches unchanged.
Assembling additional materials
8
9
10
Quick Start
Creating a patch from the sample
Press [F3](Quick Assign).
The Select Quick Assign message (Screen Guide; p. 213) will appear.
Press [F5](AsgnToPatch).
The PATCH QUICK ASSIGN popup (Screen Guide; p. 216) will appear.
(QS_Q_ASGN_TO_PATCH.bmp)
11
12
13
Specify the Part parameter which you want to assign a sample.
Place a check mark (✔) at the Make Keyboard parameter.
This allows you to perform with scales included.
With the Assign To parameter, set the pad bank number and pad
number range to which you want to assign the sample, then press
[F5](Execute).
The sample will be assigned to the specified velocity pads (note number). After pressing
[INSTRUMENTS], you can then tap the velocity pads to play the sampled sounds.
If you want to use the MV-8800 in even more advanced ways, read the following pages.
• Sampling (p. 83)
• Creating a patch (p. 95)
• Editing a sample (p. 121)
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-49
MV-8800_e.book 50 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Try using the various functions
The MV-8800 features many other functions in addition to the ones introduced here. Read the pages
corresponding to the features you want to use.
To learn more about how the MV-8800 is structured and the specialized vocabulary used:
• An overview of the MV-8800 (p. 51)
To create finished songs:
• Using the Mixer (p. 207)
• Using effects (p. 209)
• Automating mixing operations (Automation) (p. 219)
• Creating an audio CD (p. 227)
To operate the MV-8800 using a mouse:
• Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800 (p. 251)
To combine audio and video:
• About V-LINK (p. 311)
• Using the velocity pads to display images (Pix Jam) (p. 285)
To connect the MV-8800 to a computer:
• Connecting to your computer via USB (p. 289)
M-50
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 51 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 1
An overview of the MV-8800
1
An overview of the MV-8800
Basic structure
Broadly speaking, the MV-8800 consists of five sections: controller, sequencer, sampler, mixer, and effects.
Import
Sampling
Sequencer section
Effects section
Play back
Sampler section
Record
Perform
Mixer section
Performance data flow
Audio flow
Controller section
(velocity pads and sliders)
Controller section
This contains the velocity pads, sliders, and C (control) knobs. The performance data produced when you
strike the velocity pads or turn the knobs is sent from the controller section to the sampler section, the
sequencer section, and to external MIDI devices.
Sequencer section
This records the performance data from the controller section, and the MIDI messages from an external MIDI
device. The recorded performance data and MIDI messages can be transmitted to the sampler for playback.
By sending the recorded MIDI messages from the sequencer to MIDI OUT, you can control an external MIDI
device or a V-LINK device.
Sampler section
A sampler is a device that captures audio from an analog input, or imports a wave file from a hard disk or CD,
and holds this data as waveform data in wave memory (DIMM).
When the sampler receives performance data from the controller section or sequencer section, or MIDI
messages from an external MIDI device, it can play back these samples while varying the pitch, applying a
filter, or modifying the envelope, and output the resulting sound to the mixer section and effects section.
● For details on the types and specifications of DIMM that the MV-8800 can use, refer to “Wave Memory (RAM)”
(Appendices; p. 76).
Mixer section
This mixes the audio output from the sampler section, effects section, and analog inputs, and outputs the
combined sound to the master outputs and to headphones.
Effects section
The sound from the sampler output and the sound from the analog inputs can be processed by the effects
section in a variety of ways.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-51
MV-8800_e.book 52 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Sampler structure
The sampler consists of “samples,” which are stored in wave memory, and two types of sound generators --“Instrument” and “Audio Phrase” — which allow these samples to be played using the velocity pads and the
sequencer.
The Instrument sound generator is the appropriate choice when you want to play the sounds of pitched
instruments such as a piano, or instruments such as a drum set, for which each velocity pad (note) will have
a different sound.
The Audio Phrase sound generator is the appropriate one for handling looped phrases or vocal phrases of
several measures, since the phrase can be synchronized to the sequencer’s tempo without changing the pitch
of the phrase.
Samples
Each piece of waveform data in wave memory is called a “sample.”
Samples are created by the following operations.
• Sampling
• Importing (loading) a file from hard disk or CD-ROM
• Recording to an audio track
Samples cannot be played directly from the velocity pads or sequencer. In order to play samples, you must
assign the samples to a patch used by an instrument, or assign a sample to an audio phrase.
Sample
Wave memory
(DIMM)
Sample
Patches
A “patch” is a set of sounds played from the velocity pads or the sequencer. A patch is analogous to an
instrument such as a piano or drum set. Each patch is created by assigning sounds called “partials” to each
velocity pad (each note). Up to 96 partials can be assigned to one patch.
Partial96
Partial01
SMT
Filter Envelope
Amp Envelope
Filter
Amplifier
LFO
Patch
M-52
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 53 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Sampler structure
Partials
Partials are the ingredients from which a patch is constructed. In the case of a drum set patch, each separate
sound such as snare or hi-hat corresponds to a different partial.
Wave memory
(DIMM)
1
An overview of the MV-8800
SMT
Filter Envelope
Amp Envelope
Filter
Amplifier
Determines the
character of the sound.
Determines the
volume change and pan.
LFO
Adds cyclic change.
Partial
Each partial consists of the following six things.
● SMT (Sample Mix Table)
This assigns the samples that are the basis for the partial’s sound. You can assign up to four samples to the
SMT. If desired, you can make settings so that different samples will sound depending on how strongly you
play a velocity pad.
● Filter
This specifies how the frequency content of the sound will change.
● Amplifier
This specifies the volume and panning (stereo position).
● Filter Envelope
This specifies how the frequency content will change over time.
● Amp Envelope
This specifies how the volume will change over time.
● LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)
This specifies cyclic change (modulation). You can use the LFO to modulate the pitch, filter, or amp. Applying
LFO to the pitch produces vibrato, applying it to the filter produces wah, and applying it to the amp produces
tremolo.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-53
MV-8800_e.book 54 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Sampler structure
Instruments
Instruments are where you can assign patches so that the patches can be played from the velocity pads or
sequencer. Each instrument has sixteen “parts,” and can handle sixteen patches simultaneously.
Part16
Part1
Patch
Instruments
Audio phrases
Since audio phrases can be synchronized to the tempo of the sequencer without changing their pitch, they are
appropriate for handling loop phrases or vocal phrases of several measures in length.
Wave memory
(DIMM)
Pitch
Sample
Audio phrase
M-54
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
BPM sync
MV-8800_e.book 55 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Mixer structure
The mixer section mixes the following sounds.
• Sound produced by each part in the instrument
• Sound from audio phrases
• Sound from audio tracks
• Sound from the effects
1
• Sound received at the analog inputs.
An overview of the MV-8800
An independent three-band EQ is provided for each part of the instrument and each audio track.
Sound from
audio tracks
Sound from
audio phrases
Sound from
instrument parts
1–16
Sounds from Sound from the
the effects analog inputs
33-band EQ
Pan
Volume
Mixer
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-55
MV-8800_e.book 56 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Effect structure
The effects section consists of three effects processors: MFX (multi-effect), delay/chorus, and reverb
The MTK (Mastering Tool Kit) can be used only when the MV-8800 is in Mastering mode.
MFX (multi-effect)
The multi-effect provides 25 different effects (algorithms), and you can select the desired one of these to use.
You can change the routing to apply this effect to a variety of locations.
● MFX (multi-effect), delay/chorus, and reverb cannot be used while using MTK (mastering tool kit).
Delay/chorus
Delay is an effect that delays the sound.
Chorus is an effect that adds depth and spaciousness to the sound.
You can choose to use either delay or chorus.
Reverb
Reverb is an effect that simulates the reverberation occurring in a concert hall or cave.
MTK (mastering tool kit)
This is available only in Mastering mode.
It is an effect that makes the volume of the entire song more consistent, and boosts the loudness to an ideal
level.
M-56
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 57 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Sequencer structure
The sequencer records and plays back the performance data from the velocity pads, etc. The performance
data recorded in the sequencer is collectively referred to as a “sequence” (or “sequence data”).
The MV-8800 has two types of sequencers: song and pattern.
Song
1
MIDI tracks
(up to 128 tracks)
An overview of the MV-8800
Audio tracks
(up to 8 tracks)
1
Pattern track
2
1
3
Pattern1
Pattern2
Pattern3
MIDI tracks
MIDI tracks
MIDI tracks
(up to 64 tracks)
(up to 64 tracks)
(up to 64 tracks)
Audio track
Audio track
Audio track
Songs
On the MV-8800, performance data for an entire composition is called a “song.”
A song consists of the following tracks.
• MIDI tracks (up to 128 tracks)
• Audio tracks (up to 8 tracks)
• Pattern track
• Mute control track
• Tempo track
In addition, a song also contains instrument, mixer, and effect settings.
Patterns
A pattern is another place (separate from a song) in which performance data can be recorded.
A pattern consists of the following tracks.
• MIDI tracks (up to 64 tracks)
• Audio track
• Mute control track
Unlike a song, a pattern does not include instrument, mixer, or effect settings. Since a pattern can be called
from the pattern track of a song, it’s convenient to use patterns to record phrases that are repeated several
times in your song.
Since patterns can also be called from the velocity pads, they can also be used in your live performances.
Yet another way to use patterns is as scratch pads for storing musical ideas that come to mind.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-57
MV-8800_e.book 58 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Sequencer structure
MIDI tracks
A MIDI track records performance data for an instrument or an external MIDI channel.
Each item of performance data recorded on a MIDI track is called an “event.”
MIDI tracks also record automation data for audio tracks or effects.
There is also a Play Quantize function that non-destructively adjusts the playback timing for the performance
data of each track.
Event
Transmit automation data to
an audio track or effect
MIDI track
:
Transmit performance data to each
instrument part or external MIDI device
MIDI track
Audio tracks
An audio track directly records audio data, just like a tape recorder. Each item of audio data recorded on an
audio track is called an “audio event.” Audio events can be synchronized to the tempo without affecting their
pitch.
You can also paste audio phrases into an audio track and play them.
Audio event
Audio track
:
Audio track
Paste
Audio phrase
Pattern track
The pattern track lets you assign patterns. The pattern track records the pattern numbers, and each such
number is called a “pattern event.”
Pattern event
Pattern track
001
499
Recall
Recall
001
499
...
002
500
Pattern
Mute control track
This track records mute data for MIDI tracks, audio tracks, and the pattern track.
Tempo track
This track records changes in tempo (BPM and time signature) over time.
M-58
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 59 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Data structure
Project
On the MV-8800, the data used to create your compositions is managed in units called “projects.”
A project consists of the following data.
• Songs (up to 16 songs)
• Patterns (up to 500 patterns)
1
• Samples (up to 9999 samples)
An overview of the MV-8800
• Audio phrases (up to 512 audio phrases)
• Various libraries
• Image clips (up to 16 clips)
Song1
Song5
Song9
Song13
Song2
Song6
Song10
Song14
Song3
Song7
Song11
Song15
Song4
Song8
Song12
Song16
Songs (up to 16)
Samples (up to 9999)
Parch library
MFX library
Patterns (up to 500)
Audio phrases
(up to 512)
Delay/chorus library
Reverb library
Image clips (up to 16)
MTK library
MIDI clip library
Project
When you save data to the hard disk or load data from the hard disk, the data is saved or loaded as a project.
Different songs within a project can share samples, audio phrases, patterns, and library data.
If you create a new project, you’ll be able to create completely different songs.
● The entire project is loaded into the MV-8800’s internal memory, and all of the operations are performed in
memory. Unlike operations that use a hard disk or other media, processing will be quick and stress-free.
Songs
On the MV-8800, the data needed to play one composition is collectively called a “song.”
A song consists of the following data.
• MIDI tracks (up to 128 tracks)
• Audio tracks (up to 8 tracks)
• Pattern track
• Mute control track
• Tempo track
• Instrument
• Mixer
• Effects
● There can be up to sixteen songs in a project, but the actual maximum number may be less depending on the
amount of data (events) that is created.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-59
MV-8800_e.book 60 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Data structure
Patterns
A “pattern” is another place (separate from a song) in which performance data can be recorded.
A pattern consists of the following tracks.
• MIDI tracks (up to 64 tracks)
• Audio track
• Mute control track
Since a pattern can be called from the pattern track of a song, it’s convenient to use patterns to record phrases
that are repeated several times in your song.
Since patterns can also be called from the velocity pads, they can also be played in real time during a live
performance.
Yet another way to use patterns is as scratch pads for storing musical ideas that come to mind.
Libraries
Libraries are places that can store various types of settings.
When you’ve got some settings that you’re really pleased with you can register them in the appropriate library
and share them among different songs.
● Patch library
This is a library for patches. You can register 128 patches in the patch library.
● MFX library
This is a library for MFX settings. You can register 100 different settings in the MFX library. In addition, 34
preset settings are provided in a special read-only library.
● Delay/chorus library
This is a library for delay/chorus settings. You can register 50 different settings in the delay/chorus library. In
addition, 2 preset settings are provided in a special read-only library.
● Reverb library
This is a library for reverb settings. You can register 50 settings in the reverb library. In addition, 4 preset
settings are provided in a special read-only library.
● MTK (mastering tool kit) library
This is a library for MTK (mastering tool kit) settings. You can register 50 settings in the MTK library. In
addition, 21 preset settings are provided in a special read-only library.
● MIDI clip library
Up to 100 sections of a MIDI track (or multiple tracks) can be registered in the MIDI clip library.
For example, you could save different variations of drum patterns (intro, fill-in, break, etc.) in the MIDI clip
library, and use them to rapidly assemble the rhythm track for a song.
M-60
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 61 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
About modes
The MV-8800 operates in one of four modes: Song mode, Pattern mode, Mixdown mode, or Mastering mode.
Song mode
In this mode you can record, play, and edit songs. You will be able to use up to 128 MIDI tracks, 8 audio tracks,
the pattern track, the mute control track, and the tempo track.
1
The MV-8800 will always start up in this mode.
An overview of the MV-8800
Pattern mode
In this mode you can record, play, and edit patterns. You will be able to use up to 64 MIDI tracks, one audio
track, and the mute control track.
Mixdown mode
In this mode you can record the playback of your song as a stereo WAV file on the internal hard disk. This
process is called “mixdown.” The files recorded in this mode are saved in the MIXDOWNTR folder of the
internal hard disk.
You can’t record into a song while this mode is selected, but you can play back and edit the song.
In order to master a completed song, you must first mix it down.
Mastering mode
In this mode you can use the MTK (mastering tool kit) to adjust the tonal character and loudness of a WAV file
you’ve created in Mixdown mode, and re-record it as a different WAV file on the hard disk. This process is
called “mastering.” The files recorded in this mode are saved in the MASTERTR folder of the internal hard disk.
When you’re in this mode, you can only play back or record the WAV file that’s being mastered.
Music CDs are normally created from WAV files that have been mastered.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-61
MV-8800_e.book 62 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
About modes
M-62
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 63 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 2
Importing data
2
Importing data
Loading the pre-installed patches
When shipped from the factory, the MV-8800’s internal hard disk contains a variety of patches (“pre-installed
patches”) that you will find convenient when creating songs, such as drum kits and bass sounds. To use the
pre-installed patches (Appendices; p. 14), load them in the same way as any other patches (Load Patch).
1. Press [INSTRUMANTS].
The INSTRUMENTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 114) will appear.
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Load Patch” and press [F5](Select).
The LOAD PATCH screen (Screen Guide; p. 150) will appear.
4. Make sure that the current drive is the MV-8800’s internal hard disk, and use CURSOR [
[
][
][
]
] to select the “PATCHES” folder.
5. Press CURSOR [
].
The contents of the PATCHES folder will appear.
6. Select a folder and press CURSOR [
].
The patches are organized into folders by their type. Select the folder containing the type of patches you want
to load, and press CURSOR [ ].
The contents of the selected folder (patch data) will appear.
● You can audition a patch before actually loading and using it. Refer to “Auditioning or previewing before you
import” (p. 74).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-63
MV-8800_e.book 64 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Loading the pre-installed patches
7. Move CURSOR [
][
] to the patch that you want to load and press [F5](Load).
The ASSIGN TO PART / LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide; p. 224) will appear.
8. Specify the parameters.
● If you want to import into only one of these (part only or library only), turn the other setting Off.
• Part
If the To parameter is set to “Part,” specifies the part in which the new patch will be loaded.
Range:
Off, 1–16
• Library
If the To parameter is set to “Library,” specifies the library number in which the new patch will be loaded.
Range:
Off, 1–128
• F-buttons
F-button
Explanation
[F3](With Delete)
Deletes the samples used by the specified part or library patch (Delete Patch), and then load
the data
[F5](Execute)
Loads the patch to the specified location.
9. Press [F5](Execute).
The patch will be imported into the specified part and library,
M-64
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 65 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Importing the WAV or AIFF files
You can import a WAV file or AIFF file and use it as sample data for the MV-8800.
● Some AIFF files are recorded in the AIFF-C (AIFC) format. The MV-8800 cannot import AIFF files recorded in
this format.
1. Press [IMPORT].
The IMPORT screen (Screen Guide; p. 219) will appear.
2. Press [F1](Select Drive).
2
The SELECT DRIVE popup will appear.
Importing data
3. Use CURSOR [
] [ ] to select the disk containing the WAV/AIFF file you want to import,
and press [F5](Select).
The contents of the disk will be displayed.
4. Use CURSOR [
][
][
][
] to select the WAV/AIFF file you want to import.
Press CURSOR [ ] to show the contents of the folder. To return to the “parent folder” in which you were
previously, press CURSOR [ ].
• F-buttons
F-button
Explanation
[F1](Select Drive)
Displays the SELECT DRIVE popup, letting you switch the drive form which to select files.
[F2](View)
Here you can limit the type of the file that will appear in the IMPORT screen.
[F3](Mark On/Off)
Turns the check mark on/off for a file.
[F4](Preview)
Auditions the currently-highlighted file. To hear auditioning, press [F4](Preview).
[F5](Import)
Imports the selected or check marked file(s).
● By using [F3](Mark On/Off) to assign a mark to files you want to import, you can import multiple files in a single
operation.
● By pressing [MENU] and selecting “All Mark” you can select or de-select all files on the list.
5. Press [F5](Import).
The data will be imported, and the RESULT popup will appear.Here you can audition the imported data. A
sample number will be assigned to the imported data.
● The sample number is shown above the waveform display.
fig.sample-result-screen
6. Specify the parameters.
• Start Point / End Point
Specify the points at which the sample will start playing and stop playing. The Start Point - End Point region
is highlighted.
Range:
000000000.000–The end of sample
• BPM Base Note
Draws measure and beat lines on the displayed sample.
● The BPM is displayed below the BPM Base Note. The displayed BPM value is calculated from the BPM Base
Note setting and the playback length of the sample.
Range:
,
,
(initial value),
,
/ x 1–x 4–x 65535
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-65
MV-8800_e.book 66 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Importing the WAV or AIFF files
• Truncate
Deletes the portions of the sample before the Start Point and after the End Point.
Range:
Off, On
• Normalize
Raises the overall level of the sample without allowing the maximum level to be exceeded.
Range:
Off, On
● You can’t use Undo function to bring back a truncated or normalized sample.
• Original Key
Specifies the basic pitch. When you play this key, the sample will sound at its original pitch (the pitch at which
it was sampled).
Range:
0 (C -)–60 (C 4)–127 (G 9)
• Loop
Specifies how [F4](Preview) will operate. You can also make setting of loop playback when you assign the
sample to pad as a Partial or an Audio Phrase.
Value
Explanation
Off
The sample will audition once from the Start Point to the End Point.
On
The sample will repeatedly audition from the Start Point to the End Point.
• F-buttons
F-button
Explanation
[F1](Retry)
Discards the displayed sample will be discarded, and retries the sampling operation. The
IMPORT screen will appear.
[F2](Name)
Displays the EDIT NAME popup, where you can edit the sample name.
[F3](Quick Assign)
Displays the SELECT QUICK ASSIGN popup.
[F4](Preview)
Auditions the currently-highlighted sample. To hear auditioning, hold down [F4](Preview).
[F5](OK)
The RESULT popup will close. The imported data will be added to the list in the SAMPLE
MANAGER screen (Screen Guide; p. 169).
● If you want to use the imported data as an audio phrase or patch, press [F3](Quick Assign) to get the Select
Quick Assign message (Screen Guide; p. 213).
You can use PREVIEW [FROM (
)] and [TO (
located) near the Start Point or End Point.
Preview
[TO (
)]
[FROM (
)] to audition the region (the side at which the cursor is
Explanation
Playback sample from a point slightly earlier (Preview Length) than the current editing point.
)]
Playback sample for a short time (Preview Length) from the current editing point.
7. Press [F5](OK).
The RESULT popup will close. The imported data will be added to the list in the SAMPLE MANAGER screen.
Check the sample number that was assigned in step 5.
● If you want to use the imported data as a patch or audio phrase, use the Quick Assign function in step 7. For
details, refer to “Playing the imported data immediately (Quick Assign)” (p. 75).
M-66
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 67 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Importing the WAV or AIFF files
Options when importing
If you press [MENU] then select “Importing the WAV or AIFF files” (p. 65) in step 4, the IMPORT OPTIONS
popup will appear.
2
Importing data
• Auto Divide
The Auto Divide function detects regions of silence during sampling, and divides the sample into several
samples at these points.
Value
Explanation
Off
The waveform will be imported without being divided.
On
The waveform will be divided at regions of silence.
• Gap Time
When Auto Divide is On, this parameter specifies the length of the silent regions that will be detected.
Range: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0 sec
● If you are importing multiple files, the Auto Divide settings are not used.
● A maximum of 96 samples can be divided.
• Pre Emphasis
Specify whether emphasis processing will be applied when you import a music data file.
Value
Explanation
Off
Emphasis processing will not be applied to the imported data.
On
Emphasis processing will be applied to the imported data.
● The amount of time required to execute the emphasis.
● The high frequency range of the inputted sample will be boosted when Pre Emphasis is On.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-67
MV-8800_e.book 68 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Importing the WAV or AIFF files
● Check multiple samples you have captured
The RESULT (MULTIPLE) popup appears when multiple samples are captured as a result of sampling or
import process. On the RESULT (MULTIPLE) popup, following operations can be done.
• Edit sample name
• Preview samples
• Assign multiple samples to pads at one time
• Delete multiple samples at one time
Wave Display
Display waveform of the sample selected on sample list.
Sample List
Display captured samples as list. Below the list, number and total size of captured samples are displayed.
• F-buttons
F-button
Explanation
[F1](Retry)
“Retry sure?” message will appear. Press [F5](Yes) to delete captured sample.
[F2](Name)
The EDIT NAME popup will appear. You can edit the name of sample selected on sample list.
[F3](Quick Assign)
The SELECT QUICK ASSIGN popup will appear. Assign captured multiple samples to pads
at one time.
[F4](Preview)
Auditions the currently-highlighted file in the sample list.
[F5](OK)
The RESULT (MULTIPLE) popup will close.
Press [F5](OK) when you complete to edit sample name or preview the sample. The RESULT (MULTIPLE)
popup will be closed.
If you like to assign captured samples to pads as partials or audio phrases, press [F3](Quick Assign). The
Select Quick Assign message (Screen Guide; p. 213) will appear.
• F-buttons
M-68
F-button
Explanation
[F3](AssignToAphrs)
The AUDIO PHRASE QUICK ASSIGN (MULTIPLE) popup (Screen Guide; p. 215) will
appear. The multiple samples will assign to the specified pads as audio phrase.
[F5](AssignToPatch)
The PATCH QUICK ASSIGN (MULTIPLE) popup (Screen Guide; p. 218) will appear. The
multiple samples will assign to the specified pads as patch.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 69 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Importing the WAV or AIFF files
● Viewing only specific types of file
Press [F2](View) in IMPORT screen, the VIEW FILE TYPE popup (Screen Guide; p. 221) will appear.
You can select the kind of files that will be shown in the list.
2
Importing data
• Type
Select the kind of files that will be shown in the list.
Value
Explanation
All
All files will be shown.
Sample
• Windows Wave file
• AIFF file
• Akai MPC2000/2000XL sound file (.SND)
• Akai S1000 sound file (.A1S)
• Akai S3000 sound file (.A3S)
will appear.
Patch
• Akai MPC2000/2000XL program file (.PGM)
• Akai S1000 program file (.A1P)
• Akai S3000 program file (.A3P)
• MV-8800 patch (.MV0)
will appear.
Song
Standard MIDI File (.MID) will appear.
Pix
• JPG file (.JPG)
• bitmap file (.BMP)
will appear.
● Roland S-700 series data (samples, partials, patches) will all be displayed, regardless of how the Type
parameter is set.
● If you change the Type setting when check marks have already been assigned to files, all check marks will be
cleared.
● Types of audio files that can be imported
The MV-8800 is able to import WAV files (extension .WAV) and AIFF files (extension .AIF) of the following
types.
Format
Linear (PCM) format
Channels
Monaural (1 channel) or stereo (2 channels)
Sampling frequency
No limitation
Bit depth
8, 16, 24, or 32 bits
Audio files that don’t have a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz will automatically be converted to 44.1 kHz when
they are imported.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-69
MV-8800_e.book 70 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Importing from an audio CD
You can import audio from an audio CD and use it as a patch or audio phrase.
● Unauthorized use, distribution, sale, lending, performance, or broadcast etc. of copyrighted material belonging
to a third party is prohibited by law.
● Before you import from an audio CD
Carefully read the “Copyright” and “About the License Agreement” sections in the inside back cover
of the Owner’s Manual. You must abide by these conditions when using imported audio material.
1. In the CD drive, insert the audio CD that you want to import.
2. Press [IMPORT].
The IMPORT screen (Screen Guide; p. 219) will appear.
3. Press [F1](Select Drive).
The SELECT DRIVE popup (Screen Guide; p. 6) will appear.
4. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the Audio CD, and press [F5](Select).
The CD-R/RW drive will be selected and list of the files on the audio CD will appear.
If no audio CD is inserted in the drive, the message “Drive not ready.” will appear. In this case, internal hard
disk drive will be selected automatically.
5. Move the cursor to the track number that you want to import from the audio CD.
● You can press [F4](Preview) to audition. To stop auditioning, press [F4](Stop).
M-70
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 71 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Importing from an audio CD
6. Press [F5](Import).
The SET TIME popup (Screen Guide; p. 225) will appear.
● The SET TIME popup will appear if one CD track is being imported.
2
Importing data
7. Press [F5](Execute).
The data will be imported, and the RESULT popup (Screen Guide; p. 211) will appear, allowing you to check
the data that was imported. A sample number will be assigned to each imported sample.
● The sample number is shown above the waveform display.
The remaining steps are the same as step 6 and following of “Importing the WAV or AIFF files” (p. 65).
● If you want to use the imported data as a patch or audio phrase, use the Quick Assign function in step 8 of
“Importing the WAV or AIFF files” (p. 65). For details, refer to “Playing the imported data immediately (Quick
Assign)” (p. 75).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-71
MV-8800_e.book 72 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Importing from an audio CD
The options during import
By setting various options in the Import screen you can change the behavior of import.
● Applying emphasize while you import (Pre Emphasis)
1. Make preparations for import as described in step 1–5 of “Importing from an audio CD” (p.
70) and then press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
2. Select “Import Options” and press [F5](Select).
The IMPORT OPTIONS popup (Screen Guide; p. 222) will appear.
3. Turn the Pre Emphasis parameter On.
The pre emphasis function will be processed.
● The amount of time required to execute the emphasis.
● The high frequency range of the inputted sample will be boosted when Pre Emphasis is On.
4. Press [F1](Close).
Proceed with import as described in step 6 of “Importing from an audio CD” (p. 70).
● Automatically divide the sample at silent regions during import
1. Make preparations for import as described in step 1–5 of “Importing from an audio CD” (p.
70) and then press [MENU].
2. Select “Import Options” and press [F5](Select).
The IMPORT OPTIONS popup (Screen Guide; p. 222) will appear.
3. Turn the Auto Divide parameter On.
When a silent region is detected during import, the MV-8800 will automatically divide the sample.
4. Set the Gap Time value.
Specifies the length of the silent regions that will be detected.
5. Press [F5](Close).
Proceed with import as described in step 6 of “Importing from an audio CD” (p. 70).
● A maximum of 96 samples can be divided.
M-72
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 73 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Loading sound libraries of other model
You can load sound library data that was created for a model other than the MV-8800.
When you load a Roland S-700 series patch file, or an AKAI MPC series or S-series program file, its structure
will be re-created on the MV-8800.
This lets you create a patch without having to make assignments to the velocity pads.
Filename extension
Roland S-700 series patch file
-
Akai MPC2000/2000XL program file
.PGM
Akai S1000 program file
.A1P
Akai S3000 program file
.A3P
Akai MPC2000/2000XL sound file
.SND
Akai S1000 sound file
.A1S
Akai S3000 sound file
.A3S
2
Importing data
Format
● Some imported data may not be reproduced correctly.
● To create a patch using the types of data listed in the gray portion of the table, refer to “Importing the WAV or
AIFF files” (p. 65).
1. Using the same procedure as described up to step 4 of “Importing the WAV or AIFF files”
(p. 65), select the sound library (patch or program) that you want to import.
2. Press [F5](Import).
The ASSIGN TO PART / LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide; p. 224) will appear.
● If you want to import into only one of these (part only or library only), turn the other setting Off.
• Part
If the To parameter is set to “Part,” specifies the part in which the new patch will be created.
Range: Off, 1–16
• Library
If the To parameter is set to “Library,” specifies the library number in which the new patch will be created.
Range: Off, 1–128
• F-buttons
F-buttons
Explanation
[F3](With Delete)
Deletes the samples used by the specified part or library patch (Delete Patch), and then import
the data.
[F5](Execute)
Imports the patch to the specified location.
3. Press [F5](Execute).
The patch will be imported into the specified part and library.
● You cannot create a patch simply by loading Akai MPC2000/2000XL program files (.PGM) alone. The sound
files (.SND or .WAV) must also be present in the same folder as the program file.
● The data on an Akai MPC2000/2000XL or S1000/S3000 CD-ROM is organized into proprietary units called
“partitions.” On the MV-8800, these will appear as folders named PARTITION A, PARTITION B, and so on.
● When Akai MPC2000/2000XL or S1000/S3000 program files or sound files are converted, the category name
will be “AK” and the patch name will be the first twelve characters of the program file name.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-73
MV-8800_e.book 74 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Loading sound libraries of other model
Auditioning or previewing before you import
You can audition a Patch before actually loading and using it. Let’s try auditioning a pre-installed Patch before
actually loading it for use.
● MV-8800 Patches (filename extension “.MV0”) can also be auditioned/previewed from the LOAD PATCH
screen.
1. Press [IMPORT].
The IMPORT screen will appear.
2. Press [F1](Select Drive).
The SELECT DRIVE popup will appear.
3. Use CURSOR [
][
press [F5](Select).
] to select disk containing the Patch data you want to import, and
The contents of the disk will be displayed.
4. Use CURSOR [
][
][
][
] to select the Patch data you want to import.
5. Press [F4](Preview).
The IMPORT PREVIEW popup will appear. The screen will indicate “Reading patch for preview...,” and
loading will begin. When all the data has been loaded, the IMPORT PREVIEW popup will show the name of
the Patch that was loaded.
6. Strike VELOCITY PADS to audition the Patch.
7. If you decided to import the Patch, press [F5](Import).
If you’re finished auditioning/previewing, press [F4](Stop).
● Depending on the Patch being loaded, it may take some time until you can preview or audition the Patch.
● Only the Patch that is highlighted in step 4 can be auditioned/previewed/imported on the IMPORT PREVIEW
popup.
● You can change the range of key (partial) if you switch the pad bank.
● You can audition the sound from the connected external MIDI keyboard.
● Types of Patches that can be auditioned/previewed
• MV-8800 Patches (File extension “.MV0”)
• Roland S-7x0 series Patches
• AKAI MPC2000/2000XL series program (File extension “.PGM”)
• AKAI S1000/S3000 series program (File extension “.A1P”, “A3P”)
● If the display indicates “Wave memory is not enough to preview.”
The MV-8800’s wave memory is not enough.
No further audio data can be auditioned or previewed, and therefore this Patch data could not be auditioned
or previewed.
M-74
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 75 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Playing the imported data immediately (Quick Assign)
In order to play a sample that you imported or sampled, you must assign the sample to a patch or an audio
phrase.
Assigning a sample to a patch
You can assign the sampled data to specified a partial of a patch.
1. Press [F3](Quick Assign) in “Importing the WAV or AIFF files” (p. 65) step 6 or “Importing
2
from an audio CD” (p. 70) step 7.
Importing data
The Select Quick Assign message (Screen Guide; p. 213) will appear.
2. Press [F5](AsgnToPatch).
The PATCH QUICK ASSIGN popup (Screen Guide; p. 216) will appear.
fig.quick-assign-chop
3. Specify the Part (part number) which you want to assign a sample.
4. Specify the Assign To parameter which you want to assign the pad bank number and pad
number (note number).
If you want to play chromatic pitches using the sample, check the Make Keyboard box. If you check the Make
Keyboard box, you can also specify the range over which the sample is to be assigned.
5. Press [F5](Execute).
A sample will assign to the specified velocity pad (note number).
Assigning a sample to an audio phrase
You can assign the sampled data to specified an audio phrase.
1. Press [F3](Quick Assign) in “Importing the WAV or AIFF files” (p. 65) step 6 or “Importing
from an audio CD” (p. 70) step 7.
The Select Quick Assign message (Screen Guide; p. 213) will appear.
2. Press [F3](AsgnToAPhrs).
The AUDIO PHRASE QUICK ASSIGN popup (Screen Guide; p. 214) will appear.
fig.quick-assign-chop
3. Specify the Assign To parameter which you want to assign the pad bank number and pad
number.
4. Press [F5](Execute).
A sample will assign to the specified velocity pad.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-75
MV-8800_e.book 76 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Playing the imported data immediately (Quick Assign)
Assigning a patch by chopping a sample
You can divide a sample at the desired points and assign them to partials.
● You cannot chop a sample if you’re importing multiple WAV or AIFF files, or multiple tracks from an audio CD.
1. Press [F3](Quick Assign) in “Importing the WAV or AIFF files” (p. 65) step 6 or “Importing
from an audio CD” (p. 70) step 7.
The Select Quick Assign message (Screen Guide; p. 213) will appear.
2. Press [F1](Chop).
The CHOP popup (Screen Guide; p. 159) will appear.
fig.quick-assign-chop
3. Specify the Current Point parameter.
The sample will be divided at the Current Point you specify.
• You can assign up to 95 points (i.e., divide the sample into 96 pieces).
• If you want the dividing points to be determined automatically according to certain conditions, press
[F3](Auto Chop). The AUTO CHOP popup will appear. For details on the parameters (conditions) you can
set, refer to “AUTO CHOP popup” (Screen Guide; p. 160).
4. Press [F1](Add Point).
A new dividing point with Current Point will be created. If you want to assign additional dividing points, repeat
step 4.
5. Press [F5](AsgnToPatch).
The sample will be divide at the time location(s) you specified. The CHOP QUICK ASSIGN popup (Screen
Guide; p. 161) will appear.
• The divided samples assigned to the partial in the key follow zero (no pitch).
• If you attempt to overwrite the pads that has partial, “Overwrite sure?” message appears. If you want to
overwrite, press [F5](YES). Or press [F1](No) to cancel assignment.
fig.patch-quick-asgn-chop
6. Specify the Part (part number), part bank, and velocity pad number (note number) to which
you want to assign the divided sounds.
7. Press [F5](Execute).
The divided sample(s) will assign to the specified pads as partials of the part.
M-76
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 77 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Playing the imported data immediately (Quick Assign)
Assigning multiple samples to a patch
Assign multiple samples you have captured on sampling or import process to the pads as partials.
● If you’ve imported multiple WAV or AIFF files, or multiple tracks from an audio CD, you won’t be able to select
and assign individual velocity pads.
1. Press [F5](AsgnToPatch) when the Select Quick Assign message (Screen Guide; p. 213) is
2
displayed.
Importing data
The PATCH QUICK ASSIGN (MULTIPLE) popup (Screen Guide; p. 218) will appear.
2. Specify the Part parameter which you want to assign the part number of the instrument.
● Samples are assigned as partials to the patch of the instrument pad you specified using the Part parameter.
3. Specify the Assign To parameter which you want to assign the pad bank number and pad
number (note number).
4. Press [F5](Execute).
The sample will assign to the specified pads.
● Samples will be assigned consecutively, starting with the pad bank number and velocity pad number you
specified using the Assign To parameter. If you attempt to assign a sample to a velocity pad for which a sample
already exists, a message will ask “Overwrite sure?” Press [F5](Yes) if you want to overwrite the sample, or
press [F1](No) if you decide to stop assigning samples.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-77
MV-8800_e.book 78 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Playing the imported data immediately (Quick Assign)
Assign multiple samples as audio phrases
Assign multiple samples you have captured on sampling or import process to the pads as audio phrases.
● If you’ve imported multiple WAV or AIFF files, or multiple tracks from an audio CD, you won’t be able to select
and assign individual velocity pads.
1. Press [F3](AsgnToAPhrs) when the Select Quick Assign message (Screen Guide; p. 213) is
displayed.
The AUDIO PHRASE QUICK ASSIGN (MULTIPLE) popup (Screen Guide; p. 215) will appear.
2. Specify the Assign To parameter which you want to assign the pad bank number and pad
number.
3. Press [F5](Execute).
The sample will assign to the specified pads.
● Samples will be assigned consecutively, starting with the pad bank number and velocity pad number you
specified using the Assign To parameter. If you attempt to assign a sample to a velocity pad for which a sample
already exists, a message will ask “Overwrite sure?” Press [F5](Yes) if you want to overwrite the sample, or
press [F1](No) if you decide to stop assigning samples.
M-78
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 79 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Importing SMF (Standard MIDI File) data
You can import SMF data into a pattern or song.
● SMF (Appendices; p. 13)
1. Press [IMPORT].
The IMPORT screen (Screen Guide; p. 219) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
][
][
] to select the SMF that you want to import, and press
2
[F5](Import).
Importing data
“Select import to SONG or PATTERN” message will appear.
fig.pattern-rec-param-midi.eps
3. Select the type of data (song or pattern) into which you want to convert the imported SMF
data.
Operation
Explanation
[F3](To Song)
Convert the SMF data to a song.
[F5](To Pattern)
Convert the SMF data to a pattern.
[EXIT]
Cancels the operation.
● If you import by pressing [F3](To Song)
The imported SMF data will be saved as a new song in the current project.
● If you import by pressing [F5](To Pattern)
SELECT PATTERN screen will appear. In this screen, you specify the location within the pattern list in which
the new pattern is to be saved.
Use CURSOR [
][
] to specify the location for saving, and press [F5](Execute).
If you select a pattern other than Empty, the newly saved data will overwrite that pattern.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-79
MV-8800_e.book 80 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Loading audio phrases from the hard disk
Here’s how to load audio phrases that have been saved using the procedure explained in “Saving audio
phrases to the hard disk” (p. 118) into the specified pad bank.
1. Press [IMPORT].
The IMPORT screen (Screen Guide; p. 219) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
you want to import.
][
][
] to select the audio phrase file (file extension “.MVA”) that
The procedure is the same as in the FILE UTILITY screen (Screen Guide; p. 189). For details, refer to
“Managing files (File Utility)” (p. 243).
3. Press [F5](Import).
The AUDIO PHRASE BANK QUICK ASSIGN popup (Screen Guide; p. 227) will appear.
4. Using the Assign To parameter, select the pad bank number to which you want to assign
the audio phrases.
5. Press [F5](Execute).
The audio phrases will be imported into the specified pad bank.
M-80
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 81 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Loading effect settings from the hard disk
Here’s how to assign effect settings that have been saved using the procedure explained in “Saving a current
effect setting to the hard disk” (p. 213) to the effects library.
1. Press [IMPORT].
The IMPORT screen (Screen Guide; p. 219) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
] [ ] [ ] [ ] to select the effect setting file (file extension “.MVF”,
“.MVC”, or “.MVR”) that you want to import.
2
Importing data
The procedure is the same as in the FILE UTILITY screen (Screen Guide; p. 189). For details, refer to
“Managing files (File Utility)” (p. 243).
3. Press [F5](Import).
The popup that appears will depend on the effect setting file that you are importing.
Effects type
MFX
Dly/Cho
Reverb
Popup displays
MFX ASSIGN TO LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide; p. 228)
DELAY/CHORUS ASSIGN TO LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide; p. 228)
REVERB ASSIGN TO LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide; p. 228)
4. Using the Library parameter, select the effect library number to which you want to assign
the effect settings.
5. Press [F5](Execute).
The effect settings will be imported into the specified effects library.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-81
MV-8800_e.book 82 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Loading effect settings from the hard disk
M-82
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 83 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 3
Sampling
Here’s how to record (sample) from a connected external mic or synthesizer, and use the sample as an audio source for the
MV-8800’s sampler.
Making initial settings for sampling
3
Sampling
● To adjust the sensitivity and level of the analog input
● If you’re recording an analog input source, adjust the recording level before sampling.
1. Press [MIXER].
The MIXER screen will appear.
2. Press [F4](AUX/Phrs/In).
The MIXER (AUX/FX/AUDIO PHRASE/INPUT) screen (Screen Guide; p. 237) will appear.
3. Set the Level of IN channel to 100 by using Slider 8.
4. Input an audio signal to the ANALOG INPUT MIC/LINE (or ANALOG INPUT PHONO) jacks.
The level meter will move.
5. Adjust the SENS L/R knobs.
Adjust the knobs so that the level meters move as high as possible in the range of -12 dB–0 dB. If the clip
indicators light, the level is too high.
Clip
indicators
-12–0 dB
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-83
MV-8800_e.book 84 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Sampling
1. Press [SAMPLING].
The SAMPLING screen (Screen Guide; p. 209) will appear.
2. Set the parameters for sampling.
• Sample Type
Specifies the number of channels that will be sampled.
Range
Explanation
Mono
Monaural (one channel)
Stereo
Stereo (two channels)
● Data sampled in stereo will occupy twice the space of monaural data.
● Playing back stereo sampled data will use two voices of polyphony.
• Input Select
Selects the input source for sampling or recording.
Range
Analog
Analog(L+R)
Analog(L)
Explanation
Analog input jack (stereo)
ANALOG INPUT jack (Lch and Rch mixed to monaural)
ANALOG INPUT jack (Lch only, monaural)
• Start Trigger
Specifies how sampling will begin.
Range
Explanation
Manual
Sampling will be started by pressing [F5](Start) manually.
Level
Sampling will be triggered by the input level.
Pad
Sampling will begin when you strike a pad.
Play
Sampling will begin when you play back the sequencer.
● When you adjust the level of the Start Trigger, a will appear at the right of the level meter. Sampling will begin
when the input level exceeds this mark.
● The way in which sampling starts and stops will depend on the Start Trigger and Stop Trigger setting.
• Level
Specifies the response level when using the input level to start sampling. Lower values will produce higher
sensitivity, meaning that even a small sound will trigger sampling.
Range:
-36, -24, -18, -12, -8, -4 dB
• Pre Sample Time
This specifies the duration of sound from before the sampling start time that will be included in the recorded
sample. Increasing the Pre Sample Time parameter value will cause sampling to capture the sound from
before the moment you initiate sampling. By speeding up the response, this allows the sharp attack at the
beginning of a sound to be captured.
Range:
0, 20 40, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1000 ms
● The Pre Sample Time setting is valid if the Start Trigger is set to Level, Pad, or Play. With a setting of Pre
Sample Time=0, recording will begin the instant that sampling is initiated; i.e., the Pre Sample Time will have
no effect.
M-84
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 85 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Sampling
• Stop Trigger
Specifies how sampling will stop.
If you set the Stop Trigger parameter to “Beat” or “Time,” sampling will stop automatically after the specified
time has elapsed.
Range
Explanation
Manual
Sampling will be stopped manually.
Beat
Sampling will stop after the number of beats specified by the Length parameter.
Time
Sampling will stop after the time specified by the Length parameter.
3
• Beat / Time
Specifies the time after which sampling will stop when Stop Trigger parameter is Beat or Time.
Beat
Sampling
Range:
1–8–20000
Time 000:01–000:02–100:00 (minutes: seconds)
• Auto Divide
The Auto Divide function detects regions of silence within the sample, and divides the sample into several
samples at these points.
Range
Explanation
Off
Samples without dividing the waveform.
On (✔)
Divides the waveform at regions of silence.
● A maximum of 96 samples can be divided. If a silent region in detected while sampling the 96th sample,
sampling will stop automatically.
● If you used the Auto Divide function to create multiple samples, the RESULT (MULTIPLE) popup will appear.
For details, refer to “Check multiple samples you have captured” (p. 68)
• Gap Time
Silences of a duration longer than the specified time will be considered as silence. The Gap Time parameter
is valid if Auto Divide parameter is on.
Range:
0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0 sec
• Auto Emphasis
Automatically pre-emphasis processes after sampling.
Range
Explanation
Off
Emphasis processing will not be applied to the recorded data.
On (✔)
Emphasis processing will be applied to the recorded data.
● High frequency range of the recorded sample will be boosted when Pre Emphasis is On.
• Auto Normalize
Automatically normalizes the level after sampling.
Range
Explanation
Off
The level of the sample will not be normalized.
On (✔)
The level of the sampled sound will be boosted as high as possible without causing distortion.
● If you use Auto Normalize together with Auto Divide, each divided sample will be normalized.
3. Press [F5](Start).
“Now Sampling..” message will appear, and starts sampling.
● The remaining time available for sampling is shown in the Remain field of the SAMPLING screen.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-85
MV-8800_e.book 86 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Sampling
4. Press [F5](Stop).
Stops sampling. The RESULT popup (Screen Guide; p. 211) will appear.
Audition the sampled result. Each sampled data item will be assigned to a sample number.
5. Set the parameters for adjusting.
• Start Point / End Point
Specify the points at which the sample will start playing and stop playing. The Start Point - End Point region
is highlighted.
Range:
000000000.000–The end of sample
• BPM Base Note
Draws measure and beat lines on the displayed sample.
Range:
,
,
(initial value),
,
/ x 0–x 4–x 65535
● The BPM is displayed below the BPM Base Note. The displayed BPM value is calculated from the BPM Base
Note setting and the playback length of the sample.
• Original Key
Specifies the basic pitch. When you play this key, the sample will sound at its original pitch (the pitch at which
it was sampled).
Range:
0 (C -)–60 (C 4)–127 (G 9)
• Truncate
Deletes the portions of the sample before the Start Point and after the End Point.
Range:
Off, On (✔)
● You can’t use Undo function to bring back a truncated or normalized sample.
• Normalize
Raises the overall level of the sample without allowing the maximum level to be exceeded.
Range:
Off, On (✔)
• Loop
Specifies how [F4](Preview) will operate. You can also make setting of loop playback when you assign the
sample to pad as a Partial or an Audio Phrase.
M-86
Value
Explanation
Off
The sample will audition once from the Start Point to the End Point.
On
The sample will repeatedly audition from the Start Point to the End Point.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 87 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Sampling
• F-buttons
F-button
Explanation
[F1](Retry)
Displays “Retry Sure?” message. If you press [F5](Yes), discards the sampled result and the
SAMPLING screen will appear.
[F2](Name)
Displays the EDIT SAMPLE NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3), where you can edit the sample
name.
[F3](Quick Assign)
Displays the Select Quick Assign message (Screen Guide; p. 213).
[F4](Preview)
Auditions the currently-highlighted sample. To hear auditioning, hold down [F4](Preview).
[F5](OK)
Closes the RESULT popup (Screen Guide; p. 211).
3
You can use PREVIEW [FROM (
)] and [TO (
located) near the Start Point or End Point.
Playback sample from a point slightly earlier (Preview Length) than the current editing point.
)]
[FROM (
)] to audition the region (the side at which the cursor is
Explanation
Preview
[TO (
Sampling
● If you want to use the sampled data as an audio phrase or patch, press [F3](Quick Assign) to get the Select
Quick Assign message (Screen Guide; p. 213).
)]
Playback sample for a short time (Preview Length) from the current editing point.
6. Press [F5](OK).
The RESULT popup (Screen Guide; p. 211) will close. The sampled data will be added to the list in the
SAMPLE MANAGER screen (Screen Guide; p. 169). Check the sample number that was assigned in step 5.
● If you want to discard the sampled result that is shown, press [F1](Retry).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-87
MV-8800_e.book 88 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Sampling
Advanced sampling
● Sampling the sound played by the MV-8800’s sampler (Re-sampling)
You can sample the sound that is being sent from the MV-8800’s mix bus. This is called “resampling.”
● You can sample the sound that has been sent through an effect, or sample the sound of multiple samples played
simultaneously.
● Since the external audio input (analog) is active even while resampling, you can mix these sources for
resampling.
1. Press [SAMPLING] and then press [F2](Re-Sampling).
The RE-SAMPLING screen (Screen Guide; p. 209) will appear.
2. Proceed with sampling as described in step 2 of “Sampling” (p. 84).
The rest of the procedure is the same. The sound produced by the MV-8800 will be recorded while sampling
continues.
Applying effects while you sample
You can apply an effect directly to the input source while you sample. For details, refer to “Applying an effect
to the sound from an input” (p. 215).
M-88
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 89 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 4
Making Instrument settings
An instrument has sixteen parts, and you can assign a patch to each part.
Assigning the patch to a part
4
Making Instrument settings
● “Patch” (p. 52)
1. Press [INSTRUMENTS].
The INSTRUMENTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 114) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the part to which you want to assign a patch.
The selected part number (the current part) is highlighted.
3. Press [F4](Library).
The PATCH LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide; p. 117) will appear.
● Alternatively, you can access the PATCH LIBRARY popup by moving the cursor to the Patch column and
turning the VALUE dial or using [DEC] [INC].
4. Move the cursor to the desired patch.
5. Press [F5](Use This).
The specified patch will be loaded.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-89
MV-8800_e.book 90 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making instrument settings
1. Press [INSTRUMENTS].
The INSTRUMENTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 114) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
1
2
][
3
][
4
][
] to move the cursor to the parameter you want to adjust.
5
6
7
3. Turn the VALUE dial or use [DEC] [INC] or the numeric keys to edit the value.
● For details on the parameters, refer to “INSTRUMENTS screen” (Screen Guide; p. 114).
1 Mute Switch
Temporarily mutes (M) or un-mutes (Off) the playback of each part
2 Part Level
Adjusts the output volume of each part.
3 Part Pan
Sets the panning of each part. A setting of “L63” places the sound at far left, “0” at center, and “R63” at far right.
4 Part Delay/Chorus Send Level
Adjust the audio send level of the part to the delay/chorus effect.
5 Part Reverb Send Level
Adjusts the audio send level of the part to the reverb effect.
6 Part Output Assign
Adjusts the audio output destination of the part.
7 Voice Reserve
Specifies the number of voices that will be reserved for each part if you attempt to play more than 32 voices
of polyphony simultaneously.
● You can’t set the Voice Reserve parameter in a way that would cause the total for all parts to exceed 32.
M-90
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 91 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making instrument settings
About maximum polyphony and Voice Reserve
The MV-8800 can play 64 voices simultaneously, but there are certain limitations on polyphony due to the design of
the sound generator. Audio tracks are given priority so that they will be able to play 32 voices at any time. This means
that if audio tracks are playing 32 voices, the remaining 32 voices can be played by instruments.
● example 1
Audio track 1~8
:
4
plays 32 voices
(request) 32 voices
Making Instrument settings
voice reserve
8
Instrument Part 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
62 63 64
plays 6 voices
62 63 64
plays 10 voices
(request)
voice reserve
8
Instrument Part 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(request)
In example 1, instruments are being requested to play a total of 16 voices, and actually are playing 16 voices. Since
the audio tracks are playing 32 voices, the entire MV-8800 is playing a total of 32 + 16 = 48 voices.
● example 2
Audio track 1~8
plays 0 voice
no sound
voice reserve
8
Instrument part 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
62 63 64
plays 56 voices
...
62 63 64
plays 8 voices
(request)
voice reserve
8
Instrument part 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(request)
In example 2, the instruments by themselves are being requested to play a total of 72 voices, producing a shortage.
The number of voices specified by the voice reserve setting of each part are allocated and the remaining requests
are ignored so that a total of 64 voices are playing.
● example 3
Audio track 1~8
:
playes 32 voices
request 32 voices
voice reserve
8
Instrument part 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
62 63 64
plays 24 voices
...
62 63 64
plays 8 voices
(request)
voice reserve
8
Instrument part 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(request)
In example 3, the audio tracks are playing 32 voices, meaning that the instruments can play the remaining 32 voices.
However, there is a shortage because a total of 72 voices are being requested.
The number of voices specified by the voice reserve setting of each part are allocated, and the remaining requests
are ignored so that a total of 64 voices are playing.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-91
MV-8800_e.book 92 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Limit the performance data received by a part
Of the MIDI messages received by each part, you can specify the messages for which reception will be
enabled.
1. Press [INSTRUMENTS].
The INSTRUMENTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 114) will appear.
2. Press [F2](MIDI Filter).
The MIDI FILTER screen (Screen Guide; p. 116) will appear.
3. Use CURSOR [
][
][
][
] to move the cursor to the parameter you want to adjust.
4. Turn the VALUE dial or use [DEC] [INC] to edit the value.
● For details on the parameters, refer to “MIDI FILTER screen” (Screen Guide; p. 116).
M-92
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 93 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Copying the settings of a part to a different part
Here’s how you can copy the settings of the current part to a different part. This is convenient when you want
to create a different patch based on the settings of a certain part.
1. Press [INSTRUMENTS].
The INSTRUMENTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 114) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the copy-source part.
The selected part (the current part) number will be highlighted.
3. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
4. Select “Copy Part” and press [F5](Select).
4
The COPY PART popup (Screen Guide; p. 151) will appear.
Making Instrument settings
5. Turn the VALUE dial or use [DEC] [INC] to select the copy-destination part number.
6. Press [F5](Execute).
The settings will be copied to the part you specified.
● The patch for the copy-destination part will be overwritten.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-93
MV-8800_e.book 94 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Initializing the settings of a part
Here’s how you can initialize all parameters of the current part.
1. Press [INSTRUMENTS].
The INSTRUMENTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 114) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the part number you want to initialize.
The part number (the current part) will be highlighted.
3. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
4. Select “Initialize Part” and press [F5](Select).
A message of “Initialize Part ##. Are you sure?” will appear. (## is a part number.)
F-button
Explanation
[F1](No)
Cancels without initializing.
[F5](Yes)
Initializes the current part.
● You can’t recover the parameters that have been initialized. If you want to keep the patch, be sure to save it
before initializing.
M-94
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 95 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 5
Creating a patch
Making a patch settings
1. Press [INSTRUMENTS].
5
The INSTRUMENTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 114) will appear.
][
Creating a patch
2. Use CURSOR [
] to select the part that uses the patch you want to edit.
The selected part number (the current part) will be highlighted.
3. Press [F5](Patch Edit).
The PATCH EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 118) will appear.
1
7
2
8
9
10
4
3
11
5
6
12
● For details on the parameters, refer to “PATCH EDIT screen” (Screen Guide; p. 118).
● Strike the pads to hear the result of your settings. To check the pads to which the sounds are assigned, press
[PAD BANKS] to display the “PAD BANKS popup” (p. 5).
1 Part number/Patch name
Selects the part that use the patch you want to edit.
2 Patch Coarse Tune
Adjust the pitch of the entire patch in steps of one semitone.
3 Patch Fine Tune
Adjust the pitch of entire patch in steps of one cent.
● One cent = 1/100th of a semitone
4 Analog Feel Depth
Applies irregularity to the patch, simulating the natural instability that is typical of an analog synthesizer.
5 Pitch Bend Range Down
Specifies the amount by which the pitch of the patch will change (in semitones) when you operate the pitch
bender downward.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-95
MV-8800_e.book 96 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making a patch settings
6 Pitch Bend Range Up
Specifies the amount by which the pitch of the patch will change (in semitones) when you operate the pitch
bender upward.
7 Cutoff Offset
Applies a relative adjustment to the cutoff frequency of the entire patch.
8 Resonance Offset
Applies a relative adjustment to the resonance of the entire patch.
● Resonance
Boosts the region near the cutoff frequency, adding a distinctive character to the sound.
9 Attack Time Offset
Applies a relative adjustment to the amplifier attack time.
● Attack time
The time from when you strike the velocity pad and the sound begins, until the moment when the maximum
volume is reached.
10 Release Time Offset
Applies a relative adjustment to the amplifier release time.
● Release time
The time from when you release the velocity pad until the sound decays to silence.
11 Velocity Sens Offset
Applies an adjustment to the velocity sensitivity of the entire patch.
● Velocity
The force at which you strike the velocity pad.
12 Voice Priority
Specifies how voices are to be handled when you play patches in a way that would exceed the maximum
polyphony.
M-96
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 97 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making a patch settings
Naming a patch
1. Access the PATCH EDIT screen as described in “Making a patch settings” (p. 95).
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Patch Name” and press [F5](Select).
The EDIT PATCH NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear.
● When the cursor is located at the first character of the name, you can press the CURSOR [
SELECT CATEGORY popup.
] to open the
4. Move the cursor to a character and use the VALUE dial or the numeric keys to input the
5
desired character.
Creating a patch
5. When you’ve finished entering the name, press the [F5](OK).
The name will be assigned to the patch.
Registration a patch in the patch library
If you’ve edited a patch and want to use it in a different song, you must register the patch in the patch library.
● Since the patch library is saved on an individual project basis, you can’t use this data in a different project. If
you want to use the patch in a different project, save the patch to disk. For details, refer to “Saving a patch to
the hard disk” (p. 99).
1. Press [INSTRUMENTS].
The INSTRUMENTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 114) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the part that uses the patch you want to register.
The selected part number (the current part) is highlighted.
3. Press [F4](Library).
The PATCH LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide; p. 117) will appear.
4. Select the patch library number in which you want to register the patch, and press
[F1](Write Here).
The WRITE PATCH LIBRARY popup will appear.
F-button
Explanation
[F1](No)
The WRITE PATCH LIBRARY popup will close without registration of the patch.
[F2](Yes)
The current patch will be registered in the library number you specified. The WRITE PATCH
LIBRARY popup will close.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-97
MV-8800_e.book 98 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making a patch settings
Loading a patch from the patch library
Here’s how to load a patch from the library and use it for the current part.
1. Press [INSTRUMENTS].
The INSTRUMENTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 114) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the part for which you want to change patches.
The selected part number (the current part) is highlighted.
3. Press [F4](Library).
The PATCH LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide; p. 117) will appear.
4. Select the patch that you want to load and press [F5](Use This).
The selected patch will be recalled to the current part.
M-98
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 99 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making a patch settings
Saving a patch to the hard disk
Here’s how to save the current patch to disk. A patch saved in this way can be used by a different project. For
details, refer to “Loading a patch from the hard disk” (p. 100).
1. Press [INSTRUMENTS].
The INSTRUMENTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 114) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the part that uses the patch you want to save.
The selected part number (the current part) is highlighted.
3. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
5
4. Select “Save Patch” and press [F5](Select).
Creating a patch
The SAVE PATCH popup (Screen Guide; p. 149) will appear.
5. Specify the save destination (such as /USER) and press [F5](Save).
The EDIT FILE NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear.
6. Specify the name of file you want to save.
The file name will be the name you assigned plus an extension of “.MV0”.
7. Press [F5](Execute).
The patch of the current part will be saved on the hard disk.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-99
MV-8800_e.book 100 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making a patch settings
Loading a patch from the hard disk
Here’s how to load a patch from the hard disk and use it for the current part and the patch library.
● For additional information, refer also to “Loading the pre-installed patches” (p. 63).
1. Press [INSTRUMENTS].
The INSTRUMENTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 114) will appear.
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Load Patch” and press [F5](Select).
The LOAD PATCH screen (Screen Guide; p. 150) will appear.
4. Select the patch that you want to load and press [F5](Load).
The ASSIGN TO PART / LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide; p. 224) will appear.
5. Select the destination (instruments part and patch library).
If you want to load into only one of these, turn the other setting Off.
6. Press [F5](Execute).
The patch will loaded into the specified part and library.
M-100
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 101 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making a patch settings
Deleting the patch
Here’s how you can delete a patch that’s assigned to a part. The samples used by that patch will also be
deleted.
● You can’t use the Undo function to bring back a deleted patch or sample.
1. Press [INSTRUMENTS].
The INSTRUMENTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 114) will appear.
2. Use the CURSOR to select the part of the patch that you want to delete.
The selected part number (the current part) will be highlighted.
3. Press [MENU].
5
Creating a patch
The MENU popup will appear.
4. Select “Delete Patch” and press [F5](Select).
A message of “Delete Patch on Part ##. Are You Sure?” will appear. (## is a part number.)
F-button
Explanation
[F1](No)
Cancels the operation (The patch and sample will remain).
[F3](Assign Only)
Deletes the patch (the sample will remain).
[F5](Yes)
Delete the patch and sample used by that patch.
Deleting a sample that’s used by more than one partial /
audio phrase / audio event
When press [F5](Yes) in step4, the sample you are about to delete is used by another partial, audio phrase, and/or
audio event, the following message will appear.
“One or more other partials, audio phrases, and/or audio events will be lost if you delete this sample. Are you sure you
want to delete?”
F-button
Explanation
[F1](No)
Cancels the operation (the patch and the sample will remain).
[F5](Yes)
Deletes the patch and the sample used by that patch.
● You can’t use the Undo function to bring back a deleted sample.
● If you press [F5](Yes), audio phrases and other things that use that sample will also be deleted.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-101
MV-8800_e.book 102 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making a partial settings
Here’s how you can modify the settings of each sound (partial) for each velocity pad (note number).
● “Partial” (p. 53)
1. Access the PATCH EDIT screen as described in “Making a patch settings” (p. 95).
2. Press the VELOCITY PADS for the partial you want to edit.
3. Press [F5](Partial Edit).
The PARTIAL EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 125) will appear.
● you can access the PARTIAL EDIT screen by striking a pad to play the instrument and then pressing
[QUICK EDIT].
2
3
4 5
6
7
8
9
1
10
22
11
23
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 24 25
● If you use the same partial for two or more pads, editing that partial will affect the sound of each pad to which
it is assigned. For details, refer to “If the same partial is assigned to more than one pad” (p. 110).
● There will appear the message “Partial does not exist. Do you want to create it with Sample?” if no partial is
assigned to the pad (note number) you strike is assigned.
F-button
Explanation
[F1](No)
Cancels the operation.
[F5](Yes)
When you select a sample, the partial will be assigned to that pad, and you will return to the
PARTIAL EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 125).
● For details on the parameters, refer to “PARTIAL EDIT screen” (Screen Guide; p. 125).
1 Partial Level
Adjusts the output volume of the partial.
2 Partial Pan
Adjusts the panning of the partial.
A setting of “L63” is far left, “0” is center, and “R63” is far right.
3 Partial Output Assign
Adjusts the audio output destination of the partial.
4 Partial Delay/Chorus Send Level
Adjusts the audio send level of the partial to the delay/chorus effect.
5 Partial Reverb Send Level
Adjusts the audio send level of the partial to the reverb effect.
6 Assign Type
Specify how the sounds are to be handled when you press the same velocity pad multiple times.
7 One Shot Mode
When the One Shot Mode parameter is On, the sound will play back until the end of the waveform (or the end
of the envelope, whichever comes first).
M-102
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 103 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making a partial settings
8 Exclusive Group
If this is set to anything other than Off, partials with the same Exclusive Group setting will not play at the same
time.
9 Partial Coarse Tune
Adjusts the pitch of the partial in steps of a semitone.
10 Partial Fine Tune
Adjusts the pitch of the partial in steps of one cent.
11 Filter Type
Selects the type of filter.
If this is Off, the filter will not be used.
12 Cutoff Frequency
Specifies the frequency at which the filter is to start being applied (the cutoff frequency).
5
14 Filter Envelope Time 1(A)
Specifies Time 1 of the filter envelope. This is also called “filter attack time.”
15 Filter Envelope Time 4(R)
Specifies Time 4 of the filter envelope. This is also called “filter release time.”
Creating a patch
13 Resonance
Boosts the sound in the region of the cutoff frequency, adding a distinctive coloring to the tone.
16 Amp Envelope Time 1(A)
Specifies Time 1 of the amp envelope (the time from when you press the velocity pad to begin producing sound
until the maximum volume is reached). This is also called “amp attack time.”
17 Amp Envelope Time 3(D)
Specifies Time 3 of the amp envelope (the time from when the maximum volume is reached until when the
sound decays to the amp sustain level). This is also called “amp decay time.”
18 Amp Envelope Level 3(S)
Specifies Level 3 of the amp envelope (the volume level at which the sound will remain after the amp decay
time has elapsed, until you release the velocity pad).
This is also called “amp sustain level.”
19 Amp Envelope Time 4(R)
Specifies Time 4 of the amp envelope (the time from when you release the velocity pad until the sound decays
to silence). This is also called “amp release time.”
20 LFO Rate
Specifies the rate (frequency) of the waveform produced by the LFO.
This can also be synchronized to the tempo of the sequencer.
21 LFO Wave Form
Selects the waveform that the LFO will output.
22 LFO Pitch Depth
Specifies the amount by which the LFO will affect the pitch of the partial.
23 LFO Pan Depth
Specifies the amount by which the LFO will affect the panning of the partial.
24 LFO Filter Depth
Specifies the amount by which the LFO will affect the filter of the partial.
25 LFO Amp Depth
Specifies the amount by which the LFO will affect the output volume of the partial.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-103
MV-8800_e.book 104 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making a partial settings
To adjust the pitch
Adjust the Partial Coarse Tune and Partial Fine Tune.
To adjust the brightness of the sound by filter
Adjust the Filter Type that selects the type of filter to be used, and adjust the Cutoff Frequency which specifies
the frequency which the filter will be applied.
● When you’re in the PARTIAL EDIT screen, the top panel sliders 1–4 correspond to the Cutoff Frequency,
Resonance, Filter Envelope Time 1(A) and Time4(R) parameters respectively.
If you want to make more detailed edits, press [F3](Filter).
The PARTIAL EDIT (FILTER) screen (Screen Guide; p. 143) will appear.
To adjust the way in which the volume changes
Adjust the Amp Envelope Time 1(A), Time 3(D), Level 3(S) and Time 4(R).
● When you’re in the PARTIAL EDIT screen, the top panel sliders 5–8 correspond to the Amp Envelope Time
1(A), Time 3(D), Level 3(S) and Time 4(R) parameters respectively.
If you want to make more detailed edits, press [F4](Amplifier).
The PARTIAL EDIT (AMPLIFIER) screen (Screen Guide; p. 145) will appear.
To add modulation to the sound
Use the LFO Wave Form setting to select the desired waveform, and use LFO Rate to adjust the speed of
modulation.
Higher settings will increase the amount of modulation for Pitch Depth, Pan Depth, Filter Depth, and Amp
Depth.
If you want to make more detailed edits, press [F5](LFO).
The PARTIAL EDIT (LFO) screen (Screen Guide; p. 147) will appear.
M-104
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 105 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making a partial settings
Making a sample settings
1. Access the PARTIAL EDIT screen as describe“Making a partial settings” (p. 102).
2. Press [F1](Sample Edit).
The SAMPLE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 128) will appear.
1
2
5
5
3
Creating a patch
6
4
1 SMT number, sample name
Specifies the SMT number and sample name that you are actually editing.
2 Start Point
Adjusts the point at which the playback of the sample starts.
3 Loop Point
Adjusts the point at which repeated portion (the second and subsequent times) will begin playing.
Set this if you want to the sample to loop from a point other than the Start Point.
4 End Point
Adjusts the point at which the playback of the sample will end.
5 Loop Mode
Specifies how the sample will play.
6 Loop Tune
Adjust the playback pitch of the loop region in step of one cent.
● You can use [SHIFT] + CURSOR [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] to zoom-in or zoom-out the waveform display.
● When the cursor is located at Start Point, Loop Point, or End Point, you can use PREVIEW [TO (
)] /
[FROM (
)] to audition the data before or after that point.
● For details on each parameters refer to “SAMPLE EDIT screen” (Screen Guide; p. 128).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-105
MV-8800_e.book 106 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making a partial settings
Finding a zero-cross point
This function automatically sets the Start Point, Loop Point, and End Points of the sample to a point at which
the waveform is at an amplitude of 0 (zero); i.e., a “zero-cross point.”
This will minimize the noise that occurs when the amplitude “jumps” discontinuously when the sample is
played.
1. Access the SAMPLE EDIT screen as describe“Making a sample settings” (p. 105).
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Snap To Zero Crossing” and press [F5](Select).
A zero-cross point will be assigned automatically for each point of the sample.
The direction in which a zero-cross point is searched will depend on the point.
Point
Direction of searching for a zero-cross point
Start Point
Search from the current Start Point toward the beginning.
Loop Point
Search from the current Loop Point toward the beginning.
However, if the Loop Mode parameter is set to Reverse or RevOneShot, this will search from
the current Loop Point toward the end. If the Reverse parameter is turned On in the AUDIO
PHRASE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 155), AUDIO PHARASE SAMPLE EDIT screen
(Screen Guide; p. 157), or AUDIO EVENT SAMPLE EDIT popup (Screen Guide; p. 29), this
will search from the current Loop Point toward the end.
End Point
Search from the current End Point toward the end.
● If no zero-cross point is found, the points of the sample will not be changed.
● The zero-cross point can also be edited in the following screens.
• AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 155)
• AUDIO PHARASE SAMPLE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 157)
• AUDIO EVENT SAMPLE EDIT popup (Screen Guide; p. 29)
Playing multiple samples together
You can combine up to 4 samples to create the partial and use velocity to switch between them, this function
is called SMT (Sample Mix Table).
1. Access the PARTIAL EDIT screen as described in “Making a partial settings” (p. 102).
2. Press [F2](SMT).
The PARTIAL EDIT (SMT) screen will appear.
3. Move the cursor to any SMT number 1–4, and press [F1](Sample List).
The SAMPLE LIST popup will appear.
4. Select a sample and press [F5](Select).
The selected sample will be assign to the SMT you selected in step 3.
For details on the parameters, refer to “PARTIAL EDIT (SMT) screen” (Screen Guide; p. 141).
M-106
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 107 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making a partial settings
Naming a partial
You can assign a name to each partial for easier data management.
1. Access the PARTIAL EDIT screen as described in “Making a partial settings” (p. 102).
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Partial Name” and press [F5](Select).
The EDIT PARTIAL NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear.
4. Move the cursor to a character and use the VALUE dial or the numeric keys to input the
desired character.
5
● For details on inputting characters, refer to “Inputting text” (p. 33).
Creating a patch
5. When you’ve finished entering the name, press the [F5](OK).
The name will be assigned to the partial
Copying a partial
Here’s how to copy the settings of the current partial to a another pad.
1. Hold down the VELOCITY PADS for the partial you want to copy, and press [CLIPBOARD].
The CLIPBOARD indicator (red) will light.
2. Hold down [CLIPBOARD] and press the VELOCITY PADS to which you want to copy the
partial.
The partial will be copied to the pad you specified.
● The partial parameters will be copied to the clipboard. Since the patch parameters will not be copied, the data
may sound differently if you copy it to the pad of another part.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-107
MV-8800_e.book 108 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making a partial settings
Deleting the partial
You can delete a sample at the same time that you delete a partial.
● You can’t use the Undo function to bring back a deleted partial or sample.
1. Hold down [DELETE], and strike the VELOCITY PADS the for the partial you want to delete.
A confirmation message of “Delete partial on Pad ##-##. Are You Sure?” will appear.
(##-## are the pad bank number and pad number.)
F-button
Explanation
[F1](No)
Cancels the operation (The partials and sample will remain).
[F3](Assign Only)
Deletes the partial (the sample will remain).
[F5](Yes)
Deletes the partials and sample used by that partial.
Deleting a sample that’s used by more than one partial /
audio phrase / audio event
When press [F5](Yes) in step3, the sample you are about to delete is used by another partial, audio
phrase, and/or audio event, the following message will appear.
“One or more other partials, audio phrases, and/or audio events will be lost if you delete this sample.
Are you sure you want to delete?”
fig.delete-sample-confirm
F-button
Explanation
[F1](No)
Cancels the operation (the partials and the sample will remain).
[F5](Yes)
Deletes the partials and the sample used by that partial.
● If you press [F5] (Yes), audio phrases (and other things) that use that sample will also be deleted.
M-108
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 109 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making a partial settings
Changing the assignment of partials
Here’s how to change the partials that are assigned to the velocity pads.
Also, a scale pattern can be set up while assigning partials to pads. This makes it convenient if you want to
use a MIDI keyboard to play partials.
1. Press [INSTRUMENTS].
The INSTRUMENTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 114) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
] [ ] o select the part number with the partial for which you want to
change the assignment.
The selected part number (the current part) will be highlighted.
3. Press [F5](Patch Edit).
5
The PATCH EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 118) will appear.
Creating a patch
4. Press [F3](Split).
The PATCH EDIT (SPLIT) screen will appear.
fig.delete-sample-confirm
5. Using the Pad parameter, select the pad bank and pad number of the partial whose
assignment you want to change.
The region of pads to which the partial is assigned is indicated by Current: Lower Point and Upper Point.
6. Define the region of pads to which the assignment is to be made using the New: Lower
Point and Upper Point parameters.
7. Press [F5](Set).
Within the region specified by the New: Lower Point and Upper Point parameters, partials will be assigned.
● If you want to assign a partial for chromatic (pitched) playing, press [F3] (Set Chroma).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-109
MV-8800_e.book 110 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making a partial settings
If the same partial is assigned to more than one pad
If the same partial is assigned to more than one pad (note number), any partial editing operation will affect all pads
to which the partial is assigned.
the sound
of the assigned pads
(note numbers) will change.
If you edit this
=
Partial
The PATCH EDIT (SPLIT) screen (Screen Guide; p. 124) shows you how the partials are assigned to the pads.
If you assigned the partial for chromatic playing
● [F3](Set Chroma) is an advanced version of the [F5](Set) function. Using this function, you can set up a
chromatic scale when partials are assigned to the velocity pads. By assigning one pad’s sound sequentially to
other pads, you will be able to play them like a keyboard.
The pitch of a partial that's not set to Key Follow
(i.e., that is unpitched) will be taken to be "C4"
Even if you execute Set Chromatic for a location
at a distance from "C4," the SMT Coarse Tune parameter
will automatically be adjusted so that the pitch
is not changed by the distance.
● Partials assigned between Current Lower Point and Upper Point will be re-assigned to the area between New
Lower Point and Upper Point (So, those will be deleted from original area).
M-110
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 111 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 6
Making audio phrase settings
Editing the settings of an audio phrase
While a patch is used mainly to play individual notes, an Audio Phrase is best suited for handling audio data
of an appreciable length. For example, you might use various audio phrases containing drum patterns and
guitar chording patterns to create the framework of your song. Since the MV-8800 lets you modify the tempo
or length of an audio phrase without affecting its pitch, the phrases will keep the correct pitch even if you
change the tempo of the sequencer.
1. Press [AUDIO PHRASES].
The AUDIO PHRASES (PAD) screen (Screen Guide; p. 152) will appear.
2. Press the VELOSITY PADS for the audio phrase you want to edit.
3. Press [F5](Edit).
The AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 155) will appear, allowing you to edit the audio phrase.
1
2
3
4
5
8
6
9
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Making audio phrase settings
● If you want to make settings for an audio phrase of a different bank, switch the pad bank before you strike a
pad. To switch the pad bank, refer to “Switching a pad bank” (p. 36).
6
18
1 Pad number and audio phrase name
Displays the pad number and audio phrase name that you are editing.
2 Audio Phrase BPM
Displays the tempo at which the audio phrase will play.
The value displayed here is calculated from the BPM Base Note setting and the number of beats in the loop
region.
3 Sample number and sample name
Shows the number and name for the sample used by the audio phrase.
4 Zoom in/out level
Indicates the ratio at which the waveform shown in the wave window is being magnified or shrunk.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-111
MV-8800_e.book 112 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing the settings of an audio phrase
5 Pad Play Mode
Specifies how the audio phrase will play by pressing the VELOCITY PADS.
Value
Explanation
Gate
Press pad → sound begins
Release pad → sound stops
Trigger
Press pad → sound begins (and continues even when you release the pad)
Press pad once again → sound stops
Drum
Press pad → sound begins (and continues even when you release the pad)
Sound stops automatically at the end point of the audio phrase.
6 Audio Phrase Loop Mode
Specifies how the audio phrase will play.
7 BPM Base Note
Specifies the length of the currently-edited audio phrase as a number of beats at the specified note value.
Audio Phrase BPM is determined according to this data.
8 Start Point
Adjusts the point at which the playback of the sample starts.
9 Loop Point
Adjusts the point at which repeated portion (the second and subsequent times) will begin playing.
Set this if you want to the sample to loop from a point other than the Start Point.
10 End Point
Adjusts the point at which the playback of the sample will end.
11 Audio Phrase Level
Specifies the output volume of the audio phrase
12 Velocity Control Switch
If this is On, the volume of the audio phrase will vary depending on how strongly you strike the velocity pad.â
13 Audio Phrase Coarse Tune
Adjusts the pitch of the audio phrase in steps of a semitone.
14 Audio Phrase Fine Tune
Adjusts the pitch of the audio phrase in steps of one cent.
● One cent = 1/100th of a semitone
15 Reverse Switch
Makes the audio phrase play backward (from the End Point toward the Start Point).
16 BPM Sync Switch
If this parameter is On, you can play the audio phrase in synchronization with the sequencer.
17 Stretch Type
If the BPM Sync Switch parameter is On, this setting adjusts the audio quality of audio phrase.
18 Exclusive Group
When set to anything other than Off, audio phrases that have the same Exclusive Group setting will not play
at the same time.
● If the cursor is located at Start Point, Loop Point, or End Point, you can use PREVIEW[TO (
to audition the audio phrase before or after that point.
M-112
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
)] [FROM (
)]
MV-8800_e.book 113 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing the settings of an audio phrase
Making an audio phrase play in synchronization with the sequencer
By assigning a tempo setting to an audio phrase you can make it play in synchronization with the sequencer
even if the sequencer tempo changes. Raising the sequencer tempo will “shrink” the phrase in realtime, and
lowering the tempo will “stretch” it, ensuring that the phrase stays with the beat.
1. Access the AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen as described in “Editing the settings of an audio
phrase” (p. 111).
2. Set the BPM Base Note parameter to the length of the audio phrase.
Specify the actual number of beats played by the audio phrase.
3. Turn the BPM Sync parameter On.
Now the audio phrase will play in synchronization with the sequencer tempo.
4. Adjusting the audio quality when using BPM Sync
Adjusting the pitch
Adjust the Audio Phrase Coarse Tune and Audio Phrase Fine Tune.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
6
Making audio phrase settings
Stretch Type parameter specifies the audio quality when the sample is stretched or shrunk (Time Stretch)
using BPM Sync. If you select Auto, the setting will be made automatically according to the length of the sound
and the BPM Base Note.
M-113
MV-8800_e.book 114 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Replacing an assigned sample
1. Access the AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen as described in “Editing the settings of an audio
phrase” (p. 111).
● To switch pad banks, press [PAD BANKS].
2. Press [F1](Sample List).
The SAMPLE LIST popup (Screen Guide; p. 130) will appear.
3. Select sample that you want to use as an audio phrase.
4. Press [F5](Select).
The specified sample will be assigned to the audio phrase.
M-114
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 115 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Making the waveform of an audio phrase zoom-in
1. Access the AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen as described in “Editing the settings of an audio
phrase” (p. 111).
2. Press [F2](Sample Edit).
The AUDIO PHARASE SAMPLE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 157) will appear.
6
3. Use the following buttons to zoom-in or zoom-out the waveform display.
Button
[SHIFT] + CURSOR [
]
Zoom-out the time axis display
[SHIFT] + CURSOR [
]
Zoom-in the time axis display
[SHIFT] + CURSOR [
]
Zoom-out the amplitude (volume level) display
[SHIFT] + CURSOR [
]
Zoom-in the amplitude (volume level) display
Making audio phrase settings
Operation
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-115
MV-8800_e.book 116 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
To create a patch by dividing an audio phrase (Chop)
1. Access the AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen as described in “Editing the settings of an audio
phrase” (p. 111).
The AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 155) will appear.
2. Press [F4](Chop).
The CHOP popup (Screen Guide; p. 159) will appear.
3. Specify the Current Point and press [F1](Add Point).
The phrase will be divided at the Current Point you specify. Each dividing point is assigned a point number,
and stores the time location you assign. If you want to assign additional dividing points, repeat step 3.
● You can assign up to 95 (ninety five) points (i.e., divide the audio phrase into 96 (ninety six) pieces).
● If you want the dividing points to be determined automatically according to certain conditions, press [F3](Auto
Chop). The AUTO CHOP popup will appear. For details on the parameters (conditions) you can set, refer to
“AUTO CHOP popup” (Screen Guide; p. 160).
4. Press [F5](Asgn ToPatch).
The audio phrase will be divided at the time location(s) you specified. The CHOP QUICK ASSIGN popup
(Screen Guide; p. 161) will appear.
● A partial will be created for each newly divided waveform, and assigned to the patch.
5. Specify the destination to which the divided waveforms will be assigned.
Use the Part parameter to specify the number of the part to which you want to assign the partial that is newly
created from the divided waveforms, and use the Assign To parameter to specify the velocity pad number.
6. Press [F5](Execute).
The partials will be successively assigned to the velocity pads of the specified part, starting with the velocity
pad number you specified.
M-116
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 117 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
To copy an audio phrase
Here’s how to copy the current audio phrase to another pad.
● The data is copied via the clipboard.
1. Press [AUDIO PHRASES].
The AUDIO PHRASES (PAD) screen (Screen Guide; p. 152) will appear.
6
BOARD].
The CLIPBOARD indicator (red) will light.
3. Hold down [CLIP BOARD] and press the VELOCITY PADS to which you want to copy the
audio phrase.
The audio phrase will be copied to the pad you specified.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Making audio phrase settings
2. Hold down the VELOCITY PADS for the audio phrase you want to copy, and press [CLIP
M-117
MV-8800_e.book 118 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Saving audio phrases to the hard disk
Here’s how to save the audio phrases in the current bank to disk. Audio phrase files saved in this way can be
used by other projects.
1. Press [AUDIO PHARASE].
The AUDIO PHRASES (PAD) screen (Screen Guide; p. 152) will appear.
2. Select the pad bank that you want to save, as described in “Switching a pad bank” (p. 36).
3. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
4. Select “Save Audio Phrase Bank” and press [F5](Select).
The SAVE AUDIO PHRASE BANK popup (Screen Guide; p. 154) will appear.
5. Specify the save destination (such as /USER) and press [F5] (Save).
The EDIT FILE NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear.
6. Specify the name of file you want to save.
The file name will be the name you assigned plus an extension of “.MVA”.
7. Press [F5](Execute).
Audio phrases in the current bank will be saved as a file on the hard disk.
M-118
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 119 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Deleting the audio phrase and the sample
● You can’t use the Undo function to bring back a deleted audio phrase or sample.
1. Press [AUDIO PHRASES].
The AUDIO PHRASES screen will appear.
2. Hold down [DELETE], and strike the VELOCITY PADS for the audio phrase you want to
delete.
A confirmation message of “Delete Audio Phrase on Pad ##-##. Are You Sure?” will appear.
(##-## are the pad bank number and pad number.)
F-button
Explanation
[F1](No)
Cancels the operation (The audio phrase and sample will remain).
[F3](Assign Only)
Deletes the audio phrase (the sample will remain).
[F5](Yes)
Deletes the audio phrase and sample used by that audio phrase.
6
When press [F5](Yes) in step2, the sample you are about to delete is used by another partial, audio phrase, and/or
audio event, the following message will appear.
“Some Partials, Audio phrases, Audio Events and Clipboard will be lost by deleting Sample. Are you really sure?”
fig.delete-sample-confirm
F-button
Explanation
[F1](No)
Cancels the operation (the audio phrase and the sample will remain).
[F2](Yes)
Deletes the audio phrase and the sample used by that audio phrase.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Making audio phrase settings
Deleting a sample that’s used by more than one partial /
audio phrase / audio event
M-119
MV-8800_e.book 120 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Saving an audio phrase as a WAV-format or AIFF-format file
Here you can save an audio phrase to the hard disk as a WAV-format or AIFF-format file.
1. Access the AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen as described in “Editing the settings of an audio
phrase” (p. 111).
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Save Sample As WAV” or “Save Sample As AIFF”, and press [F5](Select).
Select “Save Sample As WAV” if you want to save the audio phrase as a WAV-format file, or select “Save
Sample As AIFF” if you want to save the audio phrase as an AIFF-format file.
The SAVE SAMPLE AS WAV popup (Screen Guide; p. 140) or SAVE SAMPLE AS AIFF popup (Screen
Guide; p. 140) will appear.
4. Specify the save destination (such as /USER) and press [F5](Save).
The EDIT FILE NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear.
5. Specify the name of file you want to save.
The file name will consist of the name you specify, with an added extension (“.WAV” for a WAV file, or “.AIF”
for an AIFF file).
6. Press [F5](Execute).
Audio phrase will be saved to the hard disk as a WAV-format or AIFF-format file.
M-120
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 121 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 7
Editing a sample
Viewing a list of samples
Here’s how to view a list of all the samples in your project. You can also delete or edit samples from this screen.
1. Press [PROJECT].
The PROJECT MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 162) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the lower row of icons, press [F3](SmplMgr). Alternatively, select
7
the SAMPLE MANAGER icon and press [ENTER].
Editing a sample
The SAMPLE MANAGER screen (Screen Guide; p. 169) will appear.
3. Select the sample that you want to edit.
4. According to the target, press the following buttons.
F-button
Operation
[F1](Quick Assign)
Displays the Select Quick Assign message (Screen Guide; p. 213). Here you can assign the
sample to a pad as a partial or audio phrase.
[F2](Sample Prm)
Displays the SAMPLE PARAMETER popup (Screen Guide; p. 131). Here you can edit the
sample name and original key.
[F3](Mark On/Off)
Marks or unmarks the sample.
[F4](Preview)
Auditions the currently highlighted sample while you hold down the button.
[F5](Command)
Displays the SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup (Screen Guide; p. 132). Here you
can edit or delete the samples.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-121
MV-8800_e.book 122 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
To emphasize or reduce the high-frequencies of the sample (Emphasis)
In some cases, boosting the high-frequency range of an imported sample will improve the audio quality.
Alternatively, a sample may have an excessively strong high-frequency range when it is played by a sampler
made by another company, and in such cases you can minimize such change by de-emphasizing the
high-frequency range.
● You can select Emphasis from the command in the AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 155) or
the SAMPLE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 128).
1. Access the SAMPLE MANAGER screen as described in “Viewing a list of samples” (p. 121).
2. Press [F5](Command).
The SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup (Screen Guide; p. 132) will appear.
3. Select “Emphasis” and press [F5](Select).
The EMPHASIS popup (Screen Guide; p. 133) will appear.
The “EMPHASIS popup” (p. 133) will appear.
4. Set the Type parameter.
Select either PreEmphasis (boost the high frequencies) or De-Emphasis (reduce the high frequencies).
5. Set the Replace parameter.
If this is on (✔), the edited result will overwrite the original sample.
6. Press [F5](Execute).
The Emphasis operation will be executed.
Saving method of edited sample (Overwrite or Duplicate)
When executing a sample editing operation (Emphasis/Normalize/Time Stretch/Truncate/Set Mono/Fade In/Fade
Out), you can choose whether the result will be overwritten onto the original sample, or created as a new sample.
• Replace
If this is on (✔), the edited result will overwrite the original sample.
M-122
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 123 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
To maximize the level of a sample (Normalize)
This operation raises the level of a sample as high as possible without allowing it to exceed the maximum
possible level.
● You can select Normalize from the command in the AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 155) or
the SAMPLE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 128).
1. Access the SAMPLE MANAGER screen as described in “Viewing a list of samples” (p. 121).
2. Press [F5](Command).
The SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup (Screen Guide; p. 132) will appear.
7
3. Select “Normalize” and press [F5](Select).
Editing a sample
The NORMALIZE popup (Screen Guide; p. 134) will appear.
4. Set the Replace parameter.
If this is on (✔), the edited result will overwrite the original sample.
5. Press [F5](Execute).
The sample level will be maximized (normalized).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-123
MV-8800_e.book 124 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
To Change the length of a sample (Time Stretch)
You can extend or shorten the playback time of a sample. The Time Stretch command lets you transform a
sample without affecting its pitch.
● You can select Time Stretch from the command in the AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 155) or
the SAMPLE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 128).
1. Access the SAMPLE MANAGER screen as described in “Viewing a list of samples” (p. 121).
2. Press [F5](Command).
The SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup (Screen Guide; p. 132) will appear.
3. Select “Time Stretch” and press [F5](Select).
The TIME STRETCH popup (Screen Guide; p. 135) will appear.
4. Set the Rate, Time, Type, and Quality Adjust parameters.
Here you can specify the quality of the conversion. For details, refer to “TIME STRETCH popup” (Screen
Guide; p. 135).
5. Set the Replace parameter.
If this is on (✔), the edited result will overwrite the original sample.
6. Press [F5](Execute).
The Time Stretch command will be executed.
M-124
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 125 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Deleting unnecessary portions of a sample (Truncate)
By deleting unnecessary portions (e.g., regions of silence at the beginning and end) of the sample data used
by a partial or audio phrase, you can reduce the amount of space occupied by the data, and use memory more
efficiently.
● You can’t use the Undo function to bring back a truncated sample.
● You can select Truncate from the command in the AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 155) or the
SAMPLE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 128).
Start Point
Loop Point
End Point
7
Editing a sample
1. Access the SAMPLE MANAGER screen as described in “Viewing a list of samples” (p. 121).
2. Press [F5](Command).
The SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup (Screen Guide; p. 132) will appear.
3. Select “Truncate” and press [F5](Select).
The TRUNCATE popup (Screen Guide; p. 136) will appear.
4. Set the Start Point parameter and End Point parameter.
The Truncate operation will apply to the region between the beginning of the sample and Start Point, End Point
and end of the sample.
● you can use [SHIFT] + CURSOR [
][
][
][
] to zoom-in or zoom-out the waveform display.
● You can use PREVIEW [TO (
)] and [FROM (
)] to audition the sound immediately before and after the
current point. This lets you verify that you’ve set the start and end points correctly.
5. Set the Replace parameter.
If this is on (✔), the edited result will overwrite the original sample.
● Executing Truncate with Type set to “Replace” may affect how another partial, audio phrase, or audio event
sound. Refer to “If the following message appears during truncation” (p. 126).
6. Press [F5](Execute).
The Truncate operation will be executed.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-125
MV-8800_e.book 126 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Deleting unnecessary portions of a sample (Truncate)
If the following message appears during truncation
● This message is displayed when all of the following conditions apply.
• The Replace parameter has a check mark when you execute Truncate.
• The portion to be deleted by the Truncate function is being used by other data (i.e., other partials, audio
phrases, or audio events).
● In this case, you can take one of the following actions.
• Execute the Truncate operation anyway.
Press [F5](Yes).
• Truncate the sample for only the target data.
Press [F1](No) to cancel the operation, change the truncate Type parameter setting to “Duplicate,” and
execute the Truncate operation once again.
• To cancel the truncate procedure.
Press [F1](No).
● This message is displayed for the following reason.
(The explanation here uses the example of executing Truncate on a sample used in common by
partials A, B, and C, with the Truncate Type set to “Replace.”)
partial A
partial B
partial C
If you truncate the sample of partial A as shown in the diagram, a portion of the sample used by partial
C will be deleted. (Partial B is not affected.)
This means that partial C will no longer sound as it did before truncation.
When you execute a Truncate operation that would affect the sound of a partial (or other data)
in this way, the MV-8800 is designed to delete the data that is affected (partial C will be deleted).
The message displayed above is warning you that “the data whose sound is affected by this operation
will be deleted.” If you want to truncate partial A but preserve the state of partial C, clear the check
mark from the Replace parameter before you execute Truncate.
M-126
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 127 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Converting a stereo sample to monaural (Set mono)
You can now convert a stereo sample to monaural.
● You can select Set Mono from the command in the AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 155) or
the SAMPLE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 128).
1. Access the SAMPLE MANAGER screen as described in “Viewing a list of samples” (p. 121).
2. Press [F5](Command).
The SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup (Screen Guide; p. 132) will appear.
3. Select “Set Mono” and press [F5](Select).
The SET MONO popup (Screen Guide; p. 137) appear.
fig.audio-event-param.eps
7
Editing a sample
4. Set the Replace parameter.
If this is on (✔), the edited result will overwrite the original sample.
5. Press [F5](Execute).
The selected sample will be converted to monaural.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-127
MV-8800_e.book 128 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Applying a fade-in to the sample (Fade-in)
This operation modifies the data so that the volume will gradually increase between the Start Point and the
point you specify.
1. Access the SAMPLE MANAGER screen as described in “Viewing a list of samples” (p. 121)
2. Press [F5](Command).
The SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup (Screen Guide; p. 132) will appear.
3. Select “Fade In” and press [F5](Select).
The FADE IN popup (Screen Guide; p. 138) will appear.
4. Specify the value of the End Point parameter.
The fade-in will be applied between the Start Point of the sample and the End Point you specify here.
The volume will be 0 (zero) at the Start Point of the sample, and will gradually increase as you approach the
End Point parameter.
5. Set the Replace parameter.
If this is on (✔), the edited result will overwrite the original sample.
6. Press [F5](Execute).
The fade-in will be applied to the sample.
M-128
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 129 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Applying a fade-out to the sample (Fade-out)
This operation modifies the data so that the volume will gradually decrease between the point you specify and
the End Point.
1. Access the SAMPLE MANAGER screen as described in “Viewing a list of samples” (p. 121).
2. Press [F5](Command).
The SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup (Screen Guide; p. 132) will appear.
3. Select “Fade Out” and press [F5](Select).
The FADE OUT popup (Screen Guide; p. 139) will appear.
7
Editing a sample
4. Specify the value of the Start Point parameter.
The fade-out will be applied between the Start Point you specify and the End Point of the sample.
The volume will gradually decrease from the Start Point, and will reach 0 (zero) at the End Point of the sample.
5. Set the Replace parameter.
If this is on (✔), the edited result will overwrite the original sample.
6. Press [F5](Execute).
The fade-out will be applied to the sample.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-129
MV-8800_e.book 130 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Assigning a sample to a partial or audio phrase
1. Access the SAMPLE MANAGER screen as described in “Viewing a list of samples” (p. 121).
2. Select sample that you want to use as an audio phrase or partial.
3. Press [F3](Quick Assign).
The Select Quick Assign message (Screen Guide; p. 213) will appear.
The rest of the procedure is the same as in“Playing the imported data immediately (Quick Assign)” (p. 75).
Saving a sample as a WAV-format or AIFF-format file
Here you can save a sample to the hard disk as a WAV-format or AIFF-format file.
1. Access the SAMPLE MANAGER screen as described in “Viewing a list of samples” (p. 121).
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Save Sample As WAV” or “Save Sample As AIFF”, and press [F5](Select).
Select Save Sample As WAV if you want to save the sample as a WAV-format file, or select Save Sample As
AIFF if you want to save the sample as an AIFF-format file.
The SAVE SAMPLE AS WAV popup or the SAVE SAMPLE AS AIFF popup (Screen Guide; p. 140) will
appear.
4. Specify the save destination (such as /USER) and press [F5](Save).
The EDIT FILE NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear.
5. Specify the name of file you want to save.
The file name will consist of the name you specify, with an added extension (“.WAV” for a WAV file, or “.AIF”
for an AIFF file).
6. Press [F5](Execute).
Sample will be saved to the hard disk as a WAV-format or AIFF-format file.
M-130
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 131 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 8
Using the sequencer
Overview
The MV-8800 has two types of sequencers: Song and Pattern.
You can create patterns containing phrases that will be repeated, and then create a song by placing these
patterns in the pattern track of the song.
Since you can also play patterns by pressing the velocity pads, they are useful in live performances as well.
● The pattern uses the same instrument settings as the song.
8
Number of tracks
Song
Pattern
MIDI Track
128
64
Audio Track
8
1
Pattern Track
1
---
Measures
9,999
999
Tempo Track
1
---
Locator
10
---
Marker
99
---
Using the sequencer
● Differences between songs and patterns
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-131
MV-8800_e.book 132 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
The Song Mode and The Pattern Mode
Switch the MV-8800 to Song mode when you want to play, record, or edit songs.
Switch the MV-8800 to Pattern mode when you want to play, record, or edit patterns.
● If you switch the mode, the Undo/Redo data will be cleared.
● Switching to Pattern mode
1. Press [PATTERN].
The PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91) will appear. (Pattern Mode)
● Switching to Song mode
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear. (Song Mode)
M-132
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 133 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Silencing a specific track during playback (Mute)
If you want to silence the performance of a specific instrument while the song plays, you can Mute the track
that contains that performance.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the track you want to Mute.
The selected track becomes the current track. (the name of the current track is highlighted.)
3. Use CURSOR [
][
] to move the cursor to the “M” column.
“M” is the Mute switch; it controls the Mute function of the track.
8
4. Turn the VALUE dial toward the right or press [INC].
● To cancel muting, turn the VALUE dial toward the left or press [DEC] to change the “M” indication to “-”.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Using the sequencer
“M” will be displayed at the cursor location of the current track. Mute is now on.
M-133
MV-8800_e.book 134 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Playing only a specific track (Solo)
If you want to hear only the performance of a specific instrument while the song plays, you can Solo the track
that contains that performance.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the track you want to Solo.
The selected track becomes the current track. (the name of the current track is highlighted.)
3. Use CURSOR [
][
] to move the cursor to the “S” column.
“S” is the Solo switch; it controls the Solo function of the track.
4. Turn the VALUE dial toward the right or press [INC].
“S” will be displayed at the cursor location of the current track. Solo is now on.
● If you turn both Mute and Solo on for the same track, Solo will take priority.
● To defeat Solo, turn the VALUE dial toward the left or press [DEC] to switch the “S” indicator to “-”.
M-134
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 135 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using the velocity pads to switch Track Mute and Solo
Here’s how to use the velocity pads to switch Mute (silenced) and Solo settings on/off for a track.
1. Hold down [SHIFT], and press [PAD BANKS].
The TRACK MUTE screen (Screen Guide; p. 75) will appear.
fig.trackmute-screen.eps
2. Press [F1](Mute) to switch the mute setting of a track, or press [F2](Solo) to switch the solo
setting.
The TRACK MUTE screen will appear if you press [F1](Mute). The TRACK SOLO screen will appear if you
press [F2](Solo).
3. Use value dial or [DEC] [INC] to set the Track Bank parameter.
8
● The velocity pads of track banks 1–9 are displayed in miniature at the right of the Track Bank parameter to
indicate the current mute and solo settings.
4. Strike the VELOCITY PADS.
The track corresponding to the velocity pad you struck will be muted or soloed.
Using the sequencer
Track Banks divide tracks 1–136 into groups of sixteen tracks. Select the track bank containing the tracks you
want to mute or solo.
Muted tracks are indicated by the “MUTE” icon, and the pad will be displayed in dark gray. Soloed tracks are
indicated by the “SOLO” icon, and the pad is displayed in white.
● You can record the operation of muting and soloing tracks to the sequencer. For details, refer to “Recording
mute operations” (p. 221).
fig.trackmute-screen.eps
MUTE Icon
SOLO Icon
Normal
5. Press [EXIT] to exit the TRACK MUTE screen or TRACK SOLO screen.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-135
MV-8800_e.book 136 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Applying quantization during playback (Play Quantize)
You can apply quantization during playback to a recorded data without modifying.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the MIDI track you want to add play quantize.
The selected track becomes the current track (the name of the current track is highlighted).
3. Press [F2](Track Param).
The TRACK PARAMETER popup (Screen Guide; p. 11) for the MIDI track will appear.
4. Make settings for the Play Quantize parameters.
The playback quantization will change. Adjust the parameters while the song / pattern plays, and listen to how
Play Quantize affects the playback.
● The Play Quantize parameters are the same as the Edit Quantize parameters. For details, refer to “Correcting
the timing of performance data (Quantize)” (p. 191).
● The difference between Input Quantize and Play Quantize
• Input Quantize
This applies quantization to the incoming data during realtime recording, and records
the quantized data.
• Play Quantize
This applies quantization to the playback of the song / pattern. This means that it will
not modify the original data. You can adjust the quantize settings at any time to
produce a different-feeling quantization effect.
M-136
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 137 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Transmitting MIDI Program Changes at the beginning of a Pattern or Song
You can transmit MIDI Program Change at the time you start playback Song or Pattern from the beginning
(0001-01-000). You can select the correct Patches (sounds) of external MIDI sound module at the beginning
of playback when you are using an external MIDI sound modules.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
Program Change.
] to select the MIDI track on which you want to transmit the MIDI
3. Press [F2](Track Param).
The TRACK PARAMETER popup (Screen Guide; p. 11) for the MIDI track will appear.
8
4. Specify the parameters.
Value
Explanation
Prog
Off, 1–128
The Program Change Number you want to transmit.
BankH
---, 0–127
Value of the Bank Select MSB(CC #0).
(Bank)L
---, 0-127
Value of the Bank Select LSB(CC #32).
Using the sequencer
Parameter
5. Press [EXIT]
The TRACK PARAMETER popup will close.
6. Press [TOP (
)].
The current time will return to the beginning of the Song (or Pattern).
7. Press [PLAY ( )].
The PLAY indicator will light (green). The MIDI Program Change message and Bank Select message will be
transmitted, playback Song (or Pattern) will begin.
8. Press [STOP ( )] to stop playback.
The PLAY indicator will go dark, and playback will stop.
● Program Change message will not be transmitted if the Prog parameter is turned Off.
● Bank Select messages will not be transmitted if Bank H or L is set to ---.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-137
MV-8800_e.book 138 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Changing the playback tempo
Here’s how to change the playback tempo of the entire song / pattern.
1. Press [BMP/TAP].
The BPM/TAP popup (Screen Guide; p. 70) will appear.
If the Tempo Track parameter (Screen Guide; p. 79) is On, the song will play back according to the tempo
track. This means that if you want to use [BPM/TAP] to set the tempo, you must first turn the Tempo Track
parameter Off.
If you press [BPM/TAP] when the Tempo Track parameter is On, the BPM/TAP popup will indicate
[F5](T.Track Off). You can turn the Tempo Track parameter Off by pressing [F5](T.Track Off).
2. Turn the VALUE dial or press [DEC] [INC] to set the playback tempo.
3. When you have finished making the setting, press [EXIT].
Using the Tap function to set the tempo
You can set the tempo by pressing [BPM/TAP] at the desired interval. Press it at least three times at quarter
note intervals of the playback tempo you want to set.
● You can change the tapping interval. To change the tapping interval, specify the length of the notes in BPM/TAP
popup or Tap Resolution parameter in the PANEL screen (Screen Guide; p. 175).
● To use the Tap function to set the tempo, add a check mark ✔ to the Tap parameter in BPM/TAP popup or turn
on the Tap Tempo parameter in the PANEL screen (Screen Guide; p. 175).
Changing the tempo or time signature at the specified location of the song
If you want the tempo to change during the song, insert a new tempo change into the tempo track.
Following the location at which you inserted the tempo change, the song will play at that tempo.
In addition to tempo changes, the tempo track also lets you specify time signature changes.
● The tempo track is available only in songs (not in patterns).
1. Press [SONG], then press [F1](Song Menu).
The SONG MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 78) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F1](Song Param). Alternatively,
select the SONG PARAMETER icon and press [ENTER].
The SONG PARAMETER screen (Screen Guide; p. 79) will appear.
M-138
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 139 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Changing the playback tempo
3. Set the Tempo Track parameter On.
When this is On, the song will play back according to the tempo track.
4. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
5. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
6. Select “Tempo Track” and press [F5](Select)
8
The TEMPO TRACK screen (Screen Guide; p. 52) will appear.
Using the sequencer
7. To add a new tempo or time signature, use CURSOR [
][
] to move to the desired
location and press [F2](Create).
Tempo and time signature data will be added to the tempo list at the cursor location.
The inserted tempo and time signature data will have the same values as the preceding measure.
● f you simply want to modify the existing tempo and time signature data, skip step 7.
8. Use CURSOR [
][
] to move the cursor to the value that you want to edit.
The Meas parameter specifies the measure at which the tempo or time signature will change, Time Signature
specifies the time signature, and BPM specifies the tempo setting.
● You can use [F4](Shift ▲)] / [F5](Shift▼) to move the tempo and time signature data to the preceding or
following measure.
9. Use the VALUE dial or [INC] [DEC] to edit the value.
● To delete the tempo and time signature data, press [F3](Delete).
● You cannot change the tempo and time signature in the middle of a measure.
● Tempo and time signature data always exists at the first measure.
By default, this will be the tempo and time signature that you specified when creating the song. You can modify
this data, but you cannot delete it.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-139
MV-8800_e.book 140 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using the locator
You can assign up to ten locate points in each song.
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
2. Move to the time location where you want to assign a locate point.
3. Press [LOCATOR].
The LOCATOR popup (Screen Guide; p. 59) will appear.
4. Move the cursor to the locate number (0–9) you want to set.
5. Press [F1](Set Now).
The current time will be stored in the specified locate point.
● You can set a locate point even while the song is playing.
Moving to a locate point
Here’s how to move the current time to a locate point you stored.
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
2. Press [LOCATOR].
The LOCATOR popup (Screen Guide; p. 59) will appear.
3. Press the numeric key that corresponds to the desired locate point.
The current time will change.
M-140
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 141 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using the locator
Editing a locate point
You can edit the location of a locate point you stored.
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
2. Press [LOCATOR].
The LOCATOR popup (Screen Guide; p. 59) will appear.
3. Move the cursor to the locate number (0–9) that you want to edit.
4. Press [F3](Edit).
The EDIT LOCATOR popup will appear.
8
6. Press [F1](Set).
The locate point will be assigned to the new time you specified.
Using the sequencer
5. Move the cursor to the measure, beat, and tick, and edit the location as desired.
Naming a locate point
1. Press [LOCATOR].
The LOCATOR popup (Screen Guide; p. 59) will appear.
2. Move the cursor to the locate number (0–9) that you want to edit the name.
3. Press [F4](Name).
The EDIT LOCATOR NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear.
4. Move the cursor to a character and use the VALUE dial or the numeric keys to input the
desired character.
5. When you’ve finished entering the name, press [F5](OK).
Deleting a locate point
1. Press [LOCATOR].
The LOCATOR popup (Screen Guide; p. 59) will appear.
2. Move the cursor to the locate number (0–9) that you want to delete.
3. Press [F2](Clear).
The locate point will be deleted.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-141
MV-8800_e.book 142 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using markers
Setting a marker point
1. Move to the time location where you want to assign a marker point.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [BMP/TAP].
The new marker is placed at the current time.
Moving to a marker point
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Marker” and press [F5](Select)
The MARKER popup (Screen Guide; p. 57) will appear.
4. Use the CURSOR [
][
] to move the cursor to the marker number(01-99) that you want to
move.
5. Press [F5](Jump).
You will move to the time location of the marker at which the cursor is located.
Moving to the next (previous) marker
To jump to the next marker in the song after the current time, hold down [JUMP] and press STEP [
To jump to the last marker in the song before the current time, hold down [JUMP] and press STEP [
].
].
Deleting a marker point
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Marker” and press [F5](Select)
The MARKER popup (Screen Guide; p. 57) will appear.
4. Use the CURSOR [
][
] to move the cursor to the marker number(01-99) that you want to
delete.
5. Press [F3](Delete).
The marker at the cursor location will be deleted.
M-142
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 143 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using the velocity pads to play patterns
You can use the velocity pads to play patterns in succession. This is a useful way to check the transitions
between patterns.
1. Press [PATTERN].
The PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91) will appear.
2. Press [F1](Pattern List).
The PATTERN LIST screen (Screen Guide; p. 96) will appear.
3. Press [F1](Pattern Play).
The PATTERN PLAY screen (Screen Guide; p. 98) will appear.
8
• Next:
Specifies the pattern that will be played as soon as the currently-playing pattern has finished playing.
Range: 001–500
• Use Pattern Tempo
Specifies the playback tempo of the pattern.
Value
Explanation
Off
The pattern will play at the tempo of the song.
On (✔)
The pattern will play at the tempo specified for that pattern.
Using the sequencer
• Cur:
Indicates the currently-playing pattern.
• [F1](Wait)
In this playback mode, the pattern specified for Next: will be selected when the pattern indicated for Cur: has
finished playing.
• [F2](Immedicate)
In this playback mode, the pattern will change immediately when you change the pattern specified for Next:.
• [F5](Ptn↔APhrs)
Specifies whether the velocity pads will play patterns or audio phrases.
PadBank indicates what the velocity pads will play.
4. Press [PLAY ( )].
Pattern playback will begin. The Cur: field indicates the pattern that is now playing.
5. While the pattern is playing, use the Next: parameter or VELOCITY PADS to select the
pattern you want to play next.
• If the playback mode is Wait
If it finishes playing Cur: (current) pattern, it will change to the Next; pattern.
• If the playback mode is Immediate
The pattern changes at the same time it changes a value of the Next: parameter.
● If you want to assign a pattern to a pad, refer to “Assigning a pattern to a pad” (p. 144).
● You can also set the Next parameter by striking a velocity pad.
● If you select a (Empty) pattern for Next, the playing pattern will not change.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-143
MV-8800_e.book 144 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using the velocity pads to play patterns
Assigning a pattern to a pad
Here’s how you can assign frequently used patterns to the velocity pads so that they can be played
immediately.
1. Access the PATTERN LIST screen as described in “Using the velocity pads to play
patterns” (p. 143)
The PATTERN LIST screen (Screen Guide; p. 96) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the pattern you want to assign to the pad.
3. Press [F3](AssignToPad).
The ASSIGN TO PAD popup (Screen Guide; p. 100) will appear.
● Red-colored pads have patterns assigned them.
4. Specify the Pad parameter to which you want to assign the pattern, and press [F5](OK).
● Assigning several patterns as a single operation
1. Access the PATTERN LIST screen as described in “Using the velocity pads to play
patterns” (p. 143).
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Automatic Assign To Pad” and press [F5](Select).
The AUTOMATIC ASSIGN TO PAD popup (Screen Guide; p. 108) will appear.
4. Use the Pattern parameter to specify the range of patterns that you want to assign.
5. Use the Pad parameter to specify the first pad to which you want to assign the patterns.
6. Press [F5](OK).
M-144
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 145 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 9
Recording a song / pattern
This chapter takes you through the various steps of recording a song / pattern.
The work flow of recording
The process of making a new recording involves the steps listed below.
1. Create a new song / pattern
• “Creating a new song” (p. 146)
• “Creating a new pattern” (p. 148)
2. “Recording MIDI tracks (instrument or external MIDI sound module)” (p. 150)
• Adding MIDI tracks
• Realtime recording
9
• Step recording
Recording a song / pattern
• Drum grid
3. “Recording audio tracks or audio phrases” (p. 160)
• Adding audio tracks
• Direct recording
• Realtime recording
• Step recording
4. “Placing patterns in the pattern track” (p. 164)
• Adding a pattern track
• Realtime recording
• Step recording
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-145
MV-8800_e.book 146 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Creating a new song
● “Song” (p. 57)
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
2. Press [F1](Song Menu).
The SONG MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 78) will appear.
3. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F3](Create New). Alternatively,
move the cursor to CREATE NEW SONG and press [ENTER].
The CREATE NEW SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 83) will appear.
4. Make settings for the song.
Parameter
Explanation
Name
The name of the song. To assign a name, press [F1](Name) (maximum 12 characters).
Comment
You can assign a comment of up to 50 characters to the song. Press [F2](Comment) to assign
a comment.
BPM
Specifies the tempo, in units of quarter note Beats Per Minute.
Time Signature
Specifies the time signature. The default is 4/4. As desired, you can select a time signature in
the range of 1/16~32/2.
Track Layout
Specifies the track structure when creating the song. For the various layouts you can choose,
refer to “CREATE NEW SONG screen” (Screen Guide; p. 83).
Copy From
Current Song
This lets you apply the Instruments and Effects settings of the current song to the newly-created
song. Add a check mark ✔ if you want these settings to be applied to the new song as well.
● “BPM” (Appendices; p. 12)
● If you use the Tempo track (p. 138), the tempo settings of the Tempo track will take priority.
5. Press [F5](Execute).
The song will be created, and the SONG screen will appear.
M-146
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 147 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Creating a new song
Starting a new song with your favorite settings (User Track Template)
Your favorite settings such as the track structure or loop settings of a song can be stored on the hard disk as
a “template” for recall any time you want to start creating a song with that structure.
● Saving a User Track Template
● Only one user track template can be stored.
● Since the user track template is stored on the hard disk, it will be lost if you initialize (format) the hard disk.
1. For the current song, create the structure that you want to save as a user track template.
2. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
3. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
4. Select “Save As User Template” and press [F5](Select).
“Save Song setting as User Track Template?” message will appear.
fig.track-mute-screen
9
Explanation
[F1](No)
The user track template will not be saved. The SONG screen will appear.
[F5](Yes)
Things such as the track settings for the current song will be saved on the hard disk as a user track
template.
● Using a user track template to create a song
1. Press [SONG].
Recording a song / pattern
F-button
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
2. Press [F1](Song Menu).
The SONG MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 78) will appear.
3. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F3](Create New). Alternatively,
you can select the CREATE NEW SONG icon and press [ENTER].
The CREATE NEW SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 83) will appear.
4. Set the Track Layout parameter to “User Template.”
5. Press [F5](Execute).
A new song will be created according to the settings saved in the user track template.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-147
MV-8800_e.book 148 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Creating a new pattern
If you want to create a new pattern, start by initializing a pattern.
1. Press [PATTERN].
The PATTERN screen will appear (Pattern Mode).
2. Press [F1](Pattern List).
The PATTERN LIST screen (Screen Guide; p. 96) will appear.
fig.pattern-list.eps
F-button
Explanation
[F1](Pattern Play)
The PATTERN PLAY screen (Screen Guide; p. 98) will appear.
[F2](Pattern Prm)
The PATTERN PARAMETER popup (Screen Guide; p. 99) will appear.
[F3](AssignToPad)
The ASSIGN TO PAD popup (Screen Guide; p. 100) will appear. In this popup, the pattern
selected by the cursor in the PATTERN LIST screen can be assigned to a pad.
[F4](Preview)
Auditions the currently-highlighted pattern. To hear auditioning, hold down [F4](Preview).
[F5](Select)
The pattern will switch to the one you selected.
3. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the pattern you want to initialize.
If the Name field indicates (Empty), this pattern has already been initialized. Proceed to step 7.
4. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
5. Select “Initialize Pattern” and [F5](Select).
“Initialize Sure?” message will appear.
6. Press [F5](Yes).
7. Press [F5](Select).
The PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91) will appear. The current pattern is “empty” (initialized).
M-148
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 149 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Creating a new pattern
Changing a name / length / tempo of a pattern
1. Access the PATTERN LIST screen as described in “Creating a new song” (p. 146).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the pattern you want to edit.
3. Press [F2](Pattern Prm).
The PATTERN PARAMETER popup (Screen Guide; p. 99) will appear.
fig.pattern-list.eps
4. Specify the pattern name and parameters.
5. Press [F5](Close).
9
Recording a song / pattern
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-149
MV-8800_e.book 150 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Recording MIDI tracks (instrument or external MIDI sound module)
Events Handled with MIDI Tracks
● Note
These MIDI messages represent the notes. The parameters are Note Number, which expresses the note name, On
Velocity, which expresses the force used in pressing the velocity pads, Duration, which determines the length of the
note, and Off Velocity, which expresses the speed at which the velocity pads are released.
● Poly Aftertouch
These MIDI messages apply aftertouch to the velocity pads. The parameters are Note Number, i.e., the note
number specifying the particular velocity pad, and Value, which sets the amount of aftertouch applied.
● Control Change
These MIDI messages are used in applying modulation, expression, and a variety of other effects. The function is
selected with the Control Change number, and the amount of the effect applied is set with Value.
● Program Change
These MIDI messages are used to switch sounds. The sounds are switched according to the Program Change
number.
● Channel Aftertouch
These MIDI messages apply aftertouch on an individual MIDI channel basis. The amount of aftertouch applied is set
with the Value parameter.
● Pitch Bend
These MIDI messages change the pitch. The range of the change in pitch is set with Value.
● Tune Request
This contains information for tuning analog synthesizers.
● Mode Message
This contains information for switching the MIDI channel mode.
● System Exclusive (System Exclusive Message)
These MIDI messages are used for setting sounds, timbres, and other settings for a MIDI device being controlled.
Enter data from “F0” to “F7.”
M-150
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 151 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Recording MIDI tracks (instrument or external MIDI sound module)
Adding MIDI tracks for recording MIDI data
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Add MIDI Tracks...” and press [F5](Select).
The ADD MIDI TRACKS popup (Screen Guide; p. 54) will appear.
9
Recording a song / pattern
4. Make settings for the track(s) you want to add.
Parameter
Explanation
Name
The name of the track. Each track you add will be given a default track name. Press [F1](Name)
to assign a name (maximum 12 characters).
Output Assign
Specify the sound generator (instruments part) to which the performance data recorded on the
track will be sent.
MIDI
Specify the MIDI connector and channel on which performance data recorded on the track will
be sent.
Number of Tracks
Specify the number of tracks with the above parameter settings that will be added to the song /
pattern.
5. Press [F5](Execute).
The specified track(s) will be added to the song / pattern.
● To delete a track, use the “DELETE TRACKS popup” (p. 56). The track you specify here will be deleted. For
details, refer to “Deleting tracks” (p. 169).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-151
MV-8800_e.book 152 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Recording MIDI tracks (instrument or external MIDI sound module)
Recording your pad performance just as you play (Realtime Recording)
Realtime Recording is the recording method in which your playing on the pads and your controller operations
are recording exactly as you perform. This method is best when you want to capture the expressive feel of
your performance.
Basic procedure for realtime recording
1. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the track you want to record.
Selected track is highlighted (that means current track). Recording occurs on the current track.
2. Press [REC ( )].
The REC indicator will blink, and the RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup (Screen Guide; p. 16) will
appear.
3. Set the parameters for realtime recording.
Move the cursor to each parameter value, and use the VALUE dial or [DEC] [INC] to set the value.
• Rec Mode
Use this to specify the method by which you will record events.
Value
Explanation
OverDub1
The new material you record will be added to the existing material without erasing it.
By using this type in conjunction with Loop Recording, you can repeatedly record over a
specified region without erasing the existing material.
For example this is a convenient way to record a drum track, since you can record bass drum
→ snare drum → hi-hat etc. on each successive pass.
OverDub2
When newly recorded note events at the same time location as previously recorded note events
will replace the older events.
Replace
The new material you record will replace the existing material.
Use this type when you want to re-record your performance.
• Count In
Specifies how recording will begin.
M-152
Value
Explanation
Off
Recording will begin the moment you press [PLAY (
1 Meas
When you press [PLAY ( )], a count-in will sound from one measure earlier than the record-start
location, and recording will begin at the record-start location.
2 Meas
When you press [PLAY ( )], a count-in will sound from two measures earlier than the record-start
location, and recording will begin at the record-start location.
Wait Note
Recording will begin the moment you strike VELOCITY PADS, press [PLAY (
messages.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
)].
)] or receive MIDI note
MV-8800_e.book 153 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Recording MIDI tracks (instrument or external MIDI sound module)
4. Press [PLAY ( )].
The REC indicator and PLAY indicator will light, and recording will begin. The Now Time and Play List will
begin changing. Start performing.
● You can use the following functions while recording. For details on these functions, refer to the pages listed.
• Track mute/solo (p. 133, p. 134)
• Event erase (p. 154)
● During recording, you can temporarily pause recording by pressing [REC ( )] to make the indicator blink
(“rehearsal mode”). In this state, striking the pads will not cause data to be recorded. This is useful when you
want to check the sounds you are using, or when you want to practice.
5. When you’ve finished recording, press [STOP ( )].
The REC and PLAY indicators will go dark, and recording will stop. If you want to continue to record, continue
from step 1. If you run out of tracks for recording, add tracks as described in “Adding MIDI tracks for recording
MIDI data” (p. 151).
Correcting the note timing while you record (Input Quantize)
Quantize is a function that automatically aligns the notes of your pad performance to accurate timing intervals.
Here’s how you can apply the Quantize function during realtime-recording (Input Quantize).
In addition to the settings described in step 4 of “Basic procedure for realtime recording” (p. 152), you’ll
need to set the following parameter.
• Input Quantize Type
This applies quantization to the data you input (perform).
Range
Explanation
Off
Quantize will not be applied; your performance will be recorded exactly as you play it.
Grid
The note timing will be aligned to intervals of the beat you specify. Use this when you want to record
drums or bass with accurate timing.
Recording a song / pattern
● For details on other Quantize-related parameters, refer to “RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup” (Screen
Guide; p. 16).
9
Grid Quantize
Shuffle
The timing of backbeats will be adjusted forward or backward, producing a “shuffle” or “swing” feel.
fig.10-06.j
Shuffle Quantize with Rate = 75%
50%
75%
100%
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-153
MV-8800_e.book 154 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Recording MIDI tracks (instrument or external MIDI sound module)
Selecting the performance data that will be recorded (Recording Filter)
Normally when you perform realtime recording, all the data you perform will be recorded. If you don’t want
certain types of performance data to be recorded, you can use the Recording Filter.
1. Perform the “Basic procedure for realtime recording” (p. 152) through step 3, and access
the “RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup” (p. 16).
2. Press [F1](Rec Filter).
The RECORDING FILTER popup (Screen Guide; p. 18) will appear.
3. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select a type of performance data (MIDI message).
● For details on each parameter, refer to “RECORDING FILTER popup” (Screen Guide; p. 18).
4. Press [F3](On/Off).
Apply a check mark (✔) to performance data you want to record; remove the check mark from performance
data you don’t want to record.
● You can press [F1](All On) to assign a check mark to all items, or press [F2](All Off) to remove all check marks.
5. Press [F5](Close).
The RECORDING FILTER popup will close.
Erasing unwanted data while you record (Event Erase)
Event Erase is a function that lets you erase unwanted data during realtime recording. This is particularly
convenient during loop-recording, since you can erase data without stopping recording.
● Realtime Erase can be executed only if the recording mode is set to “Overdub1” or “Overdub2.”
1. Begin realtime recording as described in “Basic procedure for realtime recording” (p. 152).
2. Hold down [EVENT ERASE].
The EVENT ERASE popup (Screen Guide; p. 61) will appear.
3. Continue holding down [EVENT ERASE], and press the VELOCITY PADS for the event
(note number) you want to erase.
While you listen to the recorded performance, press the pad at the appropriate timing. The data for that pad
will be erased while you continue holding down the pad. You can press more than one pad if desired, and the
data for those pads will be erased.
● How events are erased when you hold down more than one pad will depend on the Mode setting of the EVENT
ERASE popup.
Setting
Operation
Direct
Only the note events of the pads you hold down will be erased.
Range
Events will be erased for all pads between (and including) the pads you hold down.
4. Release [EVENT ERASE].
The EVENT ERASE popup will close, and you will return to normal recording.
M-154
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 155 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Recording MIDI tracks (instrument or external MIDI sound module)
Recording while looping (Loop Recording)
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8).
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Loop” and press [F5](Select).
The LOOP popup (Screen Guide; p. 48) will appear.
4. Set the Loop Top and Loop End parameter to specify the loop region.
● In the LOOP popup (Screen Guide; p. 48), you can press [F1](Now→Top) to assign the current time as the value
of the Loop Top parameter. Press [F2](Now→End) will assign the current time as the value of the Loop End
parameter.
● By default, the loop length will be two measures. If you want to change the length, access the LOOP popup (in
the SONG screen, select [MENU] ➔ Loop), and change the Quick Loop Length setting.
● If you want to change the location at which looping begins, move the current time to the desired loop-start
location and then press [QUICK SET] once again.
5. Start recording as described in “Basic procedure for realtime recording” (p. 152).
Quickly setting the loop region
9
Here’s how you can pre-specify the time locations at which recording will begin (punch-in) and end (punch-out).
The AUTO PUNCH popup will appear.
2. Set the Punch In and Punch Out parameters.
Set the Punch In parameter to the time location at which you want recording to begin, and the Punch Out
parameter to the location at which you want recording to end.
3. Press [EXIT].
Recording a song / pattern
1. Press [SHIFT] + [AUTO PUNCH].
The AUTO PUNCH popup will close.
4. Press [AUTO PUNCH].
[AUTO PUNCH] will light orange, and the Auto Punch function will be enabled.
5. Press [REC ( )].
The REC indicator will blink, and the “RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup” (p. 16) or the RECORDING
PARAMETER (AUDIO) popup (Screen Guide; p. 19) will appear. Set the parameters as necessary.
6. Press [PLAY ( )].
The PLAY indicator will light, and playback will begin. When the current time reaches the punch-in point, the
blinking REC indicator will light steadily, and recording will begin. When the current time reaches the punch-out
point, the REC indicator will resume blinking, and recording will end. However, the PLAY indicator will remain
lit and playback will continue.
7. When you’re finished recording, press [STOP ( )].
The REC and PLAY indicators will go dark, and recording will stop.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-155
MV-8800_e.book 156 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Recording MIDI tracks (instrument or external MIDI sound module)
Auditioning sounds or phrases while recording
Here’s how you can temporarily stop recording while you continue playing back or performing. This is useful
when you want to try out sounds or phrases without actually recording them.
1. Make sure that [AUTO PUNCH] is dark.
If it is lit, press [AUTO PUNCH] to make it go dark.
2. Start recording as described in “Basic procedure for realtime recording” (p. 152).
3. At the point where you want to temporarily stop recording, Press [REC ( )].
The REC indicator will change to blinking, and recording will stop. However, playback will continue.
● Alternatively, you can use a pedal connected to the FOOT SWITCH jack to switch recording on/off. To do so,
access the PANEL screen (Screen Guide; p. 175) and set the Foot Switch Type parameter to “PUNCH I/O.”
4. At the point where you want to resume recording, Press [REC ( )].
The REC indicator will light, and recording will resume. You can use [REC (
desired.
)] to turn recording on/off as
5. When you’re finished recording, press [STOP ( )].
The REC and PLAY indicators will go dark, and recording will stop.
Step recording
Step Recording is a method by which you can record individual notes and rests one by one, just as if you were
writing music notation onto a sheet of staff paper.
Inputting notes and rests
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the MIDI track that you want to record.
Selected track is highlighted (that means current track). Recording occurs on the current track.
3. Use MEAS [
][
] to move the current time to the point at which you want to begin input.
4. Press [SHIFT] + [REC ( )].
The REC indicator will light, and the STEP REC screen (Screen Guide; p. 62) will appear.
5. Specify the length of the notes you want to input, in terms of the note value.
• Step Time
This specifies the note value of the notes you will input. At the right of the Step Time parameter is a parameter
that allows you to specify a dotted note value. You can use this as needed.
• Duration
This specifies the proportion of the note length that the note will actually sound. Lower values will make the
note play “staccato,” and higher values will make the note play “tenuity” or “slurred.” Normally you will use a
setting of about 80%.
• Velocity
This specifies the force with which you struck the pad. If you want the force with which you actually struck the
pad to be input as the velocity data, set this to “Real.” If you want to input a fixed velocity value, set this as
desired; as a guideline, p (piano) = 60, mf (mezzo-forte) = 90, and f (forte) = 120.
M-156
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 157 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Recording MIDI tracks (instrument or external MIDI sound module)
6. Strike the VELOCITY PADS.
When you strike a pad, data will be input and length specified by the Step Time will forward. The input data
are shown as a bar (length specified by the duration) and as a bar graph (velocity).
Inputed data
Velocity
● During step recording, you can temporarily pause step recording by pressing [REC ( )] to make the indicator
blink (“rehearsal mode”). In this state, striking the pads will not cause data to be recorded. This is useful when
you want to check the sounds you are using, or when you want to practice.
● You can use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the displayed area up or down.
● You can use [SHIFT] + CURSOR [ ] [ ] to zoom-in or zoom-out the input data display.
The (+) direction will narrow (zoom-in) the displayed area. It’s convenient to zoom-in on a specific area if you’ve
input numerous closely-spaced notes.
The (-) direction will widen (zoom-out) the displayed area. This lets you see all of the input data at a glance.
● Using the F-buttons for input
Operation
[F1](Back Step)
Cancels the previously-input note or rest.
[F3](Tie)
Extends the previously-input note by the length of the Step Time.
[F5](Rest)
Inputs a rest of the length of the Step Time.
9
Recording a song / pattern
F-button
7. Repeat steps 5–6 to continue inputting notes.
8. When you’re finished step recording, press [STOP ( )].
The REC indicator will go dark.
Inputting chords
You can input a chord by pressing two or more pad simultaneously. The cursor will advance to the next step
when you release the pads.
● Each parameter will maintain the value that was most recently input. If you want the next note to have the same
settings, there’s no need to change them. In other words, once you’ve set the Duration and Velocity parameters,
you can usually leave them unchanged, and simply use the Step Time parameter and the note pitch (pad) to
continue inputting notes.
If you’re not satisfied with the recorded result
If you’re not satisfied with the results of the step recording you just performed, you can press [UNDO/REDO]
to return to the state prior to recording. Refer to “Undoing a recording or editing operation (Undo/Redo)” (p.
166).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-157
MV-8800_e.book 158 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Recording MIDI tracks (instrument or external MIDI sound module)
Inputting events in rhythm-machine style (Drum Grid)
This is an editing screen that shows note numbers (rows) and time locations (columns). You can record note
events at each intersection.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the MIDI track you want to record.
Selected track is highlighted (that means current track).
3. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
4. Select “Drum Grid” and press [F5](Select).
The DRUM GRID screen (Screen Guide; p. 73) will appear.
fig.drum-grid.eps
• 1-01–6-16
This shows the sounds that are assigned to the pads. The displayed numbers are the pad bank and pad
number.
• Pad Velocity
This lets you set the velocity you input by velocity pads. If you set this to “1–127,” the pad will always produce
a specified velocity value. If you want the force with which you actually struck the pad to be input as the velocity
data, set this to “Real.” You can adjust this parameter in the RECORDING PARAMETER popup (for the drum
grid) (Screen Guide; p. 74).
• Grid Velocity
This lets you edit the velocity of a note event you input.
• [F4](REC Param)
The RECORDING PARAMETER popup will appear. You can adjust the parameters (Step Time, Pad Velocity
and Duration) when you input the note events in DRUM GRID screen.
● You can show the RECORDING PARAMETER popup when press [JUMP]+[REC (
)].
• [F5](Solo)
Switches the Solo mode on/off for this track. When Solo is on, a “SOLO” indication appears at the right of the
track name.
In external VGA screen, an “S” button will light blue.
5. Make sure that [REC ( )] is lit red.
If it is not lit red, press [REC (
M-158
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
)] to make it light.
MV-8800_e.book 159 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Recording MIDI tracks (instrument or external MIDI sound module)
6. Use [F1](16Notes) or [F2](16Grid) to select the desired method for inputting events.
You will use the pads to input events. You can select one of two ways in which pad numbers correspond to
note numbers and time locations.
F-button
How the input methods differ
[F1](16Note)
Pad numbers correspond to note numbers. You can
use the pads to input sixteen different note numbers
at the specified time location.
s
[F2](16Grid)
Pad numbers correspond to step time (location).
You can use the pads to input events for a single
note number at sixteen different step times.
s
Screen
9
Recording a song / pattern
7. Strike the pad to start recording.
Events will be input according to the input method you selected in step 6.
● According to the velocity of note events, different icons will be displayed as follows.
Velocity
0
1–42
43–84
85–126
127
● To delete an event that you input, hold down [EVENT ERASE] and strike the pad for the event you want to
delete.
● If you want to input all notes at a fixed velocity, press [FIXED VELOCITY] to turn it on.
● You can focus on editing a single event, and will be able to edit the velocity when you turn [MULTILEVEL] on.
● If you click the right mouse button, you can select a single event or a grid for editing.
Relationship of Step Time and Grid
Depending on the setting of the Step Time parameter, a group of several events located close together in time
may appear as a single event. MV-8800 operates as following if multiple events are displayed as one piece.
• If you delete, all the events shown as one piece will be deleted.
• If you overwrite, all the events shown as one piece will be deleted and new event will be recorded at top
of the Step Time.
• Velocity will be recorded on first event of the multiple events.
● Use [SHIFT] + CURSOR [
][
] to change the Step Time parameter.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-159
MV-8800_e.book 160 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Recording audio tracks or audio phrases
Sound that is received via the analog inputs (or by other means) can be recorded on audio tracks as if you
were using a multitrack recorder.
You can also use the velocity pads to play audio phrases and record them on an audio track either in real time
or using step recording.
Adding audio tracks for recording data
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Add Audio Tracks...” and press [F5](Select).
The ADD AUDIO TRACKS popup (Screen Guide; p. 55) will appear.
4. Make settings for the track(s) you want to add.
Parameter
Explanation
Name
The name of the track. Each track you add will be given a default track name. Press [F1](Name)
to assign a name (maximum 12 characters).
Output Assign
Specifies the output jack from which the audio recorded on the track will be output.
Number of Tracks
Specify the number of tracks with the above parameter settings that will be added to the song /
pattern.
5. Press [F5](Execute).
The specified track(s) will be added to the song / pattern.
● To delete a track, use the “DELETE TRACKS popup” (p. 56). The track you specify here will be deleted. For
details, refer to “Deleting tracks” (p. 169).
M-160
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 161 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Recording audio tracks or audio phrases
Directly recording an audio input (Direct Recording)
Direct Recording is a function that directly records an audio source from the analog inputs. This lets you record
in the same way as on a multi-track recorder.
1. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
2. Select the GLOBAL icon, and press [ENTER].
The GLOBAL screen (Screen Guide; p. 173) will appear.
3. Set Input Select parameter to specify the input source you want to record.
4. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
5. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the audio track that you want to record.
Selected track is highlighted (that means current track). Recording occurs on the current track.
6. Press [REC ( )].
The REC indicator will blink, and the RECORDING PARAMETER (AUDIO) popup (Screen Guide; p. 19) will
appear.
9
Move the cursor to each parameter, and use the VALUE dial or [DEC] [INC] to set the value.
• Rec Mode (Recording mode)
Set to Direct Rec.
Value
Explanation
Direct Rec
Record audio directly from the input to the track.
Resample MIX
Resample MIX: Re-record the playback of a song or pattern onto an audio track as an audio event.
Event
Record the playback timing of audio phrases triggered from the velocity pads.
Recording a song / pattern
7. Set the realtime-recording parameters.
• Sample Type
Specifies the number of channels that will be recorded.
Value
Explanation
Mono
Monaural (one channel)
Stereo
Stereo (two channels)
• Count In
Specifies how recording will begin.
Value
Explanation
Off
Recording will begin the moment you press [PLAY (
1 Meas
When you press [PLAY ( )], a count-in will sound from one measure earlier than the record-start
location, and recording will begin at the record-start location.
2 Meas
When you press [PLAY ( )], a count-in will sound from two measures earlier than the record-start
location, and recording will begin at the record-start location.
Wait Note
Recording will begin the moment you strike VELOCITY PADS, press [PLAY (
note messages.
)].
)] or receive MIDI
8. Press [PLAY ( )].
The REC and PLAY indicators will light, and the input audio will be recorded.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-161
MV-8800_e.book 162 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Recording audio tracks or audio phrases
9. When you’ve finished recording, press [STOP ( )].
The REC and PLAY indicators will go dark, and recording will stop. If you want to record an additional track,
repeat the procedure from step 3. If you run out of tracks for recording, add a track as described in “Adding
audio tracks for recording data” (p. 160).
Recording song or pattern playback to an audio track (Resample Mix)
The playback of a song or pattern can be re-recorded as an audio event in an audio track. By rendering this
performance into a single track, you can increase the number of free tracks, or play the entire performance by
striking a pad.
● The sound being input from an external audio source will also be mixed.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the audio track you want to record.
3. Adjust the volume balance of each audio track and instruments part.
4. Press [TOP (
)].
The current time will return to the beginning of the song.
● If you want to start recording from somewhere in the middle of the song, move to the desired time location.
5. Press [REC ( )].
The REC indicator will blink, and RECORDING PARAMETER (AUDIO) popup (Screen Guide; p. 19) will
appear.
● You can show the RECORDING PARAMETER popup when press [JUMP]+[REC ( )].
● You can use Auto Punch to re-record only the region of time you specify.
● Use the Input Type parameter to specify whether you will be recording on the audio track in stereo or in mono.
fig.rec-param-audio.eps
6. Set the Rec Mode parameter to “Resample Mix.”
7. Press [PLAY ( )].
The REC indicator and PLAY indicator will light, and recording (resample mix) will begin.
8. Press [STOP ( )].
The REC indicator and PLAY indicator will go dark, and recording (resample mix) will stop.
M-162
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 163 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Recording audio tracks or audio phrases
Recording performance of audio phrases
Realtime recording
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the audio track you want to record.
3. press [REC ( )].
The RECORDING PARAMETER (AUDIO) popup (Screen Guide; p. 19) will appear.
● You can show the RECORDING PARAMETER popup when press [JUMP]+[REC (
)].
4. Set the Rec Mode to Event.
If desired, you can also change the Pattern Length or Input Quantize.
5. Press [PLAY ( )] to start recording, and perform by pressing the pads.
Step recording
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the audio track you want to record.
9
The AUDIO PHRASE STEP REC screen (Screen Guide; p. 63) will appear.
The procedure for step recording is the same as for a “Step recording” (p. 156) in MIDI track.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Recording a song / pattern
3. Press [SHIFT] + [REC ( )].
M-163
MV-8800_e.book 164 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Placing patterns in the pattern track
The patterns you’ve created in Pattern mode can be placed in a song in the desired order for playback.
Creating the pattern track
Here’s how to create the pattern track in the song.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8).
2. Use CURSOR [
] [ ] to move the cursor to the track that is located immediately above
the position where you want to insert the pattern track.
3. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
4. Select “Add Pattern Track” and press [F5](Select).
The pattern track will be inserted immediately below the track at which the cursor is located.
● There can be only one pattern track. If you attempt to create a second pattern track, the message “Can’t create
more pattern tracks” will appear.
M-164
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 165 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Placing patterns in the pattern track
Placing patterns in the pattern track
Realtime recording
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the pattern track.
3. Press [REC ( )].
The RECORDING PARAMETER (PATTERN) popup (Screen Guide; p. 20) will appear.
4. Press [PLAY ( )].
Step recording
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the pattern track.
You can play patterns by striking the pads.
● If there is no pattern track, you’ll need to create one as described in “Creating the pattern track” (p. 164).
● If you want to assign a pattern to a pad, refer to “Assigning a pattern to a pad” (p. 144).
9
3. Press [SHIFT] + [REC ( )].
Recording a song / pattern
The PATTERN STEP REC screen (Screen Guide; p. 110) will appear.
fig.pattern-step-rec.eps
4. Strike the pads to record patterns into the pattern track.
● If you want to place a pattern that’s not assigned to any pad, press [F4](Put Pattern). The PUT PATTERN popup
will appear. Use the Pattern field to select the pattern that you want to place in the pattern track, and use the
Times field to specify the number of times that it is to be placed. Then press [F5](Execute) to place the specified
pattern in the pattern track.
5. When you’re finished, press [STOP ( )].
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-165
MV-8800_e.book 166 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Undoing a recording or editing operation (Undo/Redo)
If you’re not satisfied with the results of the realtime-recording or editing operation you just performed, you can
press [UNDO/REDO] to return to the previous state (Undo).
● If the Undo function is available after recording or editing a sequence, [UNDO/REDO] will light orange.
If you press [UNDO/REDO] to return to the previous state and [UNDO/REDO] will blink.
● Canceling an Undo operation (Redo)
After executing Undo, you can perform Redo to return to the state prior to executing Undo.
Pressing [UNDO/REDO] (blink) after you’ve executed Undo will execute the Redo function.
[UNDO/REDO] will return to lit.
M-166
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 167 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 10
Editing a song / pattern
In order to edit a song or pattern, you must first select the song or pattern that you want to edit. As appropriate for your needs,
you can choose from the following types of editing.
• Editing entire tracks (Delete tracks, Merge tracks)
• Editing a specified region (Sequence edit)
• Editing note events in a MIDI track (Piano roll edit)
• Editing individual events (Event list edit)
Selecting the song that you want to edit
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
2. Press [F1](Song Menu).
The SONG MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 78) will appear.
3. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F4](Select Song). Alternatively,
you can select the SELECT SONG icon and press [ENTER].
The SELECT SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 85) will appear.
10
][
] or the VALUE dial to select the song that you want to edit.
Editing a song / pattern
4. Use CURSOR [
5. Press [F5](Execute).
The selected song will become the current song, and the SONG screen will appear.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-167
MV-8800_e.book 168 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Selecting a pattern
1. Press [PATTERN].
The PATTERN screen will appear (Pattern Mode).
2. Press [F1](Pattern List).
The PATTERN LIST screen (Screen Guide; p. 96) will appear.
fig.pattern-list.eps
F-button
Explanation
[F1](Pattern Play)
The PATTERN PLAY screen (Screen Guide; p. 98) will appear.
[F2](Pattern Prm)
The PATTERN PARAMETER popup (Screen Guide; p. 99) will appear.
[F3](AssignToPad)
The ASSIGN TO PAD popup (Screen Guide; p. 100) will appear. In this popup, the pattern
selected by the cursor in the PATTERN LIST screen can be assigned to a pad.
[F4](Preview)
Auditions the currently-highlighted pattern. To hear auditioning, hold down [F4](Preview).
[F5](Select)
The pattern will switch to the one you selected.
3. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the pattern you want to edit.
4. Press [F5](Select).
The pattern will switch to the one you selected, and the PATTERN screen will appear.
M-168
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 169 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing entire tracks
Deleting tracks
This operation deletes unwanted tracks.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Delete Tracks” and press [F5](Select).
The DELETE TRACKS popup (Screen Guide; p. 56) will appear.
● If you only want to delete the recorded events (rather than the track itself), choose “Erase All Events” in step 3.
4. Specifies the track number (s) you want to delete.
The tracks in the range of “Delete from” through “to” will be deleted.
10
5. Press [F5](Execute).
Editing a song / pattern
The message “Delete Tracks. You cannot UNDO. Are you sure?” will appear.
6. Press [F5](Yes).
The specified track(s) will be deleted from the song / pattern.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-169
MV-8800_e.book 170 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing entire tracks
Combining multiple MIDI tracks into one (Merge Tracks)
This command combines the performance data from multiple adjoining MIDI tracks into one track. This is
convenient when you have run out of MIDI tracks, or if you recorded several drum tracks separately and want
to combine them into a single track.
● Audio track data and pattern track data cannot be merged.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Merge Tracks...” and press [F5](Select).
The MERGE TRACKS popup (Screen Guide; p. 69) will appear.
fig.quick-region
4. Specify the parameters.
• Source From / Source To
Specify the track number of the first track (Source From) and the end track (Source To) you want to merge.
Range:
1–Current track–137
• Merge To
Specify the destination in which the merged data will be placed.
Range
Explanation
New
A new track will be created, and the merged data will be placed in it.
1–137
The merged data will be placed in the track whose number you specify.
• Keep Source Tracks
This specifies whether the tracks specified by Source From/To will be kept.
Range
Explanation
Off
Delete the performance data specified from Source From track to Source To track.
On (✔)
Remain the performance data.
• Fix Quantize
This specifies whether the performance data of the Source tracks will be placed in the Merge To track in a
state that reflects the Play Quantize settings.
Range
Explanation
Off
The performance data of the Source From/To tracks will be placed in the destination without
modification.
On (✔)
The performance data placed in the destination will reflect the Play Quantize settings.
5. Press [F5](Execute).
The Merge Track operation will be executed. The performance data of the MIDI tracks between Source From
and Source To will be combined and placed in the Merge To track.
M-170
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 171 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing a region you specify (Sequence Editing)
In the SEQUENCE EDIT screen, you can edit the performance data (MIDI events, audio events, pattern
events) in the specified track number or region.
● In the SEQUENCE EDIT screen, the commands that are available for you to execute will depend on the type
of track you’ve selected for editing. The “List of available editing commands” (p. 187) uses the following icons
to distinguish these commands.
Commands that can be
executed on a MIDI track.
Commands that can be
executed on an audio
track.
Commands that can be
executed on the pattern
track.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Press [F5](Seq Edit).
The SEQUENCE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 31) will appear.
10
3. Move the cursor to the track that you want to edit, and press [F1](Track Sel).
4. Move the current time location to the beginning of the region that you want to edit, and
press [F3](Rgn In/Out).
This specifies the beginning of the editing region.
5. Move the current time location to the end of the region that you want to edit, and press
[F3](Rgn In/Out).
Editing a song / pattern
A ■ (white) symbol will be added to the track number, indicating that this track is selected for editing. You can
select more than one track for editing — simply repeat step 3.
This specifies the end of the editing region. Your editing operations will apply to the region between the In and
Out points you specified in steps 4 and 5.
Selected
tracks
Selected
data
6. Press [F5](Command).
The SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT COMMAND popup (Screen Guide; p. 34) will appear.
● The list of editing commands will differ according to the screen that is displayed. For a list of the available
commands, refer to “List of available editing commands” (p. 187).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-171
MV-8800_e.book 172 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing a region you specify (Sequence Editing)
7. Use the cursor to select a command, and press [F5](Select).
A popup that lets you specify the editing parameters for each command will appear.
● If you selected the Erase or Cut command, the operation will be executed in step 7. Steps 8 and 9 are not
necessary.
8. Set the parameters for the selected command. (If you’re executing the Erase or Cut
command, there are no parameters to set.)
● If you decide to leave an edit screen without executing, press [EXIT].
9. Press [F5](Execute).
The sequence editing command will be executed.
● If you’re not satisfied with the results of your editing, you can press [UNDO/REDO] to return to the state prior to
editing. For details on the Undo function, refer to “Undoing a recording or editing operation (Undo/Redo)” (p.
166).
M-172
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 173 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing a region you specify (Sequence Editing)
Selecting a region quickly (Quick Region)
The Quick Region function lets you quickly select an editing region for the current track.
● You can’t execute Quick region on more than one track. However, after using Quick Region to select a region,
then press [F2](All Track Sel), you can select that region across all tracks.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Press [F5](Seq Edit).
3. Move the cursor to a track that contains the events you want to region-select, making it the
current track.
4. Move the time so that the current time intersects the events you want to region-select.
This determines the events that will be edited.
5. Press [F4](Quick Rgn).
The events will be highlighted and selected.
fig.quick-region
Now
Now
10
● The selected region
Current track
Explanation
MIDI track
From the beginning to the end of the current measure or current beat of the current track will be
selected (i.e., one measure).
Audio track
Pattern track
If there is an audio / pattern event at the current time in the current track, that single audio /
pattern event will be selected. The length selected will be the single audio / pattern event located
at the current time. If there is no audio / pattern events at the current time in the current track,
from the beginning to the end of the current measure or current beat will be selected.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Editing a song / pattern
Selects a data that the current track
intersects the current time.
Current track
M-173
MV-8800_e.book 174 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing a region you specify (Sequence Editing)
Inserting blank measures at the specified time (Insert Measure)
Here’s how to insert blank measures at the specified measure location.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Press [F5](Seq Edit).
The SEQUENCE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 31) will appear.
3. Use MEAS [
][
] to move the current time you want to insert blank measures.
4. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
5. Select “Insert Measure” and press [F5](Select).
The INSERT MEASURE popup will appear.
fig.quick-region
6. Specify the measure number at which you want to insert blank measures, and the desired
number of measures.
• To
Specify the insert-destination measure number.
• For
Specify the number of blank measures you want to insert.
• Time Signature
Specify the time signature of the measures you want to insert.
● If you want the tempo track settings, marker settings, and locator settings for time locations following the
inserted blank measures to be moved backward as well, select the Tempo, Marker, and/or Locator check boxes.
7. Press [F5](Execute).
The blank measures will be inserted.
M-174
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 175 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing a region you specify (Sequence Editing)
Deleting specified measures (Delete Measure)
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Press [F5](Seq Edit).
The SEQUENCE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 31) will appear.
3. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
4. Select “Delete Measure...” and press [F5](Select).
The DELETE MEASURE popup (Screen Guide; p. 65) will appear.
fig.delete-meas.eps
10
Editing a song / pattern
5. Specify the measure at which you want to begin deleting, and the number of measures to
be deleted.
• From
Specify the measure number at which you want to delete measures.
• Length
Specify the number of measures you want to delete.
● If you want the tempo track settings, marker settings, and locator settings that follow the region of deleted
measures to be moved forward accordingly, select the Tempo Track, Marker, and/or Locator check boxes.
● In Pattern mode you won’t be able to specify the Tempo Track, Marker, and Locator options.
6. Press [F5](Execute).
The region of measures you’ve specified will be deleted.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-175
MV-8800_e.book 176 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing a region you specify (Sequence Editing)
Pasting the performance data of a pattern into a song
Here’s how the contents of the performance data you registered as a pattern can be pasted into a current song.
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
2. Press [F5](Seq Edit).
The SEQUENCE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 31) will appear.
3. Use MEAS [
][
] to move the current time you want to paste performance data of
pattern.
4. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
5. Select “Paste Pattern...” and press [F5](Select).
The PASTE PATTERN popup (Screen Guide; p. 106) will appear.
● You can hold down [F4](Preview) to audition the pattern at which the cursor is located.
fig.pattern-play.eps
6. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the pattern that you want to paste, and press
[F5](Select).
The TRACK REMAP popup (Screen Guide; p. 107) will appear.
fig.pattern-play.eps
7. Specify the song track to which each pattern track will be pasted.
The left column shows the tracks used in the pattern.
The right column lets you specify the song track to which each pattern track will be pasted.
8. Press [F5](Execute).
M-176
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 177 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing note events in a MIDI track (Piano Roll Editing)
In the PIANO ROLL EDIT screen you can edit the note events of the current track in a variety of ways.
●
indicates commands that can be executed in the PIANO ROLL EDIT screen. Refer to “List of available
editing commands” (p. 187)
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Move the cursor to the MIDI track that you want to edit.
Selected track is highlighted (that means current track).
3. Press [F4](Piano Roll).
The PIANO ROLL EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 30) will appear.
● You can access the PIANO ROLL EDIT screen only if the current track is a MIDI track.
A ■ symbol will be added to the note number, indicating that this note is selected for editing. You can select
more than one note for editing—simply repeat step 4.
● To Select/de-select all note numbers, press [F2](All Note Sel).
5. Move the current time location to the beginning of the region that you want to edit, and
press [F3](Rgn In/Out).
10
Editing a song / pattern
4. Move the cursor to the note number that you want to edit, and press [F1](Note Sel).
This specifies the beginning of the editing region.
6. Move the current time location to the end of the region that you want to edit, and press
[F3](Rgn In/Out).
This specifies the end of the editing region. Your editing operations will apply to the region between the In and
Out points you specified in steps 5 and 6.
j
Selected
notes
Selected
data
7. Press [F5](Command).
The SELECT PIANO ROLL EDIT COMMAND popup (Screen Guide; p. 33) will appear.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-177
MV-8800_e.book 178 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing note events in a MIDI track (Piano Roll Editing)
8. Use the cursor to select a command, and press [F5](Select).
A popup will appear, allowing you to specify the editing parameters for the command you selected.
● The list of editing commands will differ according to the screen that is displayed. For a list of the available
commands, refer to “List of available editing commands” (p. 187).
● If you selected the Erase command, the operation will be executed in step 8. Steps 9 and 10 are not necessary.
9. Set the parameters for the selected command. (If you’re executing the Erase command,
there are no parameters to set.)
● If you decide to leave an edit screen without executing, press [EXIT].
10. Press [F5](Execute).
The piano roll editing command will be executed.
● If you’re not satisfied with the results of your editing, you can press [UNDO/REDO] to return to the state prior to
editing. For details on the Undo function, refer to “Undoing a recording or editing operation (Undo/Redo)” (p. 166).
You can make the following settings in the PIANO ROLL EDIT screen.
• Step Time (The unit by which the current time will move when you press STEP [
][
])
• Track parameters of the current track
• Solo switch of the current track
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen
Guide; p. 91).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the MIDI track you want to edit.
3. Press [F4](Piano Roll).
The PIANO ROLL EDIT screen will appear.
fig.piano-roll.eps
4. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
• Step Time
Displays the STEP TIME popup (Screen Guide; p. 58). Specifies the unit by which the current time
will move when you press STEP [ ] [ ].
• Track Parameter
Displays the TRACK PARAMETER popup (for MIDI track).
• Solo On/Off
Turns solo on/off for the current track.
M-178
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 179 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing note events in a MIDI track (Piano Roll Editing)
Note event editing in the PIANO ROLL EDIT screen
Now you can edit note events in the PIANO ROLL EDIT screen.
If you use the shortcut for jumping to the beginning of the note events ([JUMP] + MEAS [
][
]), the note
event at that time location will be selected automatically, so you can immediately begin editing just as in the
event list.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the MIDI track you want to edit.
The selected track (the current track) will be highlighted.
3. Press [F4](Piano Roll).
The PIANO ROLL EDIT screen will appear.
fig.piano-roll.eps
4. Use [JUMP] + MEAS [
][
][
] to select the parameter you want to edit.
6. Use the VALUE dial (or other means) to input the value, and press [ENTER].
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Editing a song / pattern
The upper part of the piano roll screen shows detailed information about the note event at the current time
location.
5. Use CURSOR [
10
] to move to the note event that you want to edit.
M-179
MV-8800_e.book 180 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing note events in a MIDI track (Piano Roll Editing)
Selecting a region quickly (Quick Region)
The Quick Region function lets you quickly select an editing region for current note (PIANO ROLL EDIT
screen).
● You can’t execute Quick region on more than one note. However, after using Quick Region to select a region,
then press [F2](All Note Sel), you can select that region across all notes.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Press [F4](PianoRoll).
3. Move the cursor to a note that contains the events you want to region-select, making it the
current note.
4. Move the time so that the current time intersects the events you want to region-select.
This determines the events that will be edited.
5. Press [F4](Quick Rgn).
The events will be highlighted and selected.
fig.quick-region
Now
Current note
Now
Selects a data that the current note
intersects the current time.
● The selected region in the PIANO ROLL EDIT screen
If there is a note event at the current time in the current note (Target), a length corresponding to the duration
of the note event will be selected.
If there is not a note event at the current time in the current note (target), a length corresponding to the STEP
TIME will be selected.
M-180
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 181 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing events individually
The method used in editing individual events differs depending on the type of track.
• MIDI track
Event list editing
• Audio track
Audio event parameter
• Pattern track
Pattern event parameter
Event list editing
The EVENT LIST screen lets you edit the individual MIDI messages recorded in your song / pattern. Each line
of this screen shows the location (measure - beat - tick), type of data, and value(s) of a single event.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Move the cursor to the MIDI track that you want to edit, making it the current track.
3. Press [F3](Event List).
The EVENT LIST screen (Screen Guide; p. 23) will appear.
● The EVENT LIST screen is available if the current track is a MIDI track.
10
Editing a song / pattern
4. Use CURSOR [
][
] or the VALUE dial to select the event (performance data) you want to
edit.
● When you use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to change the current time, the note event located at that time will be
transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector.
5. Use CURSOR [
] [ ] to move the cursor to the field for the parameter you want to edit.
The currently-edited event is enclosed by a frame.
● You can strike a pad to specify the value when editing the Note Number of a note or polyphonic aftertouch event,
or when editing the On Velocity.
6. Turn the VALUE dial or use [DEC] [INC] to edit the value.
● To specify the value of a parameter, you can use the VALUE dial or [DEC] [INC], or use the numeric keys to
input the value directly. After using the numeric keys to input a value, press [ENTER] to finalize the input.
7. Press [ENTER].
The edited value will be finalized.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-181
MV-8800_e.book 182 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing events individually
You can make the following settings in the EVENT LIST screen.
• Step Time (The unit by which the current time will move when you press STEP [
][
])
• Track parameters of the current track
• Solo switch of the current track
1. Access the EVENT LIST screen as described in “Event list editing” (p. 181).
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
You can make the following settings in the MENU popup.
• Step Time
Displays the STEP TIME popup (Screen Guide; p. 58). Specifies the unit by which the current time
will move when you press STEP [ ] [ ].
• Track Parameter
Displays the TRACK PARAMETER popup (for MIDI track).
• Solo On/Off
Turns solo on/off for the current track. When Solo is on, a “SOLO” indication appears at the right of
the track name.
Inserting performance data (Create Event)
Here’s how to insert new performance data into the desired location within a MIDI track.
● For details on the types of performance data you can insert, refer to “Events Handled with MIDI Tracks” (p. 150).
1. Access the EVENT LIST screen as described in “Event list editing” (p. 181).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
insert a data event.
] or the VALUE dial to move to the time location where you want to
● When you use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to change the current time, the note event located at that time will be
transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector.
3. Press [F1](Create).
The CREATE EVENT popup (Screen Guide; p. 25) will appear.
4. Use CURSOR [
][
] or the VALUE dial to select the type of performance data event that
will be inserted.
5. Press [F5](Select).
The performance data will be inserted. The event will be inserted with default values; edit the values as
desired.
● If you are not satisfied with the result of executing this command, press [UNDO/REDO] to return to the state
prior to execution (p. 166).
M-182
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 183 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing events individually
Erasing performance data (Erase)
Here’s how to erase the selected performance data.
1. Access the EVENT LIST screen as described in “Event list editing” (p. 181).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] or the VALUE dial to move to the data you want to erase.
● When you use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the current time, the note event located at that time will be
transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector.
● If you want to select more than one event (i.e., a range of events), hold down [SHIFT] while you move the cursor.
3. Press [F2](Erase).
The selected event will be erased. The erased event is saved in temporary memory. You can use [F4](Paste)
to paste this saved event at the specified location (Moving an event).
Copying performance data (Copy & Paste)
Here’s how to copy the selected performance data to the clipboard (a temporary holding area).
1. Access the EVENT LIST screen as described in “Event list editing” (p. 181).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] or the VALUE dial to move to the data you want to copy.
● When you use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the current time, the note event located at that time will be
transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector.
3. Press [F3](Copy).
The selected event stored in internal memory will be copied to the internal memory.
4. Press [F4](Paste).
The PASTE EVENT popup (Screen Guide; p. 26) will appear.
10
Editing a song / pattern
● If you want to select more than one event (i.e., a range of events), hold down [SHIFT] while you move the cursor.
5. Specifies To parameter (copy-destination time) and then press [F5](Execute).
The copied event will be pasted to the To parameter.
● If you are not satisfied with the result of executing this command, press [UNDO/REDO] to return to the state
prior to execution (p. 166).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-183
MV-8800_e.book 184 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing events individually
Editing a system exclusive message
1. Access the EVENT LIST screen as described in “Event list editing” (p. 181).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] or the VALUE dial to move to the system exclusive message you
want to edit.
● When you use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the current time, the note event located at that time will be
transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector.
3. Press CURSOR [
].
The SYS-EX popup (Screen Guide; p. 27) will appear.
4. Use CURSOR [
][
] to move the cursor to the data you want to edit.
The cursor will move to successive bytes of the exclusive data.
5. Use the VALUE dial or [DEC] [INC] to edit the value.
If you want to add a data byte to the exclusive message, move the cursor to the desired location and press
[F2](Insert). A value of “00” will be inserted; edit the value as desired.
If you want to delete a data byte from the exclusive message, move the cursor to that location and press
[F3](Delete).
● To specify the value of a parameter, you can use the VALUE dial or [DEC] [INC], or use the numeric keys to
input the value directly. After using the numeric keys to input a value, press [ENTER] to finalize the input.
6. When you have finished editing, press [F5](Execute).
The system exclusive message you edited will be finalized.
● If you decide to stop editing a system exclusive message and discard the changes you made, press [EXIT] to
return to the EVENT LIST screen.
● When you are inputting a Roland system exclusive message, you can use Auto Check Sum to calculate the
checksum automatically. If Auto Sum is On, the data byte preceding the end of the message (F7) will be the
checksum; the calculated result will be inserted here automatically. If input is not successful, turn Auto Sum “Off”
and then “On” again.
● If you press [F4](Test), the system exclusive message you’re editing will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT
connector.
M-184
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 185 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing events individually
Audio event parameter
Here you can adjust the parameter of an audio event in an audio track.
1. Access the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) or the PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91).
2. Press [F5](Seq Edit).
The SEQUENCE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 31) will appear.
3. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the audio track which has audio events.
4. USE [JUMP] + MEAS [
][
] to move the time location of the audio event you want to
edit.
5. Press [MENU].
10
The MENU popup will appear.
Editing a song / pattern
6. Select “Audio Event Parameter” and press [F5].
The AUDIO EVENT PARAMETER popup (Screen Guide; p. 28) will appear.
7. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the parameter.
8. Use the VALUE dial or [DEC] [INC] to edit the value.
● If you press [F1](Move), the MOVE AUDIO EVENT popup (Screen Guide; p. 113) will appear. Here you can
change the length of an audio event, or move it to a different time location.
● If you press [F2](Sample Edit), the AUDIO EVENT SAMPLE EDIT popup (Screen Guide; p. 29) will appear.
Here you can change the playback region of the sample used by an audio event.
9. Press [F5](Close).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-185
MV-8800_e.book 186 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Editing events individually
Pattern event parameter
Here you can make detailed settings for the pattern event in a pattern track.
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
2. Press [F5](Seq Edit).
The SEQUENCE EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 31) will appear.
3. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the pattern track containing the pattern event you want to
edit.
4. Use [JUMP] + MEAS [
][
] to move to the time location of the pattern event.
5. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
6. Select “Pattern Parameter...” and press [F5](Select).
The PATTERN EVENT PARAMETR popup (Screen Guide; p. 112) will appear.
fig.pattern-step-rec.eps
• [F1](Move)
MOVE PATTERN EVENT popup will appear. This lets you change the Position at which the pattern will play,
and the Duration for which it will play.
• Track
This Displays the number and name of the track you are editing.
• Pattern
This lets you change the pattern at the current time location to a different pattern you specify.
Range:
001–The current pattern number–500
• Start
This lets you specify the time location from which the pattern will begin playing.
Range:
0001-01-000–The end of pattern
• Position
This displays the starting location (measure - beat - tick) at which the pattern is recorded. If you want to edit
this parameter, press [F1](Move).
• Duration
This indicates the actual length (beats - ticks) for which the pattern will play. If you want to edit this parameter,
press [F1](Move).
7. Press [F5](Close).
M-186
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 187 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
List of available editing commands
A check mark ✔ indicates a command that is available in the corresponding editing screen.
● The commands that can be executed will depend on the type of track you’re editing.
In this section, the following icons are used to show which commands can be executed on the performance data
of each type of track.
These commands can be executed on the MIDI note data of a MIDI track in the PIANO ROLL EDIT
screen.
These commands can be executed on the performance data of a MIDI track in the SEQUENCE
EDIT screen.
These commands can be executed on the audio events of an audio track in the SEQUENCE EDIT
screen.
These commands can be executed on the pattern events in the pattern track in the SEQUENCE
EDIT screen.
SEQUENCE EDIT screen
Command
✔
✔
✔
✔
Copy&Paste... (p. 189)
✔
✔
✔
✔
Copy&Insert... (p. 190)
✔
✔
✔
✔
Erase
Erases the specified region. The erased region is filled
with rests, so subsequent measures will not move.
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Cut
Cuts the specified region. The cut region is removed, so
subsequent measures will be shifted forward.
Quantize... (p. 191)
✔
✔
Change Velocity... (p. 192)
✔
✔
Change Duration... (p. 193)
✔
✔
Shift Timing... (p. 194)
✔
✔
Data Thin... (p. 195)
✔
Transpose... (p. 196)
✔
Split Notes...(p. 197)
✔
Create Continuous Data...(p. 198)
✔
Change Continuous Data...(p. 199)
✔
Copy As MIDI Clip (p. 200)
✔
Copy As New Pattern...(p. 200)
✔
10
Editing a song / pattern
Move... (p. 188)
✔
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-187
MV-8800_e.book 188 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
List of available editing commands
Moving performance data (Move)
Here’s how you can move the specified region of performance data. The data recorded in the move-source
region will be replaced by rests. This editing command is useful in situations like the following.
• When you want to move or transpose a phrase (when using Piano Roll editing)
• When you want to move sequence data from one track to a different track (when using Sequence editing)
● For details on all of the Move-related parameters and settings, refer to “MOVE popup” (Screen Guide; p. 36).
❍ Parameters to specify
• To
Specify the new time to which the data will be moved.
• Transpose
Move the pitch of the note messages upward or downward.
● The Transpose parameter is available if you accessed the MOVE popup from the PIANO ROLL EDIT screen.
• To Track
Specify the track to which the data will be moved. If you’re moving more than one track, this parameter is
invalid.
● The To Track parameter is available if you accessed the MOVE popup from the SEQUENCE EDIT screen.
• Mode
Specify what will happen if performance data exists at the move-destination.
Setting
Explanation
Mix
The moved data will be merged (combined) with the data existing at the destination.
Replace
The moved data will replace (overwrite) the data existing at the destination.
● If the track(s) being moved include audio tracks or pattern tracks, the Mode parameter is fixed at Replace.
M-188
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 189 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
List of available editing commands
Copying performance data
Here’s how you can copy the specified region of performance data. This is a convenient way to repeat a phrase
several times. You can choose from two copy methods; Copy & Paste or Copy & Insert.
● Copying data and pasting it at another location (Copy & Paste).
The Copy & Paste command pastes the copied performance data into another track or note number. Data
already existing at the paste location will be overwritten.
● For details on all of the parameters and settings for Copy & Paste, refer to “COPY&PASTE popup” (Screen
Guide; p. 35).
❍ Parameters to specify
10
• Transpose
Move the pitch of the note messages upward or downward.
● The Transpose parameter is available if you accessed the COPY & PASTE popup from the PIANO ROLL EDIT
screen.
• To Track
Specify the track to which the data will be copied. If you’re copying more than one track, this parameter is
invalid.
Editing a song / pattern
• To
Specify the new time to which the data will be pasted.
● The To Track parameter is available if you accessed the COPY & PASTE popup from the SEQUENCE EDIT
screen.
• Mode
Specify what will happen if performance data exists at the copy-destination.
Setting
Explanation
Mix
The data will be merged (combined) with the data existing at the paste destination.
Replace
The data will replace (overwrite) the data existing at the paste destination.
● If the track(s) being copied include audio tracks or pattern tracks, the Mode parameter is fixed at Replace.
• Times
Specify the number of times that the data will be pasted.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-189
MV-8800_e.book 190 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
List of available editing commands
● Copying data and inserting it at another location (Copy & Insert)
The Copy & Insert command inserts the copied performance data into another track or note number, and
moves the existing sequence data backward to make room.
● For details on all of the parameters and settings for Copy & Insert, refer to “COPY&INSERT popup” (Screen
Guide; p. 37).
❍ Parameters to specify
• To
Specify the new time to which the data will be copied.
• To Track
Specify the track to which the data will be copied. If you’re copying more than one track, you cannot copy to
other track (Displays “Multi Tracks Selected”).
● The To Track parameter is available if you accessed the COPY & INSERT popup from the SEQUENCE EDIT
screen.
• Shift All Notes / Shift All Tracks
If you check this item, all data following the insert location will be moved backward according to the playback
duration of the copied data.
● The Shift All Notes parameter is available if you accessed the COPY & INSERT popup from the PIANO ROLL
EDIT screen.
● The Shift All Tracks parameter is available if you accessed the COPY & INSERT popup from the SEQUENCE
EDIT screen.
Shift All Notes/Shift All Tracks
(Off)
Insertion point
Overlapping data
Shift All Notes/Shift All Tracks
will be moved backward.
(On)
Insertion point
All data existing at the insertion time
M-190
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
will be moved backward.
MV-8800_e.book 191 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
List of available editing commands
Correcting the timing of performance data (Quantize)
This command corrects (quantizes) the timing of the recorded performance data.
● For details on all of the parameters and settings for Quantize, refer to “QUANTIZE popup” (Screen Guide; p. 38).
● The Quantize command affects only the timing at which you struck the pads (i.e., the note-on data). It does not
modify the timing of any other type of performance data. This means that performance data such as Pitch Bend
or Modulation may no longer be aligned with the appropriate note data, producing unexpected results.
❍ Parameters to specify
• Quantize Type
Setting
Explanation
Grid
The note timing will be aligned to intervals of the beat you specify. Use this when you want to “tighten-up”
the drums or bass to the precise timing.
Shuffle
The timing of backbeats will be adjusted forward or backward, producing a “shuffle” or “swing” feel.
fig.10-06.j
Editing a song / pattern
Grid Quantize
10
Shuffle Quantize with Rate = 75%
50%
75%
100%
Template
You can choose quantization settings from a variety of templates. The MV-8800 provides 71 templates
for use with rhythms of a variety of musical styles. For details on the contents of the templates, refer to
“Templates” (Screen Guide; p. 12).
● The templates are designed for a 4/4 time signature. They may not produce the desired results if applied to a
performance that uses a different time signature.
● The names of the template styles are only for your guidance, and do not mean that a given template can be
used only for music of that style. Feel free to try various types of template.
• Resolution
Specifies the note value interval to which the timing will be quantized. Choose the shortest note value that
occurs in the region you are quantizing.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-191
MV-8800_e.book 192 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
List of available editing commands
• Strength
Specifies the degree to which the note timing will be moved toward intervals of the note value specified in
Resolution. With a Strength of 100%, notes will be moved all the way to intervals of the specified note value.
Lower settings of Strength will apply less correction to the note timing, and with a Strength of 0% no correction
will occur.
You may not obtain the expected results if you apply Template Quantize to performance data whose timing is
imprecise. In such cases, you should first apply Grid Quantize to tighten up the timing of the data.
• Rate
This setting is available if you’ve set Type to “Shuffle.” It specifies the distance by which backbeats of the
Resolution note value will be separated from the downbeats. You can create a sense of “swing” by shifting the
timing of the backbeats. With a setting of 50%, backbeats will be placed exactly between adjacent downbeats.
With a setting of 0%, backbeats will be moved all the way to the preceding downbeat. With a setting of 100%,
backbeats will be moved all the way to the following downbeat.
• Note Range
This specifies the range of notes that will be quantized.
For example if you want to quantize notes between C3 and C4, set the left and right values of the Range
parameter to “C3” and “C4” respectively. You can also set these by striking pads.
● The Note Range parameter is available if you’ve accessed the QUANTIZE popup from the SEQUENCE EDIT
screen.
Editing note accents (Change Velocity)
This command lets you edit the strength (velocity) of note messages.
● For details on all of the parameters and values for the Change Velocity command, refer to “CHANGE
VELOCITY popup” (Screen Guide; p. 39).
❍ Parameters to specify
• Magnify
Use this parameter to decrease or increase differences in velocity (i.e., dynamics) between notes. Use a
setting of 99% or below to make the dynamics of your recorded playing more consistent. Use a setting of 101%
or above to make the dynamics vary more widely. Higher settings will make loud notes louder and soft notes
softer. With a setting of 100%, no change will occur.
• Bias
Use this parameter to apply a uniform change to the velocity. The value you specify will be applied to all of the
current velocity values, increasing or decreasing them by the same amount. For example to increase all
velocity values by 10, you would specify a value of +10.
• Note Range
This specifies the range of note numbers whose velocity will be edited. For example if you want to change the
velocity of note numbers between C3 and C4, set the left and right values of the Range parameter to “C3” and
“C4” respectively. You can also specify these by striking the pads.
● The Range parameter is available if you have accessed the CHANGE VELOCITY popup from the SEQUENCE
EDIT screen.
M-192
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 193 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
List of available editing commands
Editing the length of the notes (Change Duration)
This command lets you modify the duration of notes (the length between note-on and note-off). By changing
the duration you can make your recorded performance more staccato or tenuto.
● For details on all of the parameters and values for the Change Duration command, refer to “CHANGE
DURATION popup” (Screen Guide; p. 40).
❍ Parameters to specify
• Magnify
Use this parameter to decrease or increase differences in duration between notes. With a setting of 100%, no
change will occur. Use a setting of 101% or above to make the durations greater, and a setting of 99% or below
to make the durations shorter. For example, a setting of 50% would halve the durations, and a setting of 200%
would double the durations.
• Note Range
This specifies the range of note numbers whose duration will be changed. For example if you want to change
the duration of note numbers between C3 and C4, set the left and right values of the Range parameter to “C3”
and “C4” respectively. You can also specify these by striking the pads.
10
Editing a song / pattern
• Bias
Use this parameter to apply a uniform change to all durations. The value you specify will be applied to all of
the current durations, lengthening or shortening them by the same amount. For example to increase all
durations by 10, you would specify a value of +10.
● The Note Range parameter is available if you have accessed the CHANGE DURATION popup from the
SEQUENCE EDIT screen.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-193
MV-8800_e.book 194 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
List of available editing commands
Moving the performance data backward or forward (Shift Timing)
This command lets you moving the timing of performance data backward or forward in units of one tick. By
shifting the performance data slightly, you can make the performance “rush” or “drag” the beat.
● For details on all of the parameters and values for the Shift Timing command, refer to “SHIFT TIMING popup”
(Screen Guide; p. 41).
● If the Shift Timing command would move data to a point earlier than the beginning of the song / pattern, it will
simply be moved to the beginning of the song / pattern.
❍ Parameters to specify
• Bias
This parameter specifies the amount by which the performance data will be shifted (in units of one tick). For
example to move the performance data 10 ticks later in time, you would specify a value of +10.
• Note Range
This specifies the range of note numbers whose timing will be shifted. For example if you want to shift the
timing of note numbers between C3 and C4, set the left and right values of the Range parameter to “C3” and
“C4” respectively. You can also specify these by striking the pads.
● The Range parameter is available if you have accessed the SHIFT TIMING popup from the SEQUENCE EDIT
screen.
● If you use the VIEW FILTER popup (Screen Guide; p. 53) to restrict the types of event that will be edited, only
the specified type(s) of events will be shifted in time.
M-194
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 195 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
List of available editing commands
Thinning out the performance data (Data Thin)
Since values for data types such as aftertouch, pitch bend, and expression are recorded continuously, these
can produce a large quantity of data. By using the Data Thin command to reduce the amount of data in a way
that will not be perceptible, you can conserve memory and lighten the load on the sequencer.
● For details on all of the parameters and values of the Data Thin command, refer to “DATA THIN popup” (Screen
Guide; p. 42).
❍ Parameters to specify
• Value
Set this to a higher value if you want to thin out performance data even if it contains sudden changes. Set this
to a lower value if you don’t want to apply much thinning to performance data that contains sudden changes.
• Note Range
This specifies the range of polyphonic aftertouch of that will be reduced. For example if you want to reduce
note numbers of polyphonic aftertouch in the range of C3 and C4, set the left and right values of the Range
parameter to “C3” and “C4” respectively. You can also specify these by striking the pads.
● If you use the VIEW FILTER popup (Screen Guide; p. 53) to restrict the types of event that will be edited, only
the specified type(s) of events will be thinned.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
10
Editing a song / pattern
• Time
Set this to a higher value if you want to thin out performance data that changes slowly. Set this to a lower value
if you don’t want to apply much thinning to performance data that changes slowly.
M-195
MV-8800_e.book 196 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
List of available editing commands
Transposing notes (Transpose)
You can transpose note messages in a range of 127 semitones. Use this command when you want to
transpose notes in a specific region of the song.
● For details on all of the parameters and values of the Transpose command, refer to “TRANSPOSE popup”
(Screen Guide; p. 43).
❍ Parameters to specify
• Transpose
This parameter specifies the amount by which the note data will be transposed (in units of one semitone).
Specify a positive “+” value to raise the pitch, or a negative “-” value to lower the pitch. With a setting of “0,”
the notes will not be transposed.
• Note Range
This specifies the range of note numbers that will be transposed. For example if you want to transpose note
numbers in the range of C3 and C4, set the left and right values of the Range parameter to “C3” and “C4”
respectively. You can also specify these by striking the pads.
● The Note Range parameter is available if you accessed the TRANSPOSE popup from the SEQUENCE EDIT
screen.
● To lower the bass notes by one octave
If you recorded your bass performance one octave higher than you intended, here’s how you can use
the Transpose command to lower the notes by one octave.
Set the Bias parameter to “-12.” Set the Range parameter to the lowest and highest note of the bass
performance you want to transpose.
● To exchange a percussion instrument sound
You can use the Transpose command to exchange a specific percussion instrument sound played
within a drum performance. For example, suppose you want to exchange a conga sound for a tom
sound. If the conga is assigned to the D4 key and the tom is assigned to the C3 key, set the Range
parameter to “62 (D4) - 62 (D4)” and the Transpose parameter to “-14”.
M-196
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 197 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
List of available editing commands
Extracting specific note events (Split Notes)
This lets you extract only specific note events from a track, and move them to a specified other track.
For example, if you have an entire drum performance recorded in a single track, you can use this command
to extract just the sname drum notes and place them on a different track.
● For details on all of the parameters and values of the Split Notes command, refer to “SPLIT NOTES popup”
(Screen Guide; p. 66).
● You cannot extract data from audio tracks or pattern tracks.
❍ Parameters to specify
• Note Range
Specifies the range of note numbers that will be extracted.
• Type
Specifies what will happen after the note events are extracted from the original track.
• Send To
Specifies how the extracted note events will be recorded.
● If you use the Send To “One Track” setting to place the extracted data in a track that already contains data, the
extracted data will be combined with the existing data in the destination track.
● If you want to separate drum notes into individual tracks, use the Send To “Separate Tracks by Pitch” setting.
10
Editing a song / pattern
● If you set the larger value at the left-hand cursor than the value at the right-hand cursor, the SPLIT NOTES
operation will be executed for the note nnumber other than you set at the Note Range parameter.
• Track
Specifies the track number in which the extracted note events will be places. This parameter is available in
case of the Send To is “One Track.”
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-197
MV-8800_e.book 198 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
List of available editing commands
Entering data with a smooth succession of values (Create Continuous Data)
You can enter automation data (p. 3) containing values that change continuously over time, such as Volume
data or Pan data.
● For details on all of the parameters and values of the Create Continuous Data command, refer to “CREATE
CONTINUOUS DATA popup” (Screen Guide; p. 67).
❍ Parameters to specify
• Event
Specify the type of data that you want to enter.
• Number
Specify the Control Change number that you want to enter, if you specified Control Change as the Event.
• Note
Specify the Note number that you want to enter, if you specified Poly Aftertouch as the Event.
• Value From
Specify the initial value at the starting point of the continuous data.
• To
Specify the destination value at the ending point of the continuous data.
• Curve
Specifies the kind of the change in data.
• Interval Time
Specify the spacing (in ticks) between events of the continuous data.
M-198
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 199 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
List of available editing commands
Modifying data in a selected region (Change Continuous Data)
You can modify data such as volume and pan changes for automation in a selected region.
● For details on all of the parameters and values of the Change Continuous Data command, refer to “CHANGE
CONTINUOUS DATA popup“ (Screen Guide; p. 68).
❍ Parameters to specify
• Event
Specify the type of data that you want to edit.
• Number
Specify the control change number that you want to edit, if you specified Control Change as the Event.
• Note Range
Specify the range of note number that you want to edit, if you specified Poly Aftertouch as the Event.
With a setting of 100%, no change will occur. Use a setting of 101% or above to make the changes greater,
and a setting of 99% or below to make the changes smaller.
For example, a setting of 50% would halve the values and a setting of 200% would double the values. Negative
“-” settings will invert the upper and lower limit values.
• Bias
Specifies the amount by which the data will be increased or decreased.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Editing a song / pattern
• Magnify
Use this to increase or decrease the upper limit or lower limit of the selected values.
10
M-199
MV-8800_e.book 200 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
List of available editing commands
Saving a portion of performance data in the library
(Copy As MIDI Clip)
Here’s how you can “clip” the performance data of the specified region and save it in the library as MIDI clip
data.
● For details on all of the parameters and values of the Copy As MIDI Clip command, refer to “COPY AS MIDI
CLIP popup” (Screen Guide; p. 44).
● The number of clips you can save will depend on the size of the song / pattern and the size of the MIDI clips.
● If you use the VIEW FILTER popup (Screen Guide; p. 53) to restrict the types of event, only the specified type(s)
of events will be saved as a MIDI clip.
● MIDI clips saved in the library can be used in other songs / pattern. For details, refer to “PASTE MIDI CLIP
popup” (Screen Guide; p. 47).
❍ Parameters to specify
• Name
By default, the clip will have a name consisting of the track name and a two-digit number. You can change this
name as desired. To rename the clip, press [F1](Name) to open the EDIT MIDI CLIP NAME popup (Screen
Guide ;p. 3).
Saving a region of a song as a pattern (Copy As New Pattern)
Here’s how you can copy the specified region of the current song as a new pattern.
● For details on all of the parameters and values of the Copy As New Pattern command, refer to “COPY AS NEW
PATTERN popup” (Screen Guide; p. 105).
❍ Parameters to specify
• Name
This shows the name of the pattern selected by the cursor.
• No.
This shows the number of the registered pattern. You can register five hundred patterns, 001–500. Use the
VALUE dial to select the pattern number that you want to register.
● You can save a region of a pattern as an another pattern.
● If the length of the selected region exceeds 999 measures, it cannot be saved to a new pattern.
● If you select a pattern that’s not empty, “Overwrite Sure?” message will appear. If you press [F5](Yes), the newly
saved data will overwrite that pattern.
M-200
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 201 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Restricting the type of events that will be edited (View Filter)
If there is a large amount of performance data, numerous events will be displayed, possibly making it difficult
to edit. In such cases, you can use the View Filter to restrict the types of events that will be displayed, letting
you edit only the events that are displayed.
1. In either the SONG screen, PATTERN screen, or SEQUENCE EDIT screen, press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
2. Select “View Filter” and press [F5](Select).
The VIEW FILTER popup (Screen Guide; p. 53) will appear.
3. Either turn the VALUE dial or press [F3](On/Off) to add a check mark ✔ to the events you
want to view (and edit).
Events with a check mark (✔) will be displayed; events without a check mark will not be displayed.
Message and icon
Explanation
10
Note messages; MIDI messages that indicate a note.
Poly Aftertouch
Polyphonic Aftertouch messages; MIDI messages that apply aftertouch to individual
keys.
Control Change
Control Change messages; MIDI messages that apply various effects such as
modulation or expression.
Program Change
Program Change messages; MIDI messages that select sounds.
Channel Aftertouch
Channel Aftertouch messages; MIDI messages that apply aftertouch to an entire MIDI
channel.
Pitch Bend
Pitch Bend messages; MIDI messages that change the pitch.
Tune Request
This MIDI message causes an analog synthesizer to tune itself.
Mode Message
MIDI Mode Message that changes the mode
System Exclusive
System Exclusive messages; MIDI messages that contain settings specific to the
MV-8800 itself, such as sound settings.
Audio Event
Audio events (performance data of audio phrases, or audio data directly recorded) on
audio tracks.
They are displayed on the SONG screen, PATTERN screen and SEQUENCE EDIT
screen.
Editing a song / pattern
Note
Pressing [F1](All On) will add a check mark to all events, and pressing [F1](All Off) will remove the check mark
from all events.
● For details on all of the View Filter parameters and settings, refer to ”VIEW FILTER popup” (Screen Guide;
p. 53).
4. Press [EXIT].
The VIEW FILTER popup will close.
The icon shown in the lower right of the SONG screen, PATTERN screen, or SEQUENCE EDIT screen
indicates the View Filter status you specified.
Icon
Explanation
View Filter is off (events displayed)
View Filter is on (events not displayed)
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-201
MV-8800_e.book 202 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Note length (Step time) and the number of ticks
The MV-8800’s sequencer divides each quarter note into 480 “ticks.” The following table shows the number
of ticks in each note value.
Note
Number of ticks
Note
Number of ticks
(64th note)
30
(quarter note)
480
(32nd note triplet)
40
(half-note triplet)
640
(32nd note)
60
(half note)
960
(16th note triplet)
80
(whole note)
1920
(16th note)
120
(double whole note)
3840
(8th note triplet)
160
Phrase
The length of an Audio Phrase.
(8th note)
240
Pattern
The length of a Pattern.
(quarter note triplet)
320
● The length that a recorded note will actually continue sounding will be the number of ticks in the note value multiplied
by the Duration parameter. For example if the Duration parameter is “80%”, a quarter note will actually sound for a length
of 480 x 0.80 = 384 ticks.
● You can choose Phrase for the Step Time parameter only if you’re on the AUDIO PHRASE STEP REC screen.
You can choose Pattern for the Step Time parameter only if you’re on the PATTERN STEP REC screen.
● The parameter located at the right of the Step Time parameter lets you specify a dotted note.
Dot
none
one (.)
two (..)
M-202
The specified the proportion of the note
1 time (The length is same as the Step Time).
1.5 times (a dotted note).
1.75 times (a double dotted note)
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 203 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Copying a pattern
1. Access the PATTERN LIST screen as described in “Selecting a pattern” (p. 168).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the pattern you want to copy.
3. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
4. Select “Copy Pattern...” and press [F5](Select).
The COPY PATTERN popup (Screen Guide; p. 97) will appear.
5. Select the copy-destination number, and press [F5](Yes).
● You can’t specify the copy-source pattern number as the copy destination.
● You can audition the pattern after process to assign patterns to pads.
10
1. Access the PATTERN LIST screen as described in “Selecting a pattern” (p. 168).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
Editing a song / pattern
Initializing (Erasing) patterns
] to select the pattern you want to initialize.
3. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
4. Select “Initialize Pattern” and [F5](Select).
“Initialize Sure?” message will appear.
5. Press [F5](Yes).
● If you initialize the pattern that is selected in the PATTERN screen, the lowest-numbered pattern in the project
will be automatically selected.
● You cannot initialize all of the patterns. (The project will contain at least one pattern.)
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-203
MV-8800_e.book 204 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Saving a song (or pattern) in SMF format (Save As SMF)
Note regarding saving to SMF
Several limitations apply when you save a song in SMF format.
• The data is saved in SMF Format 1.
You cannot save data in SMF Format 0.
• Audio track data cannot be converted to SMF.
• MIDI channels assigned to the SMF-converted data are determined by the Output Assign parameter
and MIDI parameter for each track of the song.
MIDI channels are assigned as follows.
Output Assign
(MIDI)
Assigned MIDI channel
Off
Off
1
1
A-1, B-1, R-1
1
:
:
:
16
A-16, B-16, R-16
16
The Output Assign parameter value takes priority when assigning MIDI channels.
For example, if Output Assign is 2 and MIDI Output is A-5, channel 2 will be assigned. However, if Output
Assign is Off and MIDI Output is A-5, channel 5 will be assigned.
● If you want to save the data in SMF format with the Play Quantize settings of the MIDI tracks reflected in the
data, press [F2](Fix Qtz) to turn the Fix Quantize parameter On.
Saving a song as SMF (Standard MIDI file) data
Here’s how to save the current song as SMF(Standard MIDI file) format 1.
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8)will appear.
2. Press [F1](Song Menu).
The SONG MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 78) will appear.
3. With the cursor located in the lower row of icons, press [F2](SaveAsSMF). Alternatively,
you can select the SAVE AS SMF icon and press [ENTER].
The SAVE SONG AS SMF popup (Screen Guide; p. 88) will appear.
4. Use CURSOR [
][
][
][
] to select a folder you want to save.
The folder will be highlighted.
5. Press [F5](Save).
The EDIT FILE NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear.
6. Specify the name of file you want to save.
The file name will be the name you assigned plus an extension of “.MID”.
7. Press [F5](Execute).
The song will be saved as an SMF file on the hard disk.
M-204
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 205 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Saving a song (or pattern) in SMF format (Save As SMF)
Saving a pattern as SMF (Standard MIDI File) data
Here’s how to save the current pattern as SMF(Standard MIDI file) format 1.
1. Access the PATTERN LIST screen as described in “Selecting a pattern” (p. 168).
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the pattern to save as SMF.
3. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
4. Sselect “Save As SMF...” and press [F5] (Select).
The SAVE PATTERN AS SMF popup will appear.
fig.save-pattern-smf.eps
• [F2](Fix Qtz)
5. Use CURSOR [
][
][
][
] to select a folder you want to save.
The folder will be highlighted.
6. Press [F5](Save).
The EDIT FILE NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear.
10
Editing a song / pattern
If you want the saved SMF data to reflect the Play Quantize settings of each MIDI track in the pattern, press
[F2](Fix Qtz) to turn the Fix Quantize indication On. If this is On when you save the SMF, the rhythmic feel you
hear when you play the pattern on the MV-8800 will be saved in SMF format.
7. Specify the name of file you want to save.
The file name will be the name you assigned plus an extension of “.MID”.
8. Press [F5](Execute).
The pattern will be saved as an SMF file on the hard disk.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-205
MV-8800_e.book 206 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Loading a song from another project
You can load a song from another project into the current project. At this time, all data (e.g., patterns and
samples) needed for the song to play will be loaded together.
● If loaded song contains program change (switching of patch), the performance may not be with correct
instrument (sound).
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
2. Press [F1](Song Menu).
The SONG MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 78) will appear.
3. With the cursor located in the lower row of icons, press [F3] (LoadSong). Alternatively, you
can select the LOAD icon and press [ENTER].
The LOAD SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 89) will appear.
4. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the project that contains the song you want to load.
5. Press [F5] (Song List).
The SONG LIST popup (Screen Guide; p. 90) will appear. Songs contained in selected project will be
displayed as list.
6. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the song you want to load.
7. Press [F5] (Execute).
The selected song will be added to the current project. The song you loaded will become the current song.
M-206
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 207 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 11
Using the Mixer
Adjusting the volume balance of each part
Here’s how to adjust the volume of each audio track and instrument part. You can boost the volume for tracks
that you want to stand out, and reduce the volume of tracks that need to stay in the background.
1. Press [MIXER].
The MIXER screen will appear.
11
F-button
Screen displayed
[F1](Audio Track)
MIXER (AUDIO TRACK) screen (Screen Guide; p. 235)
[F2](Part 1-8)
MIXER (INSTRUMENT PART 1–8) screen (Screen Guide; p. 236)
[F3](Part 9-16)
MIXER (INSTRUMENT PART 9–16) screen (Screen Guide; p. 236)
[F4](AUX/Phrs/In)
MIXER (AUX/FX/AUDIO PHRASE/INPUT) screen (Screen Guide; p. 237)
2. Use CURSOR [
][
][
][
Using the Mixer
● You can press the function buttons to switch the mixer you’re adjusting.
] to move the cursor to the Level of the part you want to
adjust.
The part at which the cursor is located is called the “current part.” Now you can adjust the Level parameter of
that part.
● In addition to adjusting the volume, the Part Mixer screen also lets you adjust the pan and the amount of the
signal that is sent to the effects. For details on these parameters, refer to each MIXER screen.
● Use the top panel sliders 1–8 to adjust the Level.
3. Turn the VALUE dial or use [DEC] [INC] to adjust the value.
The value of the Level parameter will change, affecting the volume of that part. It will be easier to adjust the
balance effectively if you make adjustments while your song is playing back.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-207
MV-8800_e.book 208 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Adjusting the tone of an instruments or audio track
Each part of instruments and the mixer section of each audio track has a 3-band EQ (equalizer).
You can use the equalizer to adjust the tone.
1. Press [MIXER].
The MIXER screen will appear.
2. Press the function buttons to switch the mixer you want to adjust tones by equalizer.
F-button
Screen displays
[F1](Audio Track)
MIXER (AUDIO TRACK) screen (Screen Guide; p. 235)
[F2](Part 1–8)
MIXER (INSTRUMENT PART 1–8) screen (Screen Guide; p. 236)
[F3](Part 9–16)
MIXER (INSTRUMENT PART 9–16) screen (Screen Guide; p. 236)
● The mixer screen accessed by pressing [F4](AUX/Phrs/In) does not have an equalizer function.
3. Press [F4](➔EQ)
The screen will show the EQ screen for the mixer you select in step 2.
Mixer selected
Screen displayed
Audio Track
MIXER (AUDIO TRACK EQ) screen (Screen Guide; p. 238)
Part 1–8
MIXER(INSTRUMENTS PART 1-8 EQ) screen (Screen Guide; p. 239)
Part 9–16
MIXER(INSTRUMENTS PART 9-16 EQ) screen (Screen Guide; p. 239)
4. Use CURSOR [
][
you want to adjust.
][
][
] to move the cursor to the equalizer parameter on which
5. Use the VALUE dial or [INC] [DEC] to adjust.
The value of the selected parameter will change.
● Pressing [F5](➔EQ) will display the EQ screen, and pressing [F5](➔Level/Pan) will display the MIXER screen.
The [F5](➔EQ) and [F5](➔Level/Pan) functions will alternate each time you press the button.
● While the EQ screen is displayed, repeatedly pressing [MIXER] will cycle through the screens in the following
order:
MIXER (AUDIO TRACK) ➔ MIXER (INSTRUMENTS PART 1–8) ➔ MIXER (INSTRUMENTS PART 9–16)
➔ MIXER (AUDIO TRACK)
● For details on the equalizer parameters, refer to each MIXER EQ screen.
M-208
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 209 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 12
Using effects
The MV-8800 contains three effects processors: MFX (multi-effects), delay/chorus, and reverb.
Switching the effects on/off
Each of the MV-8800’s internal effects can be switched on or off. You can switch the effects off if you’re editing
a sound and want to hear it without effects, or if you want to use an external effect processor instead of the
built-in effects.
● For details on the MV-8800’s built-in effects, refer to “Preset Patches and Algorithm List” (Appendices; p. 14).
1. Press [EFFECTS].
The EFFECTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 229) will appear.
12
] [ ] to move the cursor to the effect you want to switch on/off. This
effect becomes the “current effect.”
Using effects
2. Use CURSOR [
The effect you select is enclosed in a frame and highlighted.
3. Press [F4](FX On/Off).
Each time you press this, the current effect will be switched on or off.
● The effect on/off settings are remembered for each song.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-209
MV-8800_e.book 210 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Selecting an effect
Each of the MV-8800’s three internal effect processors has its own effect library. You can switch effect settings
by selecting various effects from the effect library.
1. Press [EFFECTS].
The EFFECT screen will appear.
2. Move the cursor to the effect whose settings you want to change.
3. Press [F3](Library).
The screen that appears will depend on the current effect.
Current effect
Screen that appears
MFX
MFX LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide; p. 230)
Dly/Cho
DELAY/CHORUS LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide; p. 230)
Reverb
REVERB LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide p. 230)
4. Turn the VALUE dial or use [DEC] [INC] to select the effect you want to use.
● You can press [F4](Preview) to audition the selected effect. Indicates “Library Preview On.” To cancel
auditioning, press [F4](Preview) once again.
● For details on the number and type of effects in the effect library, refer to “Preset Patches and Algorithm List”
(Appendices; p. 14)
5. Press [F5](Use This).
The effect will switch to the one you selected.
M-210
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 211 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Setting the effect parameters
You can edit the current effect settings to create your own effect settings.
1. Press [EFFECTS].
The EFFECT screen will appear.
2. Move the cursor to the effect whose settings you want to change.
3. Press [F5](Edit).
The screen that appears will depend on the current effect.
Current effect
Screen that appears
MFX
MFX EDIT screen (Screen Guide p. 231)
Dly/Cho
DELAY/CHORUS EDIT screen (Screen Guide p. 231)
Reverb
REVERB EDIT screen (Screen Guide p. 231)
4. Use CURSOR [
] [ ] [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to the parameter you want to edit, and
use the VALUE dial or [DEC] [INC] to edit the value.
The effect setting will change.
● Editing separate blocks of an MFX
If you’ve selected MFX as the current effect, the algorithm is a combination of several
types of effects. You can edit each of these effects (effect blocks) separately.
1. Access the MFX EDIT screen as described in “Setting the effect parameters”
(p. 211).
2. Use [F1](Block▲)/[F2](Block▼) to select the effect block you want to edit.
The tabs at the left edge of the screen show the effect block highlighted.
12
] [ ] [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to a parameter, and turn
the VALUE dial or use [DEC] [INC] to edit the value.
Using effects
3. Use CURSOR [
The effect setting will change.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-211
MV-8800_e.book 212 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Storing the current effect settings in the library
After you’ve edited the effect parameters to create your own effect settings, you can store them in the library
and recall them later when needed.
1. Press [EFFECTS].
The EFFECT screen will appear.
2. Move the cursor to the effect that you want to store in the library.
3. Press [F3](Library).
The screen that appears will depend on the current effect.
Current effect
Screen that appears
MFX
MFX LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide; p. 230)
Dly/Cho
DELAY/CHORUS LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide; p. 230)
Reverb
REVERB LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide p. 230)
4. Turn the VALUE dial or use [DEC] [INC] to select the user area number in which you want to
store your settings.
The user area is the section of memory in which you can store your own settings. The user area consists of
the effect library numbers preceded by a “U” character.
● For details on the number and structure of the effect library, refer to “Preset Patches and Algorithm List”
(Appendices; p. 14).
● You can’t save settings in the preset area (effect library numbers preceded by a “P”).
5. Press [F1](Write Here).
A message of “Write current to U###. Are You Sure?” will appear. (## is a effect library number.)
6. Press [F5](Yes).
The current effect settings will be written into the effect library number you selected.
● Once you overwrite a library number, there’s no way to recover its previous contents. You may want to save the
user library to disk before you overwrite your own settings.
M-212
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 213 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Saving a current effect setting to the hard disk
Here’s how to save the current effect setting file to disk. An effect setting file saved in this way can be used by
a different project.
1. Press [EFFECTS].
The EFFECTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 229) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the effects that use the setting you want to save.
3. Press [F5](Edit).
The EFFECTS EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 231) will appear.
4. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
5. Depending on the current effect, select “Save MFX,” “Save Dly/Cho,” or “Save Reverb”;
then press [F5](Select).
The screen that appears will depend on the current effect.
Current effects
Screens displays
MFX
SAVE MFX popup (Screen Guide; p. 233)
Dly/Cho
SAVE DELAY/CHORUS popup (Screen Guide; p. 233)
Reverb
SAVE REVERB popup (Screen Guide; p. 233)
6. Specify the save destination (such as /USER) and press [F5] (Save).
The EDIT NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear.
7. Specify the name of file you want to save.
The file name will be the name you assigned plus an extension.
Current effects
Extension
MFX
.MVF
Dly/Cho
.MVC
Reverb
.MVR
12
Using effects
8. Press [F5](Execute).
The settings file of the currently selected effect will be saved on the hard disk.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-213
MV-8800_e.book 214 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using the C (Control) knobs to operate parameters
You can assign the C1–C3 knobs to the desired effect parameters, and use the knobs to control the parameter
values.
1. Press [EFFECTS].
The EFFECTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 229) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the effect you want to control.
3. Press [F5](Edit).
The EFFECTS EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 231) will appear.
4. Move the cursor to the parameter you want to control using a C knob.
5. Press [F3](Knob Assign).
The KNOB ASSIGN popup (Screen Guide; p. 234) will appear.
6. Press [F1](C1)–[F3](C3) to specify the knob that will control the parameter you selected in
step 4.
Now you can use the selected knob to control the value of the parameter.
M-214
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 215 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Changing the MFX routing
You can route the MFX to various buses (signal routes) within the MV-8800. Different routing will produce
different results.
1. Press [EFFECTS].
The EFFECTS screen (Screen Guide; p. 229) will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to move the cursor to MFX, making it the current effect.
MFX will be enclosed in a frame and highlighted.
3. Use the VALUE dial to change the setting of the Routing parameter.
This sets the MFX routing.
Value
Routing and result
Off
MFX will not be used.
Input
MFX will be routed to the input mixer. The effect will apply to the signal received from the input jack.
AUX1–4
MFX will be routed to AUX bus mixer 1–4 respectively. The internal AUX buses will be used, letting you
use MFX as a loop-type effect.
Master
MFX will be routed to the master out, and will process all of the sounds mixed together.
● If the Routing parameter is set to Input
The MFX will be routed to the input of the mixer. Since this setting allows you to apply an effect to the input
sound, such as the signal arriving via an analog input, it is useful when sampling or recording to an audio track.
● If the Routing parameter is set to AUX 1
The MFX will be routed to the AUX 1 of the mixer. With this setting, you can set the Output Assign parameter
of audio tracks or instruments to AUX 1, and apply the effect to their combined output.
● If the Routing parameter is set to Master
The MFX will be routed to the master out. Since this setting applies the effect to the mixed sound of all outputs,
it is appropriate when you want to use the MFX as a master effect.
12
Using effects
Applying an effect to the sound from an input
Here’s how to apply an effect to the input audio, such at that received via the analog inputs.
1. Press [EFFECTS].
The EFFECTS screen will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to move the cursor to MFX.
3. Set the Routing parameter to “Input.”
The effect will be applied to the input audio.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-215
MV-8800_e.book 216 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Changing the MFX routing
Applying MFX to an instrument or audio track
fig.11-10.j
AUX
MIX
Instruments/
Audio Phrase/
Audio Track
MFX
MASTER OUT
1. Press [EFFECTS].
The EFFECTS screen will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to move the cursor to MFX.
3. Set the Routing parameter to “AUX1.”
4. Press [MIXER].
The MIXER screen will appear.
5. Access the MIXER screen for the instrument or audio track to which you want to apply the
effect.
6. Set the Output parameter to “AUX1” for the part on which you want to use MFX.
The audio of the instrument or audio track will be sent to AUX bus 1, and the effect will be applied.
Applying an effect to the master out
fig.11-10.j
MIX
Input
Instruments/
Audio Phrase/
Audio Track
MFX
MASTER OUT
1. Press [EFFECTS].
The EFFECTS screen will appear.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to move the cursor to MFX.
3. Set the Routing parameter to “Master.”
The effect will be applied to master out.
M-216
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 217 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Analog Modeling Bass
Analog Modeling Bass is an algorithm that replicates the operation of an analog synthesizer.
If you control the parameters with the Velocity Pads or externally with MIDI messages, you can get analog
synthesizer sounds with the virtual VCO (Voltage Controlled Oscillator). Furthermore, with sections
corresponding to VCF (Voltage Controlled Filter) and VCA (Voltage Controlled Amplifier), you can also
process external sound input as is. Additionally, a ring modulator is included, and with the output from the
delay and chorus (or flanger), it can be used as a powerful multipurpose filter/effect device.
● Other than the delay and chorus/flanger, the effect portions of this algorithm cannot be turned off.
fig.10-34
SYNTH TRIG.
COMMON
SYNTH
LFO
LFO
CUTOFF
AMPLITUDE
Com
VIRTUAL
VCA
Level
L
R
NOTE No.
EXT IN
VCF
VIB/PWM
VCA
OSC1
VCO
OSC2
A,D,S,R
TRIG.
A,D,S,R
NOISE
NOISE
SELECT
RING
MOD
Dly
C/F
RING MOD
VIRTUAL VCO
VIRTUAL
+ RING MODULATOR
VCF
CHORUS/
FLANGER
DELAY
12
By selecting Analog Modeling Bass, you can use the MV-8800’s effect section as a monophonic synthesizer.
You can control note-on/off and pitch in several ways.
Using effects
● Explanation of each block, “25 Analog Modeling Bass” (Appendices; p. 54).
Playing from the Effect knobs
If you want to use the synthesizer to create a sound effect, rather than playing definite pitches in a scale, you
can use the effect knobs to easily make the synthesizer start or stop producing sound. For example, you can
assign the following parameters to the effect knobs.
C1:
Trigger In—Common block (Appendices; p. 54)
C2:
Note Number—Common block (Appendices; p. 54)
C3:
VCF Cutoff—VCF block (Appendices; p. 57)
VCF Reso—VCF block (Appendices; p. 57)
LFO Rate—LFO block (Appendices; p. 55)
LFO Depth—LFO block (Appendices; p. 55)
etc.
● Explanation of the Knob Assign, refer to “KNOB ASSIGN popup” (Screen Guide; p. 234).
The synthesizer will begin sounding when you turn C1 to the right, and will stop when you turn it to the left.
Turning C2 will change the pitch. If the Common parameter Portamento (Appendices; p. 54) is on, the pitch
will change smoothly.
While you listen to the song play or a sample loop, turn the knobs to control the sound effect as desired.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-217
MV-8800_e.book 218 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Analog Modeling Bass
Playing from a MIDI track/the velocity pads/an external MIDI device
● The velocity of the note-on message (the speed at which you play a key) will affect the sound as specified by
the VCF and VCA velocity sensitivity settings (Appendices; p. 58, p. 59).
1. Press [EFFECTS].
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select MFX.
3. Press [F3](Library).
The MFX LIBRARY popup (Screen Guide; p. 230) will appear.
4. Select “P025 (Analog Modeling Bass)” and press [F5](Use This).
5. Press [F5](Edit).
The MFX EDIT screen (Screen Guide; p. 231) will appear.
fig.mfx-1common.eps
6. Press [F1](Block▲) / [F2](Block▼) to select VCA.
7. Set the Initial Gain (Appendices; p. 58) to 0.
8. Select a MIDI track in the SONG screen or PATTERN screen.
9. Press [F2](Track Param).
The TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a MIDI track) (Screen Guide; p. 11) will appear.
10. Set Output Assign to “MFX.”
The Analog Modeling Bass will produce sound when you strike a pad or play a connected external MIDI
keyboard.
The Analog Modeling Bass uses the following MIDI messages.
• Note On
• Note Off
• Modulation (CC#01)
• Pitch Bend
• General Purpose Controller 1–8 (CC#16–18)
M-218
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 219 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 13
Automating mixing operations
(Automation)
Automating operations of Mixer Channel
The operations of the mixer parameter on the MIXER screens can be recorded on the MIDI track.
Mixer parameters that can be recorded and played back
Mixer operation data is recorded on a MIDI track as MIDI Control Change data. The following table shows the
data that can be recorded and played back, and the MIDI Control Change numbers used for each type of data.
Parameters
MIDI Control Change Number
Parameters
MIDI Control Change Number
Level
7 (Volume)
Reverb Send
91 (Reverb: Effect 1 Depth)
Pan
10 (Pan)
DlyCho Send
93 (Chorus: Effect 3 Depth)
● You can’t record mixer operations for multiple Mixer Channels at the same time.
● You can’t record operations of the Output parameter, Mute parameter, and EQ parameters on the MIXER
screens.
Recording mixer operations for a Mixer Channel
1. Access the SONG screen or the PATTERN screen.
13
3. Use CURSOR [
] [ ] to select the MIDI track on which you want to record the Mixer
Channel operations (movements).
● You can use the SEQUENCE EDIT screen or the EVENT LIST screen to edit a MIDI track on which you
recorded mixer operations.
4. Press [F2](Track Param).
The TRACK PARAMETER popup (Screen Guide; p. 11) for the MIDI track will appear.
5. Use the Output Assign parameter to select the Mixer Channel for which you want to
record/playback mixer operations.
The following table shows the Mixer Channel that can be recorded and played back.
Mixer Channel
Value
Mixer Channel
Value
AUX1
Mixer AUX1
Reverb
Mixer Reverb
AUX2
Mixer AUX2
Audio Phrase
Mixer A.Phrs
AUX3
Mixer AUX3
Input
Mixer Input
AUX4
Mixer AUX4
Audio track 1-8
Delay/Chorus
Mixer DlyCho
AMix *: (Audio track name)
“*” shows Track Number.
Automating mixing operations (Automation)
2. Move the current time to the location at which you want to start recording mixer operations.
Select the “AMix” for which you want to record mixer
operation of Audio track.
● When you delete an Audio track, the Output Assign parameter will be switched Off for the MIDI track on which
you recorded the mixer automation operations for that track.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-219
MV-8800_e.book 220 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Automating operations of Mixer Channel
6. Press [MIXER] and select the MIXER screen for which you want to record the Mixer
Channel.
The MIXER (AUDIO TRACK) screen (Screen Guide; p. 235) will appear.
7. Press [REC ( )].
The REC indicator will blink, and the RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup will appear. Make recording
settings as necessary.
8. Press [PLAY ( )].
The REC indicator and PLAY indicator will light, and the RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup will close.
Use the sliders or VALUE dial to adjust the mixer parameter values for the Mixer Channel you selected in step
5. The value changes will be recorded on the MIDI track.
9. Press [STOP ( )] to stop recording.
The REC indicator and PLAY indicator will go dark, and recording will stop.
Playback mixer operations
● By changing the Output Assign parameter setting for the MIDI track on which you recorded the mixer operations
to other Mixer Channel, you can playback those same mixer operations on a different Mixer Channel.
1. Move the current time to the location at which the mixer operations were recorded.
2. Press [PLAY ( )].
The PLAY indicator will light. The Mixer parameters will change according to the data recorded on the MIDI
track.
3. Press [STOP ( )] to stop playback.
The PLAY indicator will go dark, and playback will stop.
M-220
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 221 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Automating mute operations for each track
Mute settings for each track can be recorded on the Mute Control Track and played-back.
Recording mute operations
1. Hold down [SHIFT], and press [PAD BANKS].
The TRACK MUTE screen (Screen Guide; p. 75) will appear.
2. Move the current time to the location at which you want to start recording mute operations.
3. Press [REC ( )].
The REC indicator will blink, and the RECORDING PARAMETER (MUTE CONTROL) popup (Screen Guide;
p. 21) will appear. Make recording settings as necessary.
• Count In
Specifies how recording will begin.
Value
Explanation
Off
Recording will begin the moment you press [PLAY (
1 Meas
When you press [PLAY ( )], a count-in will sound from one measure earlier than the
record-start location, and recording will begin at the record-start location.
2 Meas
When you press [PLAY ( )], a count-in will sound from two measures earlier than the
record-start location, and recording will begin at the record-start location.
Wait Note
Recording will begin the moment you press [PLAY (
)].
Recording will begin (punch-in) and end (punch-out) automatically at the time locations you specify
beforehand.
Value
In
0001-01-000 – 9999-**-***
Out
0001-01-000 – 9999-**-***
• Metronome Mode
Specifies when the metronome signal will be output.
Value
Explanation
Off
The metronome will not sound.
Rec Only
The metronome will sound only during recording.
Play&Rec
The metronome will sound during playback and recording.
Always
The metronome will always sound.
Automating mixing operations (Automation)
• Auto Punch
Parameter
13
)].
• Input Quantize
You can record into the sequencer while applying quantization.
Value:
Off,
(60),
(80),
(120),
(160),
(240),
(320),
(480)
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-221
MV-8800_e.book 222 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Automating mute operations for each track
4. Press [PLAY ( )].
The REC and PLAY indicators will light, and the RECORDING PARAMETER (MUTE CONTROL) popup will
close. Strike the velocity pads to perform track mute operations. Mute operations will be recorded on the Mute
Control Track.
5. Press [STOP ( )] to stop recording.
The REC and PLAY indicators will go dark, and recording will stop.
● Recording will end automatically if you access any screen other than the TRACK MUTE screen (for example
by pressing [EXIT]) while recording.
Playback mute operations
1. Access the SONG screen or the PATTERN screen.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the track on which you want to playback the mute operations.
3. Press [F2](Track Param).
The TRACK PARAMETER popup will appear.
4. Use the Mute Control parameter to specify whether mute operations are to be played-back or not.
• Mute Control
Tracks will be muted/unmuted according to the track mute data recorded on the Mute Control Track.
Value
Explanation
Off
The recorded mute data will be disabled. Mute operations will not be played back.
On
The recorded mute data will be enabled.
On
(Default=Off)
The recorded mute data will be enabled. With this setting, mute will automatically be disabled
when you move the time location to the beginning of the track.
On
(Default=On)
The recorded mute data will be enabled. With this setting, mute will automatically be applied
when you move the time location to the beginning of the track.
5. Press [F5](Close).
The TRACK PARAMETER popup will close. If you want to enable/disable mute operations for other tracks,
repeat steps 2–5.
6. Hold down [SHIFT], and press [PAD BANKS].
7. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
8. Select “Track Mute Setup” and press [F5](Select).
The TRACK MUTE SETUP popup will appear.
M-222
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 223 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Automating mute operations for each track
9. Set the Mute Control Track parameter to On.
● The on/off status of the Mute Control Track parameter can be set for each Song and each Pattern.
● The on/off status of the Mute Control Track parameter for a Song can also be set from the SONG PARAMETER
screen.
● The on/off status of the Mute Control Track parameter for a Pattern can also be set from the PATTERN
PARAMETER screen.
10. Press [EXIT].
The TRACK MUTE SETUP popup will close.
11. Move the current time to the location at which the mute operations were recorded.
12. Press [PLAY ( )].
The PLAY indicator will light. The mute settings of each track will change according to the mute data recorded
on the Mute Control Track.
13. Press [STOP ( )] to stop playback.
The PLAY indicator will go dark, and playback will stop.
Editing the recorded mute data
In the MUTE CONTROL TRACK screen, you can edit the mute data that is recorded on the Mute Control
Track. You can adjust the timing (measure-beat-tick) of the recorded mute data, or change the mute on/off
status.
1. Hold down [SHIFT], and press [PAD BAKS].
The TRACK MUTE screen will appear.
2. Press [MENU].
13
The MENU popup will appear.
Automating mixing operations (Automation)
3. Select “Mute Control Track” and press [F5](Select).
The MUTE CONTROL TRACK screen (Screen Guide; p. 71) will appear.
F-button
Explanation.
[F1](Create)
Adds a new Mute data to the current location.
[F2](Erase)
Erases the Mute data at the cursor location. The erased data will be held in the temporary
memory.
[F3](Copy)
Copies the Mute data at the cursor location into the temporary memory.
[F4](Paste)
The PASTE EVENT popup will appear. Adds the Mute data held in the temporary memory to
the specified time.
[F5](Track Sel)
The TRACK SELECT popup (Screen Guide; p. 72) will appear.
● You can access the MUTE CONTROL TRACK screen from the SONG (or PATTERN) screen. To access this
screen, press [MENU], select “Mute Control Track”, then press [F5](Select).
4. Use CURSOR [
][
] or VALUE dial to select the mute data which you want to edit.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-223
MV-8800_e.book 224 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Automating mute operations for each track
5. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select the parameter which you want to change.
6. Use VALUE dial or [DEC] [INC] to change the value.
● To specify the value of a parameter, you can use the VALUE dial or [DEC] [INC], or use the numeric keys to
input the value directly. After using the numeric keys to input a value, press [ENTER] to finalize the input.
Viewing the mute data of only a specific track
You can limit the mute data shown on the MUTE CONTROL TRACK screen so that you see only the single
track you’re interested in.
1. Hold down [SHIFT], and press [PAD BANKS].
The TRACK MUTE screen will appear.
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select “Mute Control Track” and press [F5](Select).
The MUTE CONTROL TRACK screen will appear.
4. Press [F5](Track Sel).
The TRACK SELECT popup will appear.
5. Specify the track number you want to view.
• Mode
Value
Explanation
All
The mute data of the all tracks will be shown.
One Track
Mute data of the single track you specify will be shown. Use the parameter below to select the track you
want to view.
6. Press [EXIT].
The TRACK SELECT popup will close.
M-224
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 225 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Automating operations for each C (Control) knob
The operations of the C1–C3 knobs assigned to MFX (multi-effects) parameters can be recorded on a MIDI track.
Recording C (Control) knob operations
1. Assign the C (Control) knobs to the effect parameters you want to control, as described in
“KNOB ASSIGN popup” (Screen Guide; p. 234).
2. Access the SONG screen or the PATTERN screen.
3. Use CURSOR [
] [ ] to select the MIDI track on which you want to record the C knob
operations (movements).
4. Press [F2](Track Param).
The TRACK PARAMETER popup will appear.
5. Set the Output Assign parameter to MFX.
6. Move the current time to the location at which you want to start recording the C knob
operations.
7. Press [REC ( )].
8. Press [PLAY ( )].
The REC and PLAY indicators will light, and the RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup will close. Use the
C1–C3 knob to change effect parameters. Operations of the C1–C3 knobs will be recorded.
9. Press [STOP ( )] to stop recording.
The REC and PLAY indicators will go dark, and recording will stop.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
13
Automating mixing operations (Automation)
[REC ( )] (red) indicator will blink, and The RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup will appear. Make
recording settings as necessary.
M-225
MV-8800_e.book 226 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Automating operations for each C (Control) knob
Playback C (Control) knob operations to control effect parameters
● Automation only playback the operations of the C1–C3 knobs. It does not directly record the values of the effect
parameters themselves. This means that if different effect parameters are assigned to the C1–C3 knobs when
you play back the automation, the played back result will be different.
1. Move the current time to the location at which the C knob operations were recorded.
2. Press [PLAY ( )].
The PLAY indicator will light. The C1–C3 knob operation data recorded on the MIDI track will control the effect
parameters.
3. Press [STOP ( )] to stop playback.
The PLAY indicator will go dark, and playback will stop.
● About the data recorded on the MIDI track
Data for the C-knob operations is recorded on the current MIDI track as MIDI Control Changes. The following
table shows the recorded C-knob data and the MIDI Control Change numbers that are used.
M-226
Knob
MIDI Control Change Number
C1
16 (General 1)
C2
17 (General 2)
C3
18 (General 3)
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 227 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 14
Creating an audio CD
The work flow of creating an audio CD
This chapter takes you through the process of creating an audio CD from a song.
First, you will adjust the volume balance and panning of each instrument part and audio track, and record the
result as stereo data. This process is called “mixdown.”
The data created by the mixdown is saved as a WAV file in the MIXDOWNTR folder of the hard disk.
Next, you will adjust the WAV file created by the mixdown so that it will have the ideal volume and loudness
for an audio CD. This process is called “mastering.”
On the MV-8800, you can use the “mastering tool kit” to smooth out inconsistencies in the volume anywhere
in the song and adjust the balance of the low-frequency range. This makes it easy to create a
powerful-sounding audio CD.
The data created by mastering is saved as a WAV file in the MASTERTR folder of the hard disk.
● If desired, you can create an audio CD without mastering. Perform this step as you wish.
Finally, you will create an audio CD from the WAV files created by the mixdown/mastering process.
14
Creating an audio CD
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-227
MV-8800_e.book 228 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Combining a song / pattern into two tracks (Mixdown)
To perform a mixdown, you’ll switch to Mixdown mode and record the mixdown on the hard disk.
1. Press [MASTERING].
The MIXDOWN / MASTERING MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 196) will appear.
2. Press [F1](Mixdown) or use CURSOR [
][
] to select the MIXDOWN MODE icon then
press [ENTER].
If Mixdown mode is off, the display will ask “Enter Mixdown Mode. Are you sure?”
F-button
Action
[F1](No)
Cancels the procedure, and returns to the MIXDOWN / MASTERING MENU screen.
[F5](Yes)
Turns Mixdown mode on. You will go to the SONG screen, which will indicate “** Mixdown Mode **.”
Continue to step 3.
● If Mixdown mode is on, the display will ask “Exit Mixdown Mode. Are you sure?” If you then press [F5](Yes),
Mixdown mode will switch from on to off.
3. Move the current time to the location at which you want to start mixdown.
4. Turn the MASTER knob to MAX.
If you mix down without setting the MASTER knob to MAX, the volume will be lower. You should leave this
knob at MAX unless you are creating a fade-in or fade-out.
5. Press [REC ( )].
The EDIT MIXDOWN FILE NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear.
6. Specify a filename.
A default filename is assigned automatically. You can change this if desired.
● If you press [EXIT] in step 6, the EDIT MIXDOWN FILE NAME popup will close without entering standby mode.
7. Press [F5](OK).
The REC indicator (red) will blink, and the MV-8800 will be in mixdown-standby.
● If you specified mixdown filename is onto a MIXDOWNTR folder that already contains setting, “That name
already exists. Overwrite?” message will appear.
If you press [F1](No), you can edit filename again. If you press [F5](Yes), the previous data will be overwritten.
8. Press [PLAY ( )].
Mixdown will begin. REC indicator (red) and PLAY indicator (green) will lit.
● If you operate the mixer or effects during mixdown, your changes will be reflected in the mixdown data.
● During the mixdown, sounds received at the analog inputs, will also be recorded. If the MV-8800’s sequencer
is playing an external MIDI sound module, you can connect the audio output of your MIDI sound module to the
MV-8800’s inputs so that the sound from your MIDI sound module will be recorded as part of the mixdown.
M-228
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 229 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Combining a song / pattern into two tracks (Mixdown)
9. To stop the mixdown, press [STOP ( )].
Mixdown will end, and the mixdown file will be saved in the MIXDOWNTR folder (REC and PLAY indicator will
be dark).
“Mixdown finished. Go to Mastering?” message will appear.
F-button
Action
[F1](No)
The message will close. (You will not exit Mixdown mode.)
[F3](Exit Mixdown)
The Mixdown Mode will turn off.
[F5](Yes)
You will go to the MASTERING screen.
Select this if you want to immediately master the WAV file created by the mixdown.
14
Creating an audio CD
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-229
MV-8800_e.book 230 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Achieving the ideal volume and loudness for an audio CD (Mastering)
Here’s how you can apply a final mastering effect (the Mastering Tool Kit) to your mixdown, in order to produce
a finished song. The Mastering Tool Kit is an effect that separately processes the high, mid, and low-frequency
regions to make the volume more consistent. This will make the entire song sound louder and more “finished,”
so that it can be made into a CD at an optimal volume level.
● If desired, you can create an audio CD without mastering. Perform this step as you wish.
● Mastering can be performed only for 44.1 kHz/16-bit stereo files.
1. Press [MASTERING].
The MIXDOWN / MASTERING MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 196) will appear.
2. Press[F2](Mastering) or use CURSOR [
][
] to select the MASTERING icon then press
[ENTER].
The SELECT MASTERING SOURCE popup / SELECT AUDIO FILE popup (Screen Guide; p. 198) will
appear.
● In the SELECT MASTERING SOURCE popup, you can press [F1](Listen) to audition the file at the cursor
location.
3. Move the cursor to the mixdown file (or other file) that you want to master, and press
[F5](Execute).
The MASTERING screen (Screen Guide; p. 199) will appear.
The MASTERING screen shows the major parameters of the mastering tool kit.
Press [PLAY ( )] to play back the WAV file while you adjust the parameters. For details on the parameters,
refer to “MASTERING screen” (Screen Guide; p. 199).
● In the MASTERING screen, you can press [F2](Library) to access the MASTERING TOOL KIT LIBRARY
popup. Here you can select or register your favorite settings.
4. Turn the MASTER knob to MAX.
● If you mastering without setting the MASTER knob to MAX, the volume will be lower. You should leave this knob
at MAX unless you are creating a fade-in or fade-out.
M-230
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 231 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Achieving the ideal volume and loudness for an audio CD (Mastering)
5. Press [REC ( )].
The EDIT MASTERING FILE NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear.
6. Specify a filename.
A default filename is assigned automatically. You can change this if desired.
7. Press [F5](OK).
The REC indicator (red) will blink, and the MV-8800 will be in mastering-standby.
● If you press [EXIT] in step 9, the EDIT MIXDOWN FILE NAME popup window will close without entering standby
mode.
● If you specified mixdown filename is onto a MIXDOWNTR folder that already contains setting, “That name
already exists. Overwrite?” message will appear.
If you press [F1](No), you can edit filename again. If you press [F5](Yes), the previous data will be overwritten.
8. Press [PLAY ( )]
Mastering will begin you selected file in step 3. REC indicator (red) and PLAY indicator (green) will lit.
9. To stop the mastering, press [STOP ( )].
Mastering will end, and the mastering file will be saved in the MASTERTR folder (REC and PLAY indicator will
be dark).
“Mastering finished. Go to CD Burning?” message will appear.
F-button
Action
[F1](No)
The message will close.
[F5](Yes)
You will go to the CUE SHEET screen (Screen Guide; p. 206).
Select this if you want to immediately create an audio CD from the WAV file created by
mastering.
14
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Creating an audio CD
● If playing reaches to the end of the selected file for mastering, mastering will stop automatically.
● If a blank, writable CD-R/RW disc is not inserted in the drive when you press [F5](Yes) in step 9, a message of
“Insert a blank disc.” will appear. Insert a blank CD-R/RW disc as described in “Inserting a disc” (p. 31).
M-231
MV-8800_e.book 232 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Writing the mastered data to CD
Here’s how to create an audio CD from the WAV file(s) created by mixdown and mastering.
● Before you create an audio CD
Carefully read the sections “Copyright” and “About the license agreement” on the inside back cover
of the owner’s manual. You must accept these terms before using the MV-8800 to create audio CDs.
1. Insert a blank CD-R/RW disc as described in Inserting a disc (p. 31).
● Make sure that the disc is firmly seated in the CD-R/RW drive tray (p. 31). If the disc is not correctly in position,
it may catch inside the drive and may be impossible to remove.
● The MV-8800 is able to write CD-RW discs. However, CD-RW discs cannot be played in conventional audio CD
players. You will need to use the MV-8800’s CD Player function (p. 234) to play such discs. Also, even if you
write the audio data to a CD-R disc, there are occasional cases in which some conventional CD players may
be unable to play the disc.
2. Press [MASTERING].
The MIXDOWN / MASTERING MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 196) will appear.
3. Press [F3](Create CD). Alternatively, select the CREATE AUDIO CD icon and press
[ENTER].
The CUE SHEET screen (Screen Guide; p. 206) will appear.
● “cue sheet” (Appendices; p. 12)
● If a blank, writable CD-R/RW disc is not inserted in the drive when you press [F3](Create CD) in step 3, a
message of “Insert blank CD-R/RW disc.” will appear. Insert a blank CD-R/RW disc as described in “Inserting
a disc” (p. 31).
4. Press [F1](Insert).
The SELECT AUDIO FILE popup (Screen Guide; p. 198) will appear.
5. In the list, move the cursor to the file that you want to write to the CD-R/RW disc, and press
[F5](Execute).
The selected file will be added to the cue sheet. If you want to write additional files, repeat steps 4–5.
6. If you want to switch the order of songs in the cue sheet, use [F3](Move ▲)/[F4](Move ▼).
This will move the position of the file at which the cursor is located.
● If you change your mind and decide to remove a song from the cue list, move the cursor in step 4 to the song
you want to remove, and press [F2](Delete).
M-232
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 233 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Writing the mastered data to CD
7. Adjust the length of the silence between songs.
Press [MENU], select “Gap Time,” and press [F5](Select). The GAP TIME popup (Screen Guide; p. 207) will
appear.
Set the GAP TIME parameter to the length of the silence you want to insert. (The initial value is 2.00 seconds.)
The specified amount of silence will be inserted in front of the track
F-button
Explanation
[F4](SetAll)
Changes the gap time of all tracks.
[F5](Set)
Changes the gap time of the track at which the cursor is located.
● The GAP TIME parameter you specify here is also called the “pre gap”
● If you’re making a CD of a live performance or similar source, you can set the GAP TIME parameter of each
track to 0 so that the tracks will be connected.
8. When you’re finished making settings in the cue sheet, press [F5](Write CD).
The WRITE CD popup will appear.
9. Press [F5](Yes).
Writing will begin. When writing is completed, the CD-R/RW drive tray will open with the message “Completed.
Make another?”. Remove the disc.
If you want to create another audio CD with the same content, insert a blank CD-R/RW disc and press
[F5](Yes). (An audio CD of the same content will be created.)
Your original audio CD is finished!
● The speed at which the data is written to the CD will be selected automatically, according to the optimal speed
supported by the media you’re using.
● The MV-8800’s CD writing method is fixed at “Disc At Once,” meaning that you will be able to use this disc as
a pressing master for commercial mass production. When the Disc At Once method is used, no further data can
be written to the disc afterward, even if there is space (recording time) remaining on the disc.
14
Creating an audio CD
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-233
MV-8800_e.book 234 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Playing an audio CD
Now let’s use the MV-8800’s CD Player function to hear the audio CD you just created.
1. Insert the audio CD into the CD-R/RW drive as described in Inserting a disc (p. 31).
● Make sure that the disc is firmly seated in the CD-R/RW drive tray. If the disc is not correctly in position, it may
catch inside the drive and may be impossible to remove.
● We cannot guarantee that playback will occur correctly with “copy-protected CDs,” which do not comply with
the audio CD specification. If you want to use the MV-8800’s CD Player function to play back an audio CD,
carefully check the package of the audio CD.
2. Press [DISK/USB].
The DISK/USB MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 188) will appear.
3. Press [F4](CD Player). Alternatively, select the CD PLAYER icon and press [ETNER].
The CD PLAYER screen (Screen Guide; p. 195) will appear.
● You can use the CD Player function to play commercial audio CDs or audio CDs written to a CD-RW disc.
4. Use the following buttons to control the CD.
Select the track
Move between tracks
Previous track
Next track
Fast-forward
Rewind
Start CD playback
Stop CD playback
Return to the beginning of the CD
● Use the MASTER knob to adjust the overall volume.
● Pressing [F5](Eject) will open the CD-R/RW drive tray.
● You can press [F2](Reset Peak) to reset the peak indicator of the level meter.
● You can press [F1](Display) to switch the time display format. The screen indicates the displayed format as well
as the time. The default setting is “Track Time.”
M-234
Display format
Screen display
Track Time
Displays the current time within the track that is playing.
Total Time
Displays the total time from the beginning of the CD to the current time location.
Track Remain
Displays the time remaining until the end of the currently-playing track.
Total Remain
Displays the time remaining until the end of the CD.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 235 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 15
Project and disk management
Managing projects
On the MV-8800, all the data needed to create a song—songs, patterns, library data, samples, etc.—is saved
as a “project.” For more about projects, refer to “An overview of the MV-8800” (p. 51)
Loading a project
Here’s how to load a project that you previously saved on the hard disk. The sample data, song data, and
libraries being used by the current project will all be replaced by the data of the project you load.
● While the project is being loaded, the DISK indicator (red) will light. Never strike the pads or otherwise
subject the MV-8800 to vibration during this time. Doing so will cause malfunctions.
● The amount of time required to load a project will be proportionate to the size of the project.
● You can’t load more than one project at a time.
1. Press [PROJECT].
The PROJECT MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 162) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F3](Load). Alternatively, select the
LOAD PROJ icon and press [ENTER].
The LOAD PROJECT screen (Screen Guide; p. 164) will appear. The projects saved on the hard disk are listed
in the display.
15
Project and disk management
3. Move the cursor to the project that you want to load, and press [F5](Execute).
The display will ask “Save Current Project before loading Project?”
F-button
Action
[F1](No)
The selected project will be loaded without saving the current project. After the project is loaded, the
SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
[F5](Yes)
The current project will be saved, and then the selected project will be loaded. After the project is loaded,
the SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
● If the display indicates “Selected Project is too large.”
The project you attempted to load requires more memory than is currently installed in the MV-8800. There is
not enough memory to load the project. This can happen if the amount of memory when the project was
created differs from the currently-installed amount of memory. Replace the current memory with memory equal
to or greater than the amount that was installed when you created the project you’re attempting to load.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-235
MV-8800_e.book 236 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Managing projects
Naming a project
Here’s how you can assign a name to your project for easier management.
● Changes you make to the project name apply to the current project.
1. Press [PROJECT].
The PROJECT MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 162) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F1](Name). Alternatively, select
the RENAME PROJ icon and press [ENTER].
The EDIT PROJECT NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear. Enter the desired name.
● You can assign a name of up to twelve characters.
3. When you’ve finished entering the name, press [F5](OK).
Protecting a project
Here’s how you can protect a project so that it cannot be accidentally deleted or overwritten.
1. Press [PROJECT].
The PROJECT MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 162) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F2](Protect). Alternatively, select
the SET PROJ PROTECTION icon and press [ENTER].
The SET PROJECT PROTECTION screen (Screen Guide; p. 163) will appear. The display will list the projects
saved on the hard disk.
3. Move the cursor to the project that you want to protect, and press [F4](Protect On).
The project will be protected. You can press [F5](Protect Off) to turn off the protect setting.
M-236
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 237 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Managing projects
Deleting a project
Here’s how a project that is no longer necessary can be deleted from the hard disk.
● There is no way to recover data that has been deleted. (Unless, of course, you have previously made a
backup of that data.) Roland Corporation can accept no responsibility for any loss of data or any
damages you incur as a result of such loss.
1. Press [PROJECT].
The PROJECT MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 162) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the lower row of icons, press [F2](Delete). Alternatively, select
the DELETE PROJ icon and press [ENTER].
The DELETE PROJECT screen (Screen Guide; p. 168) will appear.
3. Move the cursor to the project that you want to delete and press [F5](Execute).
A message of “Delete Project. Are you sure?” will appear.
F-button
Action
[F1](No)
Cancels the Delete operation.
[F5](Yes)
Deletes the project selected by the cursor.
● You cannot delete the current project. A message “Can’t delete current Project.” will appear.
15
Project and disk management
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-237
MV-8800_e.book 238 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Managing projects
Saving a project
Here’s how to save the current project to the hard disk.
● While the project is being saved, the DISK indicator (red) will light. Never strike the pads or otherwise
subject the MV-8800 to vibration during this time. Doing so will cause malfunctions.
● The length of time required to save a project is proportionate to the size of the project.
● You can also save the current project by pressing [SHIFT] + [SHUTDOWN].
1. Press [PROJECT].
The PROJECT MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 162) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F4](Save). Alternatively, select the
SAVE PROJ icon and press [ENTER].
A message of “Save current project?” will appear.
F-button
Action
[F1](No)
Cancels the Save operation.
[F5](Yes)
Saves the current project.
If the current project is protected, you’ll be presented with the message “Current Project is protected. Save as
new Project?” when you press [F5](Yes) in step 2.
If you press [F5](Yes), the SAVE AS NEW PROJECT popup (Screen Guide; p. 165) will appear, allowing you
to save the current project under a different name.
Saving a project with a different name
Here’s how you can save the current project to disk under a different name. This is convenient when you want
to create several different arrangements of a project for comparison.
● While the project is being saved, the DISK indicator (red) will light. Never strike the pads or otherwise
subject the MV-8800 to vibration during this time. Doing so will cause malfunctions.
● The length of time required to save a project is proportionate to the size of the project.
1. Press [PROJECT].
The PROJECT MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 162) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F5](Save As). Alternatively, you
can directly select the SAVE AS NEW PROJ icon and press [ENTER].
The SAVE AS NEW PROJECT popup (Screen Guide; p. 165) will appear.
Input a name for the new project you want to create.
3. When you have finished inputting a name, press [F5](OK).
The current project will be saved on the hard disk with the new project name you’ve specified.
M-238
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 239 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Managing projects
Creating a new project
1. Press [PROJECT].
The PROJECT MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 162) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the lower row of icons, press [F1](Create). Alternatively, you can
directly select the CREATE NEW PROJ icon and press [ENTER].
The CREATE NEW PROJECT screen (Screen Guide; p. 166) will appear.
● For details on the parameters, refer to “CREATE NEW PROJECT screen” (Screen Guide; p. 166).
3. Set the Copy From Source Project parameters.
This lets you copy samples or parameter settings from a desired project to the new project. Use [F4] (Select
Proj) to select the project that contains the samples or parameters you want to copy, and check (✔) the items
that you want to copy.
● If you don’t want to copy any data from another project, clear the check boxes for all items.
4. When you’ve finished making settings, press [F5](Execute).
A new project will be created, and will become the current project.
● If the display asks “Save Current Project before creating new project?”
15
Your changes will be lost unless you save the current project before creating the new project.
Explanation
To discard your changes and create the new project.
To save current project before creating new project.
Cancels the creating the new project operation.
● If you don’t save the current project at the “Save Current Project before creating new project?” prompt,
there is no way for you to recover that data (unless you have previously made a backup of it). Roland
accepts no responsibility for the recovery of lost data, nor for any damages that may result from such
loss.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Project and disk management
Button
[F1](No)
[F5](Yes)
[EXIT]
M-239
MV-8800_e.book 240 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Managing projects
Deleting unused portions of a sample
When you execute this operation, samples that are completely unused in the current project will be deleted.
This will increase the free space available in memory.
● There is no way to recover data that has been deleted. (Unless, of course, you have previously made a
backup of that data.) Roland Corporation can accept no responsibility for any loss of data or any
damages you incur as a result of such loss.
● Depending on the project, the Optimize operation may require a certain length of time.
1. Press [PROJECT].
The PROJECT MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 162) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the lower row of icons, press [F3](SmplMgr). Alternatively, you
can directly select the SAMPLE MAMAGER icon and press [ENTER].
The SAMPLE MANAGER screen (Screen Guide; p. 169) will appear.
3. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
4. Select “Optimize” and press [F5](Select).
A message of “Optimize Project.” will appear.
F-button
Action
[F1](No)
Cancels the Optimize operation.
[F5](Yes)
Deletes the unused sample data.
Deletion of Samples Through Optimization
When you use the Optimize procedure, all samples not being used in any way by any song/pattern within the current
project are automatically sought out and deleted in bulk, thus providing an immediate reduction in the amount of
memory used.
However, since you can’t select which samples are to be deleted, samples not assigned to any material are deleted
unconditionally.
M-240
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 241 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Managing projects
Backing up a project to a CD-R/RW disc
Here’s how to save your project to a CD-R/RW disc.This lets you preserve important data, or use a project on
a different MV-8800.
● When backing-up, you must use one CD-R/RW disc for each project. You cannot back up more than one project
at a time.
1. Insert a blank CD-R/RW disc as described in “Inserting a disc” (p. 31).
2. Press [PROJECT].
The PROJECT MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 162) will appear.
3. With the cursor located in the lower row of icons, press [F4](Backup). Alternatively, select
the BACKUP TO CD icon and press [ENTER].
The BACKUP PROJECT TO CD screen (Screen Guide; p. 170) will appear.
4. Move the cursor to the project that you want to backup, and press [F5](Execute).
Starts backup to CD-R/RW disc. When the project has been backed up, the CD-R/RW disc will be ejected.
● If the message “Insert blank CD-R/RW” appears, no disc is inserted in the CD-R/RW drive. Place a writable
blank CD-R/RW disc in the tray and close the tray, then press [F5](Execute).
● If you inserted a non-blank CD-RW, the message “Erase CD-RW” will appear. If you want to erase the contents
of the CD-RW disc and then backup the project, press one of the following.
[F3] (Yes(Quick)) ... Quick erase, and then back up, [F5] (Yes(Full))... Full erase, and then back up
Restoring a project
Here’s how a project that was backed-up to a CD-R/RW can be restored to the hard disk.
15
2. Press [PROJECT].
The PROJECT MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 162) will appear.
3. With the cursor located in the lower row of icons, press [F5](Recover). Alternatively, select
the RECOVER FROM CD icon and press [ENTER].
The RECOVER PROJECT FROM CD popup (Screen Guide; p. 171) will appear. Displays a project name on
CD-R/RW disc
Project and disk management
1. Insert the CD-R/RW disc on which you backed up the project.
4. Specifies the “New Project on Hard disk” parameter for the recovered project you want to
recover.
By default, the project will be recovered with the name that is stored on the CD-R/RW disc. If you want to
recover the project as a different name, change the name.
5. Press [F5](Execute).
Recovery will begin. When the project has been recovered, it will be saved on the hard disk, and the CD-R/RW
disc will be ejected.
● If the message “Insert disc with Project data.” or “Disk not ready.” appear, no disc is inserted in the CD-R/RW
drive. Place a CD-R/RW disc that contains the project data in the tray and close the tray, then press [F5](Execute).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-241
MV-8800_e.book 242 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Folder structure
Data is saved on the MV-8800’s internal hard disk in the following folder structure. The various types of data
are stored as follows.
/ (root)
PROJECTS
(project name).PRJ
:
(project name).PRJ
MIXDOWNTR
MASTERTR
USER
PATCHES
BASS
:
VOX_FX
● / (root folder)
This is the “root” of the drive.
● PROJECTS
Project data is saved in this folder. This folder contains one project for each folder you save.
● (project name).PRJ
Each.PRJ folder contains the data for one project. The folder has the same name as the project name, with
an extension of “.PRJ”.
● If you want to back up a project on a USB-connected computer, you must be sure to back up the entire .PRJ
folder from within the PROJECTS folder. For details, refer to “Backing up a project from the MV-8800 to your
computer” (p. 292).
● MIXDOWNRTR
WAV files created by the mixdown process are saved here.
● MASTERTR
WAV files created by mastering are saved here.
● USER
You are free to use this folder for exchanging data with a connected computer. For example, you can import
WAV files from your computer via this folder.
● PATCHES
This folder contains a variety of patches (“pre-installed patches”) that you will find convenient when creating
songs.
● The root directory and each project folder contains other folders and files in addition to those explained
above. These folders and files contain data used by the MV-8800’s system. You must never copy, move,
modify, or delete them. If you do, the system will not operate correctly, and your data will be lost. Roland
Corporation will not guarantee that the MV-8800 will operate correctly if you access these folders or
files.
M-242
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 243 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Managing files (File Utility)
The File Utility commands let you manage the files stored on the MV-8800’s hard disk and CD-RW drive.
1. Press [DISK/USB].
The DISK/USB MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 188) will appear.
2. Press [F1](File Utility), or use the cursor to select the FILE UTILITY icon and press
[ENTER].
The FILE UTILITY screen (Screen Guide; p. 189) will appear.
Changing the current drive
1. Press [F1](Select Drive).
The SELECT DRIVE popup (Screen Guide; p. 6) will appear.
15
Use the VALUE dial or the cursor to select the drive (hard disk, CD-R/RW drive) on which you want to perform
file operations.
● If a CD-ROM is inserted in the CD-R/RW drive, select CD-ROM. If an audio CD is inserted, select Audio CD.
3. Press [F5](Select).
The current drive will change.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Project and disk management
2. Use the cursor to select a drive.
M-243
MV-8800_e.book 244 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Managing files (File Utility)
Changing the current folder
1. Move the cursor to the folder whose contents you want to view.
2. Press CURSOR [
].
The selected folder will become the current folder, and the file list will show the contents of the folder. To return
to the “parent folder” in which you were previously, press CURSOR [ ].
● The cursor icon will change shape to indicate whether you can press CURSOR [
displayed folder.
Cursor icon
][
] to change the
Explanation
You can move the cursor up/down.
You can move the cursor up/down. If this indication is displayed, the cursor is located at a
folder. Press CURSOR [ ] to view the contents of the folder (i.e., to switch folders).
You can move the cursor up/down. If this indication is displayed, you can press CURSOR
[ ] to return to the parent folder (i.e., to switch folders).
M-244
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 245 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Managing files (File Utility)
Creating a folder
Here’s how to create another folder (a “child folder”) within the current folder.
1. Press [F4](Make Folder).
The EDIT FOLDER NAME (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear. Input a name for the folder.
● You can assign a maximum of sixteen characters.
2. When you have finished inputting the name, press [F5](OK).
The folder will be created with the name you’ve specified.
Renaming a folder or file
Here’s how to rename a file or folder that is saved on the disk.
1. Move the cursor to the file or folder that you want to rename.
2. Press [F3](Rename).
The EDIT FILE NAME (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear. Input the desired name.
● You can assign a maximum of twenty characters.
3. When you have finished inputting the name, press [F5](OK).
The name of the file or folder will be changed to the name you’ve specified.
● You must never rename a folder other than those described in “Folder structure” (p. 242), with the
exception of a folder you create as described in “Creating a new project” (p. 239). Such folders and files
are used by the MV-8800’s system. If you rename them, the system will not operate correctly, and
important data will be lost.
15
Project and disk management
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-245
MV-8800_e.book 246 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Managing files (File Utility)
Copying a file or a folder
Here’s how to copy a file or a folder from disk to another folder or drive.
1. Move the cursor to the file or a folder that you want to copy.
● You can’t copy a file or folder to a CD-R/RW disc.
2. Press [F5](Command).
The SELECT FILE COMMAND popup (Screen Guide; p. 191) will appear.
3. Select “Copy” and press [F5](Select).
The SELECT DESTINATION popup (Screen Guide; p. 192) will appear.
4. Select the copy-destination folder, and press [F5](Execute).
The file or folder will be copied to the copy-destination folder.
● You must never copy a folder other than those described in “Folder structure” (p. 242). Such folders
and files are used by the MV-8800’s system. If you copy them, the system will not operate correctly, and
important data will be lost.
● If you want to copy the file or folder to another drive in step 4, or if you want to create another folder and then
perform the copy, perform the following procedure first, and then return to step 4 and continue.
● If you want to copy the data to a different drive, press [F1](Select Drive). The SELECT DRIVE popup (Screen
Guide; p. 6) will appear. Use the cursor to select a drive, and press [F5](SELECT).
● If you want to create another folder, press [F3](Make Folder). The EDIT FOLDER NAME popup (Screen Guide;
p. 3) will appear. Input a name for the folder and press [F5](OK).
M-246
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 247 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Managing files (File Utility)
Moving a file to another location (Move)
Here’s how to move a folder or file on disk to another folder or drive.
● You can’t move a file or folder to a CD-R/RW disc.
1. Use the cursor to select the file that you want to move.
2. Press [F5](Command).
The SELECT FILE COMMAND popup (Screen Guide; p. 191) will appear.
3. Select “Move” and press [F5](Select).
The SELECT DESTINATION popup (Screen Guide; p. 192) will appear.
15
4. Select the move-destination folder and press [F5](Execute).
● You must never move a folder other than those described in “Folder structure” (p. 242). Such folders and files
are used by the MV-8800’s system. If you move them, the system will not operate correctly, and important data
will be lost.
● If you want to move the file or folder to another drive in step 4, or if you want to create another folder and then
move the data into it, perform the following procedure first, and then return to step 4 and continue.
● If you want to move the data to a different drive, press [F1](Select Drive). The SELECT DRIVE popup (Screen
Guide; p. 6) will appear. Use the cursor to select a drive, and press [F5](SELECT).
● If you want to create another folder, press [F3](Make Folder). The EDIT FOLDER NAME popup (Screen Guide;
p. 3) will appear. Input a name for the folder and press [F5](OK).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Project and disk management
The file or folder will be moved to the move-destination folder.
M-247
MV-8800_e.book 248 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Managing files (File Utility)
Deleting a folder or file
Here’s how to delete an unwanted file or folder.
● You must never delete a folder other than those described in “Folder structure” (p. 242). Such folders
and files are used by the MV-8800’s system. If you delete them, the system will not operate correctly,
and important data will be lost.
● There is no way to recover data that has been deleted. (Unless, of course, you have previously made a
backup of that data.) Roland Corporation can accept no responsibility for any loss of data or any
damages you incur as a result of such loss.
1. Use the cursor to select the folder or file that you want to delete.
2. Press [F5](Command).
The SELECT FILE COMMAND popup (Screen Guide; p. 191) will appear.
3. Select “Delete” and press [F5](Select).
A message of “Delete file/folder.” will appear.
F-button
Action
[F1](No)
Cancels the operation.
[F5](Yes)
Deletes the selected folder or file.
● If the display asks “Selected folders contain files. They will be deleted, sure?”
The folders you selected contain files, and these files will also be deleted if you execute the operation.
M-248
F-button
Action
[F1](No)
Cancels the operation.
[F5](Yes)
Deletes the selected folder(s) and/or file(s).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 249 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Disk management
This section describes various settings and operations you can perform for the MV-8800’s drives.
1. Press [DISK/USB].
The DISK/USB MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 188) will appear.
2. Press [F2](Disk Utility), or use the cursor to select the DISK UTILITY icon and press
[ENTER].
The DISK UTILITY screen (Screen Guide; p. 193) will appear.
Formatting a disk
This operation formats a disk, erasing all data that was on that disk. By formatting (erasing) or a CD-RW disc
that had been used by a device other than the MV-8800, you can make it usable on the MV-8800.
● There is no way to recover data that has been deleted. (Unless, of course, you have previously made a
backup of that data.) Roland Corporation can accept no responsibility for any loss of data or any
damages you incur as a result of such loss.
1. Move the cursor to the drive whose disk you want to format.
If you want to format the hard disk, you’ll need to change the parameter settings before you execute the
formatting operation. Refer to “Formatting the hard disk” (p. 250).
15
2. Press [F3](Format).
Project and disk management
The display will ask “All data on the disk will be lost. Are you sure?”
F-button
Action
[F1](No)
Cancels the operation.
[F5](Yes)
Begins formatting the selected disk.
If you are formatting (erasing) a CD-RW disc, the “Erase CD-RW” message will appear.
F-button
Action
[F1](No)
Cancels the operation.
[F3](Yes (Quick))
Erases the CD-RW disc at high speed.
[F5](Yes (Full))
Erases the CD-RW disc completely.
● If you format the hard disk, a default project and song will be automatically created after formatting, and the
SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-249
MV-8800_e.book 250 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Disk management
Formatting the hard disk
If the HD Format Protect parameter is On, it will not be possible to format the hard disk.
If you want to format the hard disk, turn the HD Format Protect parameter to the “Off” setting.
The HD Format Protect parameter lets you allow or prevent formatting of the hard disk. When you turn
on the power of MV-8800, this will automatically be turned On.
1. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
2. Press [F1](Global).
The GLOBAL screen (Screen Guide; p. 173) will appear.
3. Sets the HD Format Protect parameters.
HD Format Protect
Explanation
Off
You will be able to format the hard disk. If you want to format the hard disk, select the “Off” setting.
On
You will not be able to format the hard disk. Normally, you should leave this at the “On” setting.
If you attempt to format the hard disk when the HD Format Protect parameter is On, a message of
“Can’t Format the Hard Disk. HD Format Protect is On.” will appear.
If you want to continue with formatting the hard disk, follow the procedure described in “Formatting a
disk” (p. 249).
Naming a disk
You can assign a name (volume label) to each disk.
● You can’t change the volume label of a CD-R/RW disc.
1. Move the cursor to the drive to which you want to assign a volume label.
2. Press [F5](Volume Label).
The EDIT VOLUME LABEL popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear. Enter the desired name.
3. When you have finished inputting the name, press [F5](OK).
The volume label of the selected drive will be changed.
M-250
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 251 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 16
Using an external display and
mouse to operate the MV-8800
You can connect an external display (VGA) and the included mouse, and perform operations from the external display.
Even when you are using an external display to operate the MV-8800, you can also view information on the MV-8800’s
built-in LCD screen.
Switching between the two operating modes
How to confirm the operating mode
● When the external display shows the “Roland MV-8800 logo”
In this state you use the MV-8800’s panel and its own built-in LCD to perform operations. The external
display and mouse cannot be used for operations.
● When the MV-8800’s LCD indicates “VGA MODE”
You can operate the MV-8800 from the external display (VGA mode). You can use the front panel to
perform the same operations as before, and also operate the MV-8800 using the included mouse. The
MV-8800’s LCD will indicate the status of the tracks and the samples assigned to the velocity pads.
● In VGA mode, you can also perform operations from the MV-8800’s panel.
Here’s how to select either the external display or the built-in LCD as the screen in which you will operate the
MV-8800.
● You can press the [SHIFT] + [EXIT] buttons to switch the operating mode from the external display to the
internal LCD.
16
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the lower row of icons, press [F3](Disp/Mouse). Alternatively,
you can select the DISPLAY/MOUSE icon and press [ENTER].
The DISPLAY/MOUSE screen (Screen Guide; p. 184) will appear.
3. Press [F5](LCD↔VGA).
1. From the menu bar, click “SYSTEM” ➔ “Display/Mouse.”
The DISPLAY/MOUSE screen (Screen Guide; p. 184) will appear.
2. Click
.
You will be able to operate in the built-in LCD.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
1. Press [SYSTEM]
M-251
MV-8800_e.book 252 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using a mouse
You can use the included mouse to operate the on-screen knobs and buttons, or the sequence data in the play
list. When you move the mouse, the mouse pointer (the arrow symbol) will move in the screen. By placing the
mouse pointer on a button or knob and pressing (clicking) the mouse button you can perform various
operations depending on the selected item.
● Mouse operations can be used only in the external display.
About the mouse
The included mouse is a wheel mouse.
Wheel
Left-button
Right-button
● The included mouse is an optical mouse. It may not function correctly on some surfaces, so be sure to use it on
the included mouse pad.
Basic operation
Basic mouse operations are:
• Use the mouse pointer to indicate a button or knob in the screen (“point”)
• Press the mouse button (“click”)
• Turn the mouse wheel
● Point
Move the tip of the mouse pointer to a button or knob shown in the screen. This is called
“pointing” at the button or knob.
● Click
Point to a button or knob in the screen; then press and release the mouse button
once.
In some cases you will be specifically told to “right-click,” which means to click using
the right mouse button.
● Double-click
Point to an on-screen button or knob, and rapidly press the mouse button twice.
M-252
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 253 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using a mouse
● Operating the wheel
Turn the wheel toward or away from yourself.
After clicking on a numerical parameter, you can turn the wheel to raise or lower the value.
The wheel can be used only for numerical parameters; it cannot be used to operate buttons
or knobs.
● The wheel can also be clicked just like the left or right buttons, but the MV-8800 does not use this action.
● Drag
Move the mouse while holding down the mouse button.
For example by dragging an event shown in a play list, you can
change the starting time or the track of that event. By dragging a
knob you can change its setting.
1
Press
2
Move while holding down
● Drag&Drop
Drag, and then release the mouse button at the desired location.
3
Release your finger
from the button
The sequence data or knob you dragged will move to the position at
which you released the button.
1
Press
2
Move while holding down
16
Here’s how to operate the buttons and knobs shown in the screen.
● Menu Bar
Click an item in the menu bar, and a list showing the contents of that item will appear. In the list, click the
desired item.
● Buttons
You can click on “buttons” shown in the screen to execute various operations or to select parameters.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
Mouse operations
M-253
MV-8800_e.book 254 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using a mouse
● Sliders
Sliders are used to continuously vary a value. Point to the knob of a slider, and drag it up or down.
● Knobs
Knobs are used to continuously vary a value. Point to a knob, and drag it horizontally.
● Numerical boxes
Numerical boxes are used to make detailed changes in the value of a parameter. Click a numerical value to
highlight it, and turn the wheel forward or backward to change the value.
● Name editor
This is a popup window used to input names in various screens. Input the desired name by using the mouse
to click the buttons.
Name
Insert button
Capital Lock button
Keyboard
Shift button
Cursor button
Explanation
M-254
Name
This is the area in which you will input the name.
Keyboard
Use these buttons to select the characters you want to input.
Insert
button
This button switches between Insert input mode and Overwrite input mode. Insert input mode is selected
when the button is in the inward position; the characters you select will be input at the cursor position,
and any subsequent characters will be moved toward the right. In Overwrite input mode, any
previously-input characters will be overwritten by the characters you input.
Capital Lock
button
This button switches between uppercase (Caps) and lowercase characters. Uppercase (Caps) input is
selected when the button is in the inward position; only uppercase characters will be input from the
keyboard.
Shift button
This button temporarily switches the type of characters that will be input from the keyboard. Clicking the
keyboard when the Shift button is in the
inward position will defeat the Shift button.
Cursor
button
These buttons change the position at which characters from the keyboard will be input.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 255 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
Menu Bar
Transport Block
Inspector Area
Launcher Block
Tools Area
Ruler Area
Tracklist Area
Playlist Area
Function Button Block
● Transport Block
fig.transport-block2
Explanation
Mixdown Mode
button
This switches the mixdown mode. If you record while this is on, the current song will be mixed
down.
Sync Mode button
This displays the SYNC popup, where you can switch the synchronization state. This will be
lit if Sync Mode is set to anything other than Master.
Current Time
Location
This area indicates the current time location in “measures - beats - ticks.” You can click a
numerical field and change the time.
Current Time
Location
This area indicates the current time location in “hours: minutes: seconds. frames.”
16
fig.transport-block1
Step Time
Marker button
The MARKER popup will appear.
Locator button
The LOCATOR popup will appear.
Step button
(Rewind/Forward)
These buttons return or advance the current time location by the range specified in Step Time.
Marker button
(Previous/Next)
These buttons move the current time location to the next or previous recorded marker.
Preview button
(To/From)
These buttons audition a several-second portion (specified by Preview Length) before or after
the current time location.
Event button
(Previous/Next)
These buttons move the current time location to the next or previous recorded event.
Top button
Return to the start of the current song (0001-01-000).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
Explanation
This indicates the range of movement that will occur when you press the Step buttons
(Rewind/Forward). You can click this area to see a list of the available movement ranges.
M-255
MV-8800_e.book 256 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
Explanation
Meas button
(Rewind/Forward)
These buttons move the current time location forward or backward in one-measure steps.
Stop button
To stop the sequencer.
Play button
To play the sequencer.
REC button
The RECORD PARAMETER popup will appear. Here you can make preparations for
recording data into the sequencer.
Step REC button
The STEP REC popup will appear. Starts the step recording.
REC Parameter
button
The RECORD PARAMETER popup will appear.
Song Position Bar
The entire length of this bar corresponds to the length of the current song/pattern, and the
scrollbar handle indicates the current time location. You can move the current time location by
dragging or clicking the scrollbar handle.
fig.transport-block3
Explanation
BPM (Tempo)
This indicates the tempo at the current time location. If the tempo track is off, you can click
this value and change the tempo.
Tempo Track Switch
You can click this area to switch the Tempo Track On (
Time Signature
Auto Punch button
Auto Punch
In/Out
Loop button
Loop Start/End
Metronome Mode
)/Off (
).
Display the time signature of the current song/pattern.
This button switch the Auto Punch function On/Off.
This area indicates the auto punch-in time (at left) and auto punch-out time (at right). You
can click a numerical field and change the time.
This button switch the Loop function On/Off.
This area indicates the loop-start time (at left) and loop-end time (at right). You can click a
numerical field and change the time.
Specifies when the metronome signal will be output.
Loop Quick Set
button
This button makes the playback loop from the beginning of the current beat for the length
specified by the Quick Loop Length setting.
Quick Loop Length
This indicates the loop length that will be used when you press the Loop Quick Set button.
You can click this to see a list of the available loop lengths.
● Launcher Block
fig.launcher-block1
Explanation
Sampling button
Import button
Instruments button
Audio Phrases
button
Quick Edit button
M-256
The SAMPLING popup will appear. Here you can make settings and execute sampling.
The IMPORT popup will appear. Here you can import data from the hard disk or a CD.
The INSTRUMENTS popup will appear. Here you can edit or make settings for instruments.
The AUDIO PHRASES popup will appear. Here you can edit or make settings for audio
phrases.
Here you can edit the audio phrases or the partials of the current track.
Track Mute button
The TRACK MUTE popup will appear. Here you can switch the Mute and Solo settings for
each track.
Pad Banks button
The PAD BANKS popup will appear. Here you can switch the pad bank of the velocity pads.
Pad Bank
Number/Name
Display the current pad bank and pad name. If the tempo track is off, you can click this value
and change the current pad bank.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 257 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
fig.launcher-block2
Explanation
Effects button
The EFFECTS popup will appear. Here you can make settings for the built-in MFX,
Delay/Chorus and Reverb.
Effect Section
Selector
This selects the effect module (MFX, delay/chorus, reverb) that will be controlled by the C1–
C3 knobs.
Mixer button
The MIXER popup will appear. Here you can adjust the volume and panning of the audio
tracks and instrument parts.
Mixer Section
Selector
This displays mixer sections which can be controlled by the eight sliders on the MV-8800’s
panel. A list of the available mixer sections will appear when you click this.
The available mixer sections are:
• “Audio” (Audio Track 1-8)
• “Part 1-8” (Instruments Part 1-8)
• “Part 9-16” (Instruments Part 9-16)
• “Aux/In” (AUX 1-4, Effects Return, Audio Phrases, Input)
• “Assign” (Assignable Slider)
Region In/Out
button
This button specifies the current time location as region-in (beginning of the selected region)
or region-out (end of the selected region).
Region In/Out point
This area indicates the region-in time (at left) and region-out time (at right). You can click a
numerical field and change the time.
● Inspector Area (When the current track is MIDI track)
Quantize Type=
Off
Grid
Shuffle
Template
Explanation
Current Track
Number/Name
Display the current track number and current track name.
Output Assign
(Instrument)
This indicates the instrument part played by the current track. If you click this area, show the list of the
instrument part, MFX, Pix Jam, and mixer automation channels.
Output Assign
(MIDI)
Specifies the MIDI connector and channel used for MIDI output of the data from the MIDI track. Click
this to view a list of the MIDI output destinations.
Display the setting of quantization of the current track. Click this to view a list of the quantize types.
Strength
Display the strength of playback quantization. You can click the numerical value to edit the strength.
(This is displayed when the Quantize Type is set to Grid or Shuffle.)
Resolution
Display the quantization timing. You can click the numerical value to edit the resolution. (This is
displayed when the Quantize Type is set to Grid or Shuffle.)
Rate
This indicates the amount of “swing” that will be applied when the Quantize Type is set to Shuffle. You
can click the numerical value to edit the rate.
Template
This indicates the template name that will be applied when the Quantize Type is set to Template. You
can click the template name to show the template list and select the other template.
Velocity
This indicates the strength of the velocity correction that will be applied when the Quantize Type is set
to Template. You can click the numerical value to edit the velocity.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
Quantize Type
16
M-257
MV-8800_e.book 258 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
● Inspector Area (When the current track is Audio Track)
Explanation
Current Track
Number/Name
Display the current track number and current track name.
Output Assign
Specifies the output connector from which the audio recorded on the track will be output.
Level
Shows the level of the current track. You can click the numerical value to edit the level.
Pan
Shows the pan of the current track. You can click the value to change the pan setting.
Delay/Chorus/Send
level
Shows the level of audio that is sent to the delay/chorus effect. You can click the numerical value to
change the send level.
Reverb send level
Shows the level of audio that is sent to the reverb effect. You can click the numerical value to change
the send level.
● Tools Area
Explanation
View Filter
Expand Track List
Area button
This expands the track list area display so that the Play Quantize settings can be shown.
Piano Roll button
The PIANO ROLL EDIT popup will appear. This is available when the current track is a MIDI
track.
Event List button
The EVENT LIST popup will appear. This is available when the current track is a MIDI track.
Drum Grid button
The the DRUM GRID popup will appear. This is available when the current track is a MIDI
track.
Snap button
Grid Resolution
Arrow button
M-258
This indicates the type of events that will be displayed in the SONG screen, the PATTERN
screen, or the EVENT LIST popup. By clicking an icon you can specify whether that type of
event will be displayed (white) or will be hidden (black).
If this is on, clicking in the play list or ruler will automatically select a suitable location (such
as the beginning of a measure). Since the interval of this division is specified by the Grid
Resolution setting, you can use this feature to “snap” your selection to precise units of beats
or measures.
This indicates the unit (the level of detail) that can be selected with the mouse pointer when
using the Snap function. By clicking the numerical value you can specify whether that list of
resolution will be displayed.
This switches the mouse pointer to Arrow mode. Use this when you want to select a range
of events in the play list. All events included in the mouse selection will be selected even if
they extend beyond the range.
Range button
This switches the mouse pointer to Range mode. Use this when you want to select a range
of events in the play list. The range selected by the mouse will be the actual selected range.
Eraser button
This switches the mouse pointer to Eraser mode. In Eraser mode, you can click an event in
the play list to delete it.
Undo/Redo
button
You can click this button to cancel (UNDO) the results of an editing command in sequencer
section. If you then click the button again, you can cancel the UNDO (i.e., REDO).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 259 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
● Ruler Area
fig.ruler-
Explanation
Tempo Change
Event
Current Time
Region of Auto
Punch In/Out
This indicates the location of a change in tempo and time signature.
The current time is indicated by a red line.
This indicates the region (red) in which Record mode will be enabled automatically.
Locator
These are locators placed in the song. You can place up to 10 locators in a song. The
desired time location can be stored in any Locator number.
Marker
These are markers placed in the song. You can place up to 99 markers in a song. Markers
are automatically numbered in ascending order according to their time location.
Selected Region
This indicates the region of time you selected by dragging the mouse, etc.
Region of Loop
The enclosed region (blue) will loop.
❍ Right-click on the Ruler Area
● Items marked by (
1
) are not displayed in Pattern mode.
Locator
The LOCATOR popup will appear. You can specify a locator number and register a time location for it.
2
Tempo Track
The TEMPO TRACK popup will appear. The tempo track lets you specify the tempo and time signature.
3
Add Marker
This adds a marker at the current time location.
4
Add Tempo Change Event...
The ADD TEMPO CHANGE EVENT popup will appear. Here you can input or edit tempo events.
5
Clear Marker
16
Erase Marker in place which carried out the right-click.
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
6
Clear Locator
Erase Locator in place which carried out the right-click.
7
Clear Tempo Change Event
Erase Tempo Change Event in place which carried out the right-click.
8
Set Selected Region to Loop
This sets the selected region as the Loop region.
9
Set Selected Region to Auto Punch
This sets the selected region as the Auto Punch region.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-259
MV-8800_e.book 260 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
● Tracklist Area
Explanation
M-260
Track Number
Display the Track number. You can click here to make that number the current track.
Track Type Icon
This indicates the type of track. You can click here to select or de-select that track.
Track Name
Display the name of the track. When you double-click here, the EDIT TRACK NAME popup
window will appear, allowing you to edit the name of the track.
Track Move
Up/Down button
You can click these to move the current track upward or downward (i.e., change their order).
All Track Select
button
Click this to select or de-select all tracks.
Output Assign
(Instrument)
This indicates the instrument part played by the current track.
Output Assign
(MIDI)
Specifies the MIDI connector and channel used for MIDI output of the data from the MIDI
track.
Output Assign
(Audio)
Specifies the output connector from which the audio recorded on the track will be output.
Mute button
Click this to turn Mute on (yellow) or off.
Solo button
Click this to turn Solo on (light blue) or off.
Record button
Click this to switch the current track.
All Track Mute Off
button
Click this to defeat Mute for all tracks.
All Track Solo Off
button
Click this to defeat Solo for all tracks.
Track Parameter
button
Click this to display the TRACK PARAMETER popup window for the corresponding track.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 261 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
❍ Right-click on the Tracklist Area
● Items marked by (
1
) are not displayed in Pattern mode.
Add MIDI Tracks...
The ADD MIDI TRACKS popup will appear. Add one or more MIDI tracks for recording data in your current
song.
2
Add Audio Tracks...
The ADD AUDIO TRACKS popup will appear. Add one or more Audio tracks for recording data in your current
song.
3
Add Pattern Track
Adds a pattern track to the current song.
4
Delete Tracks...
The DELETE TRACKS popup will appear. Here you can delete the tracks.
5
Merge Tracks...
The MERGE TRACKS popup will appear. Here you can combine multiple MIDI tracks into a single track.
6
Insert Measure...
The INSERT MEASURE popup will appear. Here you can insert blank measures at the specified measure
location.
7
Delete Measure...
The DELETE MEASURE popup will appear. Here you can delete the specified measures.
8
Erase All Events
Deletes the all events of current track. A confirmation message will appear before the data is erased.
9
Track Name...
The EDIT TRACK NAME popup will appear. You can change the name of the track.
10 Track Parameter
The TRACK PARAMETER popup will appear.
11 Select All Tracks
Select or de-select all tracks.
12 All Mute Off
Defeat Mute for all tracks.
16
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
13 All Solo Off
Defeat Solo for all tracks.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-261
MV-8800_e.book 262 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
● Playlist Area
Explanation
MIDI Event
These boxes indicate MIDI events. One box is shown for each measure or for each beat. They
are color-coded according to the assigned instrument part. When you double-click a MIDI
event, the PIANO ROLL EDIT popup will appear.
When you holding down [JUMP] and double-click a MIDI event, the EVENT LIST popup will
appear.
Audio Event
These boxes indicate audio events. The length of the box corresponds to the length of the
audio event. When you double-click an audio event, the AUDIO EVENT PARAMETER popup
will appear.
Pattern Event
This boxes indicates pattern events. The length of the box corresponds to the length of the
pattern. When you double-click a pattern event, the PATTERN EVENT PARAMETER popup
will appear.
Zoom button
These buttons expand (+) or shrink (-) the time axis of the playlist.
Scroll button/bar
Here you can move the displayed portion of the play list along the time axis. Click
to move
toward the beginning of the song/pattern, or click
to move toward the end of the
song/pattern. You can drag the scroll bar to move the current time location accordingly.
❍ Right-click on the Playlist Area
1
Move...
The MOVE popup will appear. Moves the data of the selected region to the specified location.
2
Copy&Paste...
The COPY&PASTE popup will appear. Copies the data of the selected region to the specified location.
3
Copy&Insert...
The COPY&INSERT popup will appear. Inserts the data of the selected region to the specified location.
4
Erase
Deletes the data. The deleted region will be blank.
5
Cut
Deletes the data. Subsequent data will be moved forward.
6
Quantize...
The QUANTIZE popup will appear. Adjust the timing of MIDI note events in the way you specify.
7
Change Velocity...
The CHANGE VELOCITY popup will appear. Changes the velocity of MIDI note events.
8
Change Duration...
The CHANGE DURATION popup will appear. Changes the duration (note length) of MIDI note events.
9
Shift Timing...
The SHIFT TIMING popup will appear. Moves the events of the selected region forward or backward in units
of one tick (1/480th of a quarter note).
10 Data Thin...
The DATA THIN popup will appear. Thins-out events of the selected region to reduce the amount of data.
M-262
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 263 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
11 Transpose...
The TRANSPOSE popup will appear. Transposes the pitch of note events in the selected region, in units of a
semitone.
12 Split Notes...
The SPLIT NOTES popup will appear. This lets you extract only specific note events from a track, and move
them to a specified other track.
13 Change Continuous Data...
The CHANGE CONTINUOUS DATA popup will appear. Here you can rewrite continuously changing data in
the specified region.
14 Create Continuous Data...
The CREATE CONTINUOUS DATA popup will appear. Here you can create continuously changing data.
15 Copy As MIDI Clip...
The COPY AS MIDI CLIP popup will appear. Add the specified data to the MIDI clip library.
16 Paste MIDI Clip...
The PASTE MIDI CLIP popup will appear. Paste the MIDI clip from the MIDI clip library into the current
song/pattern.
17 Copy As New Pattern
The COPY AS NEW PATTERN popup will appear. Here you can add the selected data to the pattern list as a
pattern.
18 Paste Pattern...
The PASTE PATTERN popup will appear. Here you can paste a pattern from the pattern list into the current
song/pattern.
19 Copy As Audio Phrase...
The COPY AS AUDIO PHRASE popup will appear. Here you can copy the selected data to the velocity pads.
20 Audio Event Parameter
The AUDIO EVENT PARAMETER popup will appear. Adjust the parameters of the event of a selected audio
track.
21 Pattern Event Parameter
The PATTERN EVENT parameter will appear. Adjust the parameters of the event of a selected pattern track.
16
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-263
MV-8800_e.book 264 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
● Function button Block
Explanation
Function buttons
The [F1]–[F5] buttons correspond to functions displayed at the bottom of the LCD.
Wave Memory
meter
If it is in the state which can do the direct recording, the remaining recordable time and the
remaining amount of memory are displayed.
Sequence Memory
meter
In the state which can do the sequence recording, green meter is displayed. This indicates
the amount of sequence data that has been recorded. The numerical value shows the
proportion of free area available for recording events into the sequencer.
● Menu Bar
❍ PROJECT
Manage the project and make project setting.
1
Rename Project...
The EDIT PROJECT NAME popup will appear. Assign a name to the project.
2
Set Project Protection...
The SET PROJECT PROTECTION popup will appear. Protect a project saved on disk from being overwritten
or deleted.
3
Load Project...
The LOAD PROJECT popup will appear. Load a project, making it the current project.
4
Save Project
“Save Current Project?” message will appear. Save the current project.
5
Save As New Project...
The SAVE AS NEW PROJECT popup will appear. Here you can save the current project under a different
name, and then make it the current project.
6
Create New Project...
The CREATE NEW PROJECT popup will appear. Create a new project.
7
Delete Project...
The DELETE PROJECT popup will appear. Delete an unwanted project.
8
Sample Manager
The SAMPLE MANAGER popup will appear. Here you can manage the samples in the current project.
9
Backup To CD...
The BACKUP PROJECT TO CD popup will appear. Backup the current project to a CD-R/RW disc.
10 Recover From CD...
The RECOVER PROJECT FROM CD popup will appear. Recover (restore) a backed-up project from CD into
the MV-8800 with the name you specify.
11 Shutdown
“SHUTDOWN Are you sure?” message will appear. You must execute this operation before powering-off the
MV-8800.
M-264
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 265 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
❍ SONG
Manage the song and make various settings for the current song.
● Items marked by (
1
) are not displayed in Pattern mode.
Song Name...
The EDIT SONG NAME popup will appear. You can change the name of the current song.
2
Song Parameter
The SONG PARAMETER popup will appear. Make settings for the current song.
3
Sync
The SYNC popup will appear. Make synchronization settings.
4
Create New Song...
The CREATE NEW SONG popup will appear. Create a new song within the current project.
5
Select Song...
The SELECT SONG popup will appear. Change the current song by recalling the desired song.
6
Delete Song...
The DELETE SONG popup will appear. Delete an unwanted song.
7
Copy As New Song...
The COPY AS NEW SONG popup will appear.
Copy the current song, and switch the current song to be the resulting copy.
8
Save As User Template
The message “Save Song setting as User Track Template?” will appear. Save a track structure or loop settings
to a song template.
9
Save As SMF...
The SAVE SONG AS SMF popup will appear. Save the current song in SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 1.
10 Load Song...
The LOAD SONG popup will appear. Load a song from another project into the current project.
❍ PATTERN
Includes operations found in Pattern mode. These are displayed only in Pattern mode.
1
16
Pattern Name...
2
Pattern Parameter
The PATTERN PARAMETER popup will appear. Make settings for the current pattern.
3
Pattern Sync
The PATTERN SYNC popup will appear. Make synchronization settings of pattern.
4
Save As SMF
The SAVE PATTERN AS SMF popup will appear. Save the current pattern in SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 1.
5
Pattern List
The PATTERN LIST popup will appear. Load the pattern that you want to edit.
6
Pattern Play
The PATTERN PLAY popup will appear. Play patterns while you switch between them whenever desired.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
The EDIT PATTERN NAME popup will appear. You can change the name of the current pattern.
M-265
MV-8800_e.book 266 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
❍ SEQUENCE
Perform sequencer-related operations.
● Items marked by (
1
) are not displayed in Pattern mode.
Tempo Track
The TEMPO TRACK popup will appear. The tempo track lets you specify the tempo and time signature.
2
Mute Control Track
The MUTE CONTROL TRACK popup will appear. Here you can edit the mute data recorded in the Mute
Control track.
3
Add MIDI Track...
The ADD MIDI TRACKS popup will appear. Add one or more MIDI tracks for recording data in your current
song.
4
Add Audio Track...
The ADD AUDIO TRACKS popup will appear. Add one or more Audio tracks for recording data in your current
song.
5
Add Pattern Track
Adds a pattern track.
6
Delete Tracks...
The DELETE TRACKS popup will appear. Here you can delete the tracks.
7
Merge Tracks...
The MERGE TRACKS popup will appear. Here you can combine multiple MIDI tracks into a single track.
8
Current Track Edit
8-1 Name...
The EDIT TRACK NAME popup will appear. Here you can change the name of the track.
8-2 Erase All Events
Deletes the all events of current track. A confirmation message will appear before the data is erased.
9
Insert Measure...
The INSERT MEASURE popup will appear. Here you can insert blank measures at the specified measure
location.
10 Delete Measure...
The DELETE MEASURE popup will appear. Here you can delete the specified measures.
11 Marker
The MARKER popup will appear. Here you can add or delete markers.
12 View Filter
The VIEW FILTER popup will appear. Here you can select the MIDI events that can be viewed
and edited in the SONG screen and EVENT LIST screen.
13 Step Time
The STEP TIME popup will appear. Here you can specify the interval by which the STEP buttons will change
the time location.
14 Recording parameter
The RECORDING PARAMETER popup will appear. Here you can specify the recording parameters for the
current track.
15 Metronome
The METRONOME popup will appear. Here you can make metronome settings.
16 Loop
The LOOP popup will appear. Here you can make loop settings for loop play.
17 MIDI Clip Library
The MIDI CLIP LIBRARY popup will appear. Here you can rename or delete items in the MIDI clip library.
M-266
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 267 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
❍ EDIT
You can edit the track.
1
Move...
The MOVE popup will appear. Moves the data of the selected region to the specified location.
2
Copy&Paste...
The COPY&PASTE popup will appear. Copies the data of the selected region to the specified location.
3
Copy&Insert...
The COPY&INSERT popup will appear. Inserts the data of the selected region to the specified location.
4
Erase
Deletes the data. The deleted region will be blank.
5
Cut
Deletes the data. Subsequent data will be moved forward.
6
Quantize...
The QUANTIZE popup will appear. Adjust the timing of MIDI note events in the way you specify.
7
Change Velocity...
The CHANGE VELOCITY popup will appear. Changes the velocity of MIDI note events.
8
Change Duration...
The CHANGE DURATION popup will appear. Changes the duration (note length) of MIDI note events.
9
Shift Timing...
The SHIFT TIMING popup will appear. Moves the events of the selected region forward or backward in units
of one tick (1/480th of a quarter note).
10 Data Thin...
The DATA THIN popup will appear. Thins-out events of the selected region to reduce the amount of data.
11 Transpose...
The TRANSPOSE popup will appear. Transposes the pitch of note events in the selected region, in units of a
semitone.
12 Split Notes...
The SPLIT NOTES popup will appear. This lets you extract only specific note events from a track, and move
them to a specified other track.
13 Change Continuous Data...
14 Create Continuous Data...
The CREATE CONTINUOUS DATA popup will appear. Here you can create continuously changing data.
15 Copy As MIDI Clip...
The COPY AS MIDI CLIP popup will appear. Add the specified data to the MIDI clip library.
16 Paste MIDI Clip...
The PASTE MIDI CLIP popup will appear. Paste the MIDI clip from the MIDI clip library into the current
song/pattern.
17 Copy As New Pattern...
The COPY AS NEW PATTERN popup will appear. Here you can add the selected data to the pattern list as a
pattern.
18 Paste Pattern...
The PASTE PATTERN popup will appear. Here you can paste a pattern from the pattern list into the current
song/pattern.
19 Copy As Audio Phrase...
The COPY AS AUDIO PHRASE popup will appear. Here you can copy the selected data to the velocity pads.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
16
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
The CHANGE CONTINUOUS DATA popup will appear. Here you can rewrite continuously changing data in
the specified region.
M-267
MV-8800_e.book 268 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
20 Audio Event Parameter
The AUDIO EVENT PARAMETER popup will appear.
Adjust the parameters of the event of an selected audio track.
21 Pattern Event Parameter
The PATTERN EVENT parameter will appear. Adjust the parameters of the event of a selected pattern track.
22 Select All Tracks
Select or de-select all tracks.
❍ SAMPLER
Here you can sample or import of audio sources, and make sampler setting.
1
Sampling
The SAMPLING popup will appear. Here you can make sampling setting and perform sampling.
2
Import
The IMPORT popup will appear. Here you can import of music data from hard disk or CD.
3
Audio Phrases
The AUDIO PHRASES (PAD) popup will appear. Here you can edit the audio phrases.
4
Instruments
The INSTRUMENTS popup will appear. Here you can edit the instruments.
5
Pad Banks
The PAD BANKS popup will appear. The PAD BANKS popup will appear. Here you can switch the pad bank
of the velocity pads.
6
Quick Edit
This lets you edit an audio phrase or partial assigned to a velocity pad.
Use the sub-menu to select the number of the velocity pad.
❍ MIXER/EFFECTS
Here you can make mixer or effect setting.
1
Mixer
The MIXER popup will appear. Here you can adjust the volume and panning of the audio tracks and instrument
parts.
2
Effects
The EFFECTS popup will appear. Here you can make settings for the built-in MFX, Delay/Chorus and Reverb.
M-268
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 269 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
❍ SYSTEM
Here you can make system setting for the MV-8800.
1
Global
The GLOBAL popup will appear. Here you can make settings for the overall system of the MV-8800.
2
Pad/Panel
The PAD popup will appear. Here you can make settings for the velocity pads, top panel buttons, knobs, and
sliders.
3
MIDI
The MIDI popup will appear. Here you can make MIDI settings.
4
V-Link
The V-LINK popup will appear. Here you can make V-LINK settings.
5
System Info
The SYSTEM INFORMATION popup will appear. Here you can view information about memory usage and
the status of the installed options.
6
Slider
The ASSIGNABLE SLIDER popup will appear. Here you can specify the functions assigned to the sliders.
7
R-BUS
The R-BUS popup will appear. Here you can make R-BUS settings.
8
Display/Mouse
The DISPLAY/MOUSE popup will appear. Here you can specify the signal that will be sent to the external
display, and adjust the sensitivity of the mouse.
9
Pix Jam
The PIX JAM popup will appear. Here you can register image clips (still image data), and play back the images
along with the music.
❍ DISK/USB
Here you can make settings for the MV-8800’s disk and for USB.
1
File Utility
The FILE UTILITY popup will appear. Here you can manage files by copying, moving, or deleting them.
2
Disk Utility
16
The DISK UTILITY popup will appear. Here you can check the disk and perform maintenance.
USB
The USB popup will appear. This switch the MV-8800 to USB-connection mode, which lets you transfer data
between the internal hard disk and your computer.
4
CD Player
The CD PLAYER popup will appear. Here you can play back an audio CD.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
3
M-269
MV-8800_e.book 270 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Explanation of screens shown in the external display
❍ MASTERING
Here you can mixdown your completed song/pattern to a two-track master, and create an audio CD.
1
Mixdown Mode
A confirmation message will appear. Turns mixdown mode on/off.
2
Mastering
The SELECT AUDIO FILE/SELECT MASTERING SOURCE popup will appear. Here you can use the
mastering tool kit to master an audio file.
3
Create Audio CD...
The CUE SHEET popup will appear. Here you can specify the song order in which the audio files
will be written to the CD-R/RW disc.
4
Audio File List
The AUDIO FILE LIST popup will appear. Here you can audition or delete mixdown data or mastering data.
❍ All Popup Close button
This button closes all popup windows that are currently open in the screen.
❍ Song Number/Song Name
This shows the number and name of the currently-loaded song. When you double-click this area, the EDIT
SONG NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear, allowing you to edit the name of the song.
❍ Pattern Number/Pattern Name
This shows the number and name of the currently-loaded pattern. When you double-click this area, the EDIT
PATTERN NAME popup (Screen Guide; p. 3) will appear, allowing you to edit the name of the pattern.
M-270
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 271 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Operations using the external display
Quick Tour
The following pages explain the most important operations in VGA mode. Please take this quick tour in order
to get a feel for using VGA mode to operate the MV-8800.
● This quick tour explains mainly MIDI tracks and instruments, but the same explanations also apply to audio
tracks and audio phrases.
❍ Preparations
Load a project that contains data.
● Loading a project – In the menu bar, click “PROJECT”; in the list that appears, click “Load Project...”
● Playback and changing the time location
1. Click the Play button.
The song will begin playing.
2. Click a desired point on the song position bar.
The song playback position will move to the location on which you clicked.
● You can also drag the knob (handle) of the bar.
3. In the current time display area, click the measure, beat, or tick field.
The numerical display will turn blue; now you can edit the value. The song playback position will change when
you move the mouse wheel to increase or decrease the value.
16
● Loop playback
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
1. Click the Quick Loop Length indicator.
A list will appear; click the number of measures you want to use (e.g., 2Meas).
2. Click the Loop Quick Set button
Loop playback will be enabled.
● Playback will loop for the number of measures you specified in step 1.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-271
MV-8800_e.book 272 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Operations using the external display
● Click the display of the Quantize Type.
The list will appear. The result will depend on the Quantize Type. The parameters at right let you specify the
effect in greater detail.
● This operation only modifies the way in which the data is played back. This means that you can always defeat
the effect simply by turning this “Off”.
● Solo Play
1. Click the Solo button.
The Solo button will turn light blue. Only the light blue tracks will play. When you click once again, solo will be
defeated (the button will go dark).
2. Click the All Track Solo Off button.
All solo settings will be defeated.
● Display-related functions
1. Click the zoom button.
The dimension of the play list’s horizontal axis (time axis) will change.
2. Click the note event icon in the View Filter icons.
Of the events displayed in the play list, this switches MIDI note events between displayed and hidden.
● In the same way, you can click
M-272
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
to switch audio events between displayed and hidden.
MV-8800_e.book 273 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Operations using the external display
● Selecting and adding tracks
1. Click the Track Name of the MIDI Track.
The color of the track will change, and it will become the current track.
When you strike a pad, the patch will sound according to the Output Assign parameter of the current track.
● If there’s no sound, try clicking the pad bank button to change the pad bank. Alternatively, try a different track.
2. Right-click the Track Name of the current Track.
A list will appear
3. Click “Add MIDI Tracks... .”
The ADD MIDI TRACKS popup will appear.
4. Click
.
A MIDI track will be added, and will become the current track.
● Editing the name of a track
1. Double-click The Track Name of current track.
The EDIT TRACK NAME popup will appear. Click a key on the keyboard to edit the name of the track.
Then click
.
● Recording and Undo
❍ Preparations
• If looping is turned off, click the Loop button.
• If the sequencer is stopped, click the Play button.
1. Strike the pads to rehearse your recording.
It’s a good idea to practice before you begin recording.
16
2. Click the Record button.
● The loop region will be recorded repeatedly.
3. Click the Undo button
Cancel the results of an recording (Undo). The Undo button will blink.
4. Click the Undo button again.
The content you erased by Undo will be recovered (Redo). The Undo button will lit (light blue). Undo and Redo
will alternate each time you click.
● When you execute Undo, the recording state will be defeated, and you will return to playback.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
Recording will begin. Strike the pads to perform.
M-273
MV-8800_e.book 274 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Operations using the external display
● Editing an event
1. Click the Stop button.
Recording/playback will stop.
2. Drag and drop an event.
The event will move.
3. Click the Snap button.
Snap mode will be switched on/off. In Snap mode, the mouse pointer will always be located at fixed intervals.
When dragging and dropping an event, this lets you ensure that the event will always be aligned to the
beginning of a measure (or whatever interval you specify).
4. Double-click an event.
A popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the selected event in greater detail.
● If you double-click a MIDI event, the PIANO ROLL EDIT popup will appear. If you double-click an audio event,
the AUDIO EVENT PARAMETER popup will appear. If you double-click a pattern event, the PATTERN EVENT
PARAMETER popup will appear.
5. Specify the parameters, then click
The popup will close.
M-274
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
.
MV-8800_e.book 275 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Operations using the external display
● Edit the sound
1. Click “Sampler” on the menu bar.
A list will appear.
2. Move the mouse cursor (i.e., point) to “Quick Edit.”
Another list will appear.
3. Click the partial name (or audio phrase name) you want to edit.
The PARTIAL EDIT popup or AUDIO PHRASE EDIT popup will appear.
4. Drag the knob whose value you want to edit.
The knob will turn, and the parameter value will change according to the distance to which you drag.
● To edit a value, move the mouse pointer to it and use the left button to drag it upward or downward.
5. Click the switch.
The switch indication will change, and the parameter value will change accordingly.
16
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
6. Click the All Popup Close button.
All of the popups will close.
This completes the Quick Tour.
Functions we didn’t discuss here can also be controlled in the same way.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-275
MV-8800_e.book 276 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Operations using the external display
Using the mouse to edit sequence data (SONG screen or PATTERN screen)
● Selecting a region that you want to edit, and executing Move
Here’s how to select a region of data recorded in a track, and move it to another time location or another track.
1. Click the Arrow button
Now you can use Arrow mode to make a selection.
2. Drag over the region you want to select.
When you drag to specify
a region like this
all data falling within
the specified region will be selected.
3. In the menu bar, click “EDIT” (or right-click) to display a popup menu.
4. Click the “Move... .”
The MOVE popup will appear. Use the To parameter to specify the move-destination.
5. Click the
.
The Move operation will be executed.
● Using drag & drop to execute the Move operation
1. Click the Arrow button or Range button.
2. Drag the region you want to edit.
3. Point the selected region.
4. Drag and drop the region at the desired destination.
While dragging, the mouse pointer will change to
. When you drop the data you were dragging, it will be
moved to the location of the mouse pointer. The mouse pointer will return to
.
● You can Copy data by holding down [SHIFT] while you drag and drop the data.
● Using the Range Tool to select a region
When you click the Range button, the mouse pointer will change to
the portion included in the region will be selected for the operation.
When you enclose
a region like this,
M-276
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
these events are selected.
. When using the Range tool, only
MV-8800_e.book 277 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Operations using the external display
● Using the Eraser Tool to delete a data
When you click the Eraser button, the mouse pointer will change to
with the Eraser tool.
. You can delete data by clicking it
Using the mouse to edit a MIDI track (PIANO ROLL EDIT screen)
● Select the region you want to edit, and execute the move operation
Here’s how to select a region of recorded note events in the piano roll display, and move them to another time
location or to other note numbers.
1. Click the Arrow button.
Now you can use Arrow mode to make a selection.
2. Drag over the region you want to select.
When you drag to specify
a region like this
16
.
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
3. Click the
all data falling within
the specified region will be selected.
The popup menu will appear.
4. Double-click the “Move... .”
The MOVE popup will appear. Use the To parameter to specify the move-destination.
5. Click the
.
The Move operation will be executed.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-277
MV-8800_e.book 278 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Operations using the external display
● Using drag & drop to execute the Move operation
1. Click the Arrow button or Range button.
2. Drag the region you want to edit.
3. Point the selected region.
4. Drag and drop the region at the desired destination.
While dragging, the mouse pointer will change to
. When you drop the data you were dragging, it will be
moved to the location of the mouse pointer. The mouse pointer will return to
.
● You can Copy data by holding down [SHIFT] while you drag and drop the data.
● Using the Range Tool to select a region
When you click the Range button, the mouse pointer will change to
. When using the Range tool, the
initial portion of a note event needs to be located within the selected region. Otherwise, the note event is not
selected. When the initial portion of a note event lies within the selection box, the entire note event is selected.
When you enclose
a region like this,
M-278
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
these events are selected.
MV-8800_e.book 279 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Operations using the external display
● Using the Pencil tool to enter note event
When you click the Pencil button, the mouse pointer will change to
events.
1
. The pencil tool lets you enter note
Click the Pencil button.
You can enter the note event by clicking the mouse.
2. Use the Step Time parameter to select the length (note value) of the note events you want
to enter.
3. Use the Duration and Velocity parameters to specify the duration (the time that the note will
actually sound, relative to the Step Time) and velocity (the strength of the note) of the note
event.
4. Click the position that corresponds to the pitch you want to enter.
A note event of the specified length will be entered where you click.
● Using the Eraser Tool to delete a data
When you click the Eraser button, the mouse pointer will change to
clicking it with the Eraser tool.
. You can delete note event by
16
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-279
MV-8800_e.book 280 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Operations using the external display
Step Recording
● Step recording a MIDI track
Step Time
Explanation
Specifies the note value of the notes you will input.
Dot button
Adds a dot to the specified note value.
Step Time button
Click this button you specify the note value of the notes you will input.
Duration
Specifies the actual length of the note, as a percentage of the note value you specified for Step
Time.
Specifies the strength of the note.
Velocity
Note number
Piano Roll
Velocity View
The note numbers (keys) are shown from bottom to top. Since the actual pitches correspond
to the note numbers, the displayed location of the note tells you the pitch.
This shows the note events. The horizontal axis is time, and the vertical axis is note number
(pitch). you can change the note number or time location by moving the displayed note event.
Indicate the velocity of the note event. The velocity is shown as a pair with the note event; a
longer bar indicates a stronger velocity.
Explanation
Reverts the preceding input.
Connects (extends) the event at the current time to the next step.
Inputs a rest (silence).
M-280
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 281 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Operations using the external display
● Step recording an Audio track
Explanation
Step Time
Specifies the length of the audio events you will input.
Dot button
Adds a dot to the specified note value.
Step Time button
Click this button you specify the length of the audio events you will input.
Duration
Specifies the actual length of the audio event, as a percentage of the length you specified
for Step Time.
Specifies the strength of the audio event. Choose “Real” if you want the velocity of the note
to correspond to the strength with which you strike the velocity pad.
Velocity
Explanation
Reverts the preceding input.
Connects (extends) the event at the current time to the next step.
Inputs a rest (silence).
● If the Step Time parameter is set to Phrase or Meas, the dotted note setting is ignored.
● Step recording a Pattern track
Step Time
Explanation
Specifies the length of the pattern events you will input.
If you want to input the entire length of the pattern, set this to Pattern.
Dot button
Adds a dot to the specified note value.
Step Time button
Click this button you specify the length of the audio events you will input.
Reverts the preceding input.
Connects (extends) the event at the current time to the next step.This button is unavailable
if Step Time is set to Pattern.
The PUT PATTERN popup will appear.
Select the pattern that you want to input.
Inputs a rest (silence). This button is unavailable if Step Time is set to Pattern.
● If the Step Time parameter is set to Pattern, the dotted note setting is ignored, and [Tie] and [Rest] will also be
unavailable.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
Explanation
16
M-281
MV-8800_e.book 282 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Changing the color theme of the SONG screen and PATTERN screen
You can use the Color Theme function to specify the color of the SONG screen
and PATTERN screen shown in the built-in LCD and the VGA display. These two screens are quite similar in
the contents that they show, but you can change their color theme to make it easier to tell them apart.
1. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the lower row of icons, press [F3](Disp/Mouse). Alternatively,
you can select the DISPLAY/MOUSE icon and press [ENTER].
The DISPLAY/MOUSE screen (Screen Guide; p. 184) will appear.
fig.vga-mouse-screen
3. Set the Color Theme parameter (Song, Pattern).
1. Click “SYSTEM” on the menu bar.
2. Click “Display/MOUSE.”
The DISPLAY/MOUSE screen (Screen Guide; p. 184) will appear.
fig.vga-mouse-screen
3. Set the Color Theme parameter (Song, Pattern).
M-282
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 283 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Switching between SONG screen and PATTERN screen
Here’s how to switch between the SONG screen and PATTERN screen shown in the VGA display.
● If you switch the screen, the Undo/Redo data will be cleared.
Press [SONG] to display the SONG screen.
Press [PATTERN] to display the PATTERN screen.
1. Click “PATTERN” on the menu bar.
The PATTERN button will turn red, and the PATTERN screen will appear.
2. To return to the SONG screen, click the PATTERN button once again.
16
Using an external display and mouse to operate the MV-8800
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-283
MV-8800_e.book 284 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Switching between SONG screen and PATTERN screen
M-284
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 285 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 17
Using the velocity pads to display
images (Pix Jam)
You can import up to sixteen still images (photos) into each project, and display these images along with your music. You
can also make the images switch in synchronization with the sequencer playback. The images will be output from the VGA
OUT connector.
Importing images
Here’s how to import the images into the MV-8800 so that you can display them by striking the pads.
1. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the lower row of icons, press [F4](Pix Jam). Alternatively, select
the PIX JAM icon and press [ENTER].
The PIX JAM screen (Screen Guide; p. 185) will appear.
fig.pix-jam.eps
Using the velocity pads to display images (Pix Jam)
● Images can be output from the VGA OUT connector only when you’re using the build-in LCD as the operating
screen.
● In order to use this capability, you’ll need a VGA display (commercially available).
● You can use the following image formats.
• Bitmap (.BMP) format (uncompressed format only)
• JPEG (.JPG) format
● The MV-8800 is capable of displaying only 256 colors. The colors of the imported image are converted into the
closest of these colors for display.
● Only images that are 640 x 480 pixels in size can be displayed. Other sizes of images will not be displayed correctly.
17
• PAD
This shows how the images are assigned to the pads. A thumbnail of the assigned image is shown for each
pad.
3. Either strike the pad to which you want to import an image, or use the cursor to select it.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-285
MV-8800_e.book 286 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Importing images
4. Press [F5](Pix Assign).
The PIX ASSIGN screen (Screen Guide; p. 186) will appear.
fig.pix-assign.eps
Assigns the image file selected by the cursor to the pad you specify.
F-button
Explanation
[F1](Select Drive)
SELECT DRIVE popup will appear, where you can switch the current drive.
[F2](Clear)
Clears the image that was assigned to the selected pad.
A message will ask “Assign Clear. Are you sure?” If you press [F5] (Yes), the assignment will
be cleared.
[F3](Exchange)
Exchanges the image assigned to the selected pad with an image assigned to a different pad.
When press [F3](Exchange), the PIX EXCHANGE popup will appear. Specify the number of the
pad whose image that you want to exchange, and press [F5](Execute).
[F4](Copy)
Copies the selected pad’s assigned image to a different pad.
Press [F4](Copy), PIX COPY popup will appear. Specify the copy-destination pad number, and
press [F5](Execute).
[F5](Assign)
Assigns the image selected by the cursor to the pad you specify.
5. Select an image you want to import.
6. Press [F5](Assign).
● You can press [IMPORT] and import an image from the IMPORT screen. Use the cursor and [F3](Mark On/Off)
to select the image data you want to import, and press [F5](Import). The PIX QUICK ASSIGN popup will appear.
Use the Assign To field to specify the number of the pad to which you want to assign the image, and press
[F5](Execute). You can import up to sixteen files in a single operation.
Switching images by playing the pads
Here’s how you can play the pads to switch the image that’s being output from VGA OUT connector.
1. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the lower row of icons, press [F4](Pix Jam). Alternatively, select
the PIX JAM icon and press [ENTER].
The PIX JAM screen (Screen Guide; p. 185) will appear.
3. Strike a pad to which an image has been assigned.
The image assigned to the pad will be output from the VGA OUT connector.
M-286
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 287 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Importing images
Switching images in synchronization with sequencer playback
You can record image-switching events on the sequencer, so that images will switch in synchronization with
the sequencer playback.
● Recording the changes
1. Press [SONG] to access the SONG screen, or press [PATTERN] to access the PATTERN
screen.
2. Use CURSOR [
][
] to select a MIDI track you want to record.
Selected track is highlighted (that means current track). Recording occurs on the current track.
3. Press [F2](Track Param).
The TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a MIDI track) (Screen Guide; p. 11) will appear.
This track is used only for switching images.
● When the Output Assign parameter is set to Pix Jam, the PAD BANKS parameter setting is ignored.
5. Press [F5](Close).
The TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a MIDI track) (Screen Guide; p. 11) will close.
6. In the same way as for conventional realtime recording or step recording, strike the
appropriate pad at the moment you want the image to be switched.
Data that specifies the timing of the image switch will be recorded in the image switching track.
Using the velocity pads to display images (Pix Jam)
4. Set the Output Assign parameter to “Pix Jam.”
17
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-287
MV-8800_e.book 288 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Importing images
M-288
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 289 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 18
Connecting to your computer via USB
If your USB-equipped computer is connected to the USB connector on the MV-8800’s rear panel, you will be able to transfer
data between the two devices. WAV files or AIFF files saved on your computer can be loaded into the MV-8800 and used
as instruments or audio phrases.
To start communication with your computer
● When you connect the MV-8800 to your computer via USB, the standard USB driver will be used.
1. Use a USB cable to connect the MV-8800 and your computer.
2. Press [DISK/USB].
The DISK/USB MENU screen (Screen Guide p. 188) will appear.
3. Press [F3](USB), or use the cursor to select the USB icon and press [ENTER].
The USB screen (Screen Guide p. 194) will appear.
Communication between the MV-8800 and your computer will begin.
If the message “Save current Project before activating the USB connection” appears, press [F5](Yes) to save
the project if necessary.
Connecting to your computer via USB
4. Press [F5](Connect).
18
● Do not disconnect the USB cable while communication is enabled or data is being transferred. If you
do so, communication will be interrupted and the system will be unable to operate correctly, or the
transferred file may be damaged or lost.
● Once USB communication begins, the only operation possible on the MV-8800 will be to stop USB
communication by pressing [F5](Disconnect).
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-289
MV-8800_e.book 290 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Copying files from your computer to the MV-8800
● If your computer is able to use memory cards and MO disks etc., more than one removable disk may be
displayed. “Removable disks” will be displayed alphabetically in the order in which they were connected to the
computer. If you connected the MV-8800 last, the last removable disk will be the MV-8800.
● Windows Me/2000
1. On your desktop, double-click the “My Computer” icon.
The My Computer window will appear.
2. Double-click the “Removable Disk” icon.
The contents of the MV-8800’s hard disk will appear.
3. Drag and drop the files that you want to copy to the MV-8800 into the desired folder of the
MV-8800.
The files will be copied to the MV-8800.
● Windows XP
1. On your Start menu, click the “My Computer” icon.
The My Computer window will appear.
2. Double-click the “MV-8800HD” icon.
The contents of the MV-8800’s hard disk will appear.
3. Drag and drop the files that you want to copy to the MV-8800 into the desired folder of the
MV-8800.
The files will be copied to the MV-8800.
M-290
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 291 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Copying files from your computer to the MV-8800
● Mac OS 9.0.4 or later, Mac OS X (10.2 or later)
1. On your desktop, double-click the “MV-8800HD” icon.
The contents of the MV-8800’s hard disk will appear.
2. Drag and drop the files that you want to copy to the MV-8800 into the desired folder of the
MV-8800.
The files will be copied to the MV-8800.
Connecting to your computer via USB
18
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-291
MV-8800_e.book 292 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Backing up a project from the MV-8800 to your computer
● To back up a project, you must copy the “project folder.” Roland will not guarantee operation if you
manipulate individual files saved within a project folder.
● For details on the structure of the data saved within the MV-8800, refer to “Folder structure” (p. 242).
1. Connect the MV-8800 and your computer as described in “To start communication with
your computer” (p. 289).
Communication between the MV-8800 and your computer will begin.
2. View the contents of the MV-8800’s hard disk as described in “Copying files from your
computer to the MV-8800” (p. 290).
3. Double-click the “PROJECTS” folder.
You will see a list of folders for the projects that are saved in the MV-8800.
4. Drag and drop the entire folder for the project you want to back-up onto the hard disk of
your computer.
The project data will be copied to your computer.
M-292
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 293 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using your computer to delete unwanted files
● There is no way to recover data that has been deleted. (Unless, of course, you have previously made a
backup of that data.) Roland Corporation can accept no responsibility for any loss of data or any
damages you incur as a result of such loss.
1. Connect the MV-8800 and your computer as described in “To start communication with
your computer” (p. 289).
Communication between the MV-8800 and your computer will begin.
2. View the contents of the MV-8800’s hard disk as described in “Copying files from your
computer to the MV-8800” (p. 290).
3. Drag and drop the unwanted files into the Recycle Bin.
The data will be deleted from the MV-8800.
● You are completely free to overwrite or delete any folder or file saved on the MV-8800 that is visible from
your computer. Since it is also possible for you to overwrite or delete data that the MV-8800 requires in
order to function, you must be careful when performing file operations from your computer. Never
overwrite or delete a folder or file other than those described in “Folder structure” (p. 242). If you
overwrite or delete them, we cannot guarantee that the system will operate correctly.
Connecting to your computer via USB
18
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-293
MV-8800_e.book 294 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
To stop communication with your computer
1. Perform the following steps on your computer.
• Windows Me/2000/XP
Use the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon shown in the taskbar at the lower right of the screen to terminate the
connection with the MV-8800.
• Mac OS 9.0.4 or later
Drag the MV-8800HD icon from your desktop into the trash to terminate the connection.
• Mac OS X
Drag the MV-8800HD icon from your desktop into the trash to terminate the connection.
2. Press [F5](Disconnect).
Communication between the MV-8800 and your computer will stop.
M-294
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 295 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 19
Using MIDI devices
The MV-8800 has one MIDI IN connector and two MIDI OUT connectors.
You can connect a MIDI controller (MIDI keyboard, MIDI guitar, MIDI percussion pads, etc.) to MIDI IN and record your
performance on the MV-8800. You can connect sound modules to the two MIDI OUT connectors, and control sixteen MIDI
channels from each connector (for a total of 32 MIDI channels).
Playing a connected external MIDI sound module
Performance data recorded on the MV-8800’s sequencer can be sent to a MIDI sound module etc. connected
to the MIDI OUT connector.
1. Connect the MV-8800’s MIDI OUT connector to your MIDI sound module as described in
“Preparing your equipment and making connections” (p. 26).
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT A/B
AC cord
Sound module
2. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
3. Use CURSOR [
] [ ] to select the MIDI track on which the performance data you want to
transmit has been recorded.
4. Press [F1](Track Param).
The TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a MIDI track) (Screen Guide; p. 11) will appear.
Select the MIDI connector and channel on which you want to transmit the performance data.
Value
Output destination
Channel
A1
MIDI OUT A
1
:
16
MIDI OUT B
:
1
:
B16
R1
19
:
A16
B1
Using MIDI devices
5. Set the MIDI parameter.
16
R-BUS
1
:
:
R16
16
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-295
MV-8800_e.book 296 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Playing a connected external MIDI sound module
Using the sliders to control an external MIDI sound module (Assignable Sliders)
You can use the MV-8800’s sliders to send control change messages to a connected external device.
1. Press [ASSIGNABLE SLIDER].
[ASSIGNABLE SLIDER] will light orange, indicating that sliders 1–8 are in Assignable Slider mode.
● When [ASSIGNABLE SLIDER] is lit orange, the sliders will transmit the assigned control change messages
regardless of the screen in which you are.
2. Move sliders 1–8 to transmit control change messages. The control change messages will
be transmitted from MIDI OUT. Each slider transmits the following control change
message.
Slider
Control change
Number
Message
1
7
Volume
2
10
Pan
3
91
Reverb Send level
4
93
Chorus Send Level
5
74
Cutoff Frequency
6
71
Resonance
7
73
Attack Time
8
72
Release Time
● You can change the control change numbers that are transmitted.
● Changing the control change messages that are transmitted
Here’s how you can assign different control change messages to the sliders.
1. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the lower row of icons, press [F1](Slider). Alternatively, you can
select the SLIDER icon and press [ENTER].
The ASSIGNABLE SLIDER screen (Screen Guide; p. 182) will appear.
3. Edit the Slider Assign parameters.
For each slider, specify the control change number that you want to assign. The message transmitted by the
slider will change according to the control change number you specify.
● The control change number table in the lower part of the screen will change according to the control change
numbers you assign.
M-296
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 297 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Playing the MV-8800 from an external MIDI device
Recording your playing from a MIDI keyboard
Here’s how your playing on a MIDI keyboard connected to the MIDI IN connector can be input to the MV-8800
and recorded on the sequencer.
● The MV-8800 receives performance data from its MIDI IN connector in “omni mode.” This means that it will
receive all MIDI data without distinguishing its MIDI channel.
1. Connect your MIDI keyboard to the MV-8800’s MIDI IN connector as described in
“Preparing your equipment and making connections” (p. 26).
MIDI OUT
AC cord
MIDI IN
MIDI keyboard
2. Begin sequence recording as described in “Basic procedure for realtime recording” (p.
152).
Your keyboard performance will be recorded on the sequencer.
Using MIDI devices
19
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-297
MV-8800_e.book 298 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Playing the MV-8800 from an external MIDI device
Using the MV-8800 in Multi Timbre Sampler Mode
You can use the MV-8800 as a multi-timbral sound module.
To do so, put the MV-8800 in “Multi Timbre Sampler mode.” In Multi Timbre Sampler mode, multiple channels
of MIDI performance data can be received from a connected external MIDI sequencer and used to play the
MV-8800’s instruments and audio phrases.
● Certain limitations apply when Multi Timbre Sampler mode is on. For details, refer to “Performance Data Flow
in Multi Timbre Sampler Mode” (p. 299) and “Limitations when Multi Timbre Sampler Mode is On” (p. 299).
● Playing the MV-8800 from an externally-connected sequencer
1. Connect your MIDI sequencer to the MV-8800’s MIDI IN connector as described in
“Preparing your equipment and making connections” (p. 26).
MIDI cable
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Sequencer
MV-8800
2. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
3. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F3](MIDI). Alternatively, you can
select the MIDI icon and press [ETNER].
The MIDI screen (Screen Guide; p. 177) will appear.
4. Turn the Multi Timbre Sample Mode parameter On.
In this state, multiple MIDI channels of performance data can be received from the sequencer connected to
the MIDI IN connector. When the MV-8800 receives this data, it can play instruments or audio phrases, or
modify its MFX parameters.
● When the Multi Timbre Sampler Mode parameter is on, your external MIDI device will also be able to play audio
phrases on the channel specified by the Audio Phrase Rx Channel parameter.
5. Start playback on your external sequencer.
The performance data from the connected sequencer will play the MV-8800’s instruments or audio phrases,
or modify its MFX parameters.
M-298
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 299 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Playing the MV-8800 from an external MIDI device
Performance Data Flow in Multi Timbre Sampler Mode
As shown below, the performance data flow differs depending on the Multi Timbre Sampler Mode setting in the MIDI
screen.
● When Off (normal)
fig.multitimbre-off
MIDI OUT A/B
MIDI IN
MV-8800
MIDI Ch. 1
:
MIDI Ch. 16
Velocity Pads
Sequencer
Instruments
(1–16)
Performance data received at MIDI IN or from the velocity pads is sent to MIDI OUT and/or plays the
MV-8800’s instruments according to the Output Assign parameter and Output Assign MIDI parameter of
the current track.
● When On
The MV-8800 will operate in the following way.
fig.multitimbre-on
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT A/B
MV-8800
Velocity Pads
Sequencer
Instruments
• Operate as a multi-timbral sound module
Limitations when Multi Timbre Sampler Mode is On
• Performance data from the velocity pads cannot be sent to the internal sound generator.
Using MIDI devices
Performance data received at MIDI IN is sent to the sampler section (instruments, audio phrases, and
MFX). If the MIDI screen’s (Screen Guide; p. 177) Audio Phrase Rx Channel parameter or MFX RxChannel
parameter is Off, each instrument will receive performance data on the MIDI channel that matches its part
number.
19
• Performance data cannot be recorded on the MV-8800’s internal sequencer.
• Multi Timbre Sampler Mode is available only while the following screens are displayed.
- SONG screen
- PATTERN screen
- INSTRUMENTS screen (performance data from the velocity pads is not transmitted)
- EFFECTS screen
- MIXER screen
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-299
MV-8800_e.book 300 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Playing the MV-8800 from an external MIDI device
Playing audio phrases from an external MIDI device
In Multi timbre Sampler mode, the MV-8800 can receive note messages from an external MIDI device to play
audio phrases.
1. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F3](MIDI). Alternatively, select the
MIDI icon and press [ENTER].
The MIDI screen (Screen Guide; p. 177) will appear.
fig.midi.eps
3. Turn the Multi Timbre Sample Mode parameter On.
4. Set Audio Phrase Rx Channel parameter same as the channel from the external MIDI
device.
Note messages from the external MIDI device (or external MIDI sequencer) will play audio phrases.
● How the MIDI receive channel determines the sound source that will play
(When Multi Timbre Sampler Mode = On)
When Audio Phrase Rx Channel = Off
When Audio Phrase Rx Channel = other than Off
All MIDI channels can play instrument parts corresponding
to their respective channel numbers. Audio phrases
playback cannot be controlled by MIDI (note messages).
Note messages on the MIDI channel specified by Audio
Phrase Rx Channel can play audio phrases. This means
that the instrument part of that channel number cannot be
played. On the remaining MIDI channels, you can play the
instrument parts corresponding to their respective channel
numbers.
● MIDI note numbers and audio phrases (pad numbers)
Only the audio phrases of pad banks 1–8 can be played from an external MIDI device.
M-300
MIDI Note number
Pad number
0 (C -)
Pad 01-01
1 (C#-)
Pad 01-02
2 (D -)
Pad 01-03
:
:
127 (G 9)
Pad 08-16
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 301 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Playing the MV-8800 from an external MIDI device
Controlling MFX from an external MIDI device
In Multi Timbre Sampler Mode, control change or other messages from an external MIDI device can be used
to control MFX.
1. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
2. When the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F3](MIDI). Alternatively, select
the MIDI icon and press [ENTER].
The MIDI screen (Screen Guide; p. 177) will appear.
fig.midi.eps
3. Turn the Multi Timbre Sample Mode parameter On.
4. Set MFX Rx Channel parameter same as the channel from the external MIDI device.
MFX will be controlled by control change or other messages from your external MIDI device (or external MIDI
sequencer).
● If the MFX Rx Channel parameter is set to anything other than Off, MIDI messages on the same channel as the
setting for this parameter will be received by MFX, and not by the instrument part.
● If the Audio Phrase Rx Channel parameter and the MFX Rx Channel parameter are set to the same value, the
MIDI messages will be received by the audio phrase, and not by MFX.
● MIDI messages received by MFX, and their result
Result
Control the parameters assigned to the C (control) knobs
Control change (number: 1)
Modulation for the analog modeling bass
Note on/off
Note on/off for the analog modeling bass
Pitch bend
Pitch bend for the analog modeling bass
Using MIDI devices
MIDI messages
Control change (number: 16–18)
19
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-301
MV-8800_e.book 302 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Synchronizing the MV-8800 with a connected external sequencer
The MV-8800 can be operated in synchronization with an external MIDI sequencer or hard disk recorder.
Please read the owner’s manual for your device in conjunction with the explanation that follows.
The MV-8800 can be synchronized with an external MIDI device in two ways; using MTC (MIDI Time Code)
or using MIDI Clock.
When operating in synchronization with an external device, the device that transmits MTC or MIDI clock,
serving as the timing reference, is called the “master.”
Conversely, the device that receives MTC or MIDI clock and follows the timing reference device is called the
“slave.”
Synchronizing with an external device (Master)
Here’s how you can make an externally-connected sequencer or hard disk recorder operate in synchronization
with the MIDI Clock or MTC (MIDI Time Code) messages transmitted by the MV-8800.
In the following procedure, we make settings so that MMC (MIDI Machine Control) can be used to remotely
control an external sequencer or hard disk recorder.
❍ Song mode
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
2. Press [F1](Song Menu).
The SONG MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 78) will appear.
3. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F2](Sync). Alternatively, select the
SYNC icon and press [ENTER].
The SYNC screen (Screen Guide; p. 81) will appear.
4. Specify the synchronization reference signal.
Set the Sync Mode parameter to Master. Set the MIDI Clock parameter if you want to use MIDI Clock for
synchronization, or the MTC parameter if you want to use MTC for synchronization.
5. Specify the MMC setting.
Set the MMC Mode parameter to Master, and set the Output parameter “On” for the MIDI connector from which
you want to transmit MMC.
M-302
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 303 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Synchronizing the MV-8800 with a connected external sequencer
6. Make synchronization settings on the external sequencer or hard disk recorder (slave
device) that is connected to the MV-8800.
For the procedure, refer to the owner’s manual of the slave device.
Synchronization signal
MV-8800 setting
External device setting
MIDI Clock
Set the Output parameter “On” for the MIDI connector
from which you want to transmit MIDI Clock.
Make settings so that MIDI Clock
will be received (Slave).
MTC
Set the Output parameter “On” for the MIDI connector
from which you want to transmit MTC.
MTC synchronization is not possible unless the same
frame rate is selected on both devices. On the
MV-8800, this is set by the Frame Rate parameter.
Make settings so that MTC will
be received (Slave).
● In order to synchronize using MTC, the frame rate of both devices must match in order for synchronization to
occur correctly. On the MV-8800, this setting is made by the Frame Rate parameter.
7. Set the receiving sequencer or hard disk recorder to operate as the MMC slave
For details, refer to the owner’s manual of the receiving device.
8. Press the MV-8800’s [PLAY ( )].
The current time (measure - beat - tick) of the connected external device will synchronize with the MV-8800’s
current time (measure - beat - tick), and the devices will operate (play) in synchronization.
❍ Pattern Mode
1. Press [PATTERN].
The PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91) will appear.
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select Pattern Sync and press [F5](Select).
The PATTERN SYNC screen (Screen Guide; p. 94) will appear.
The rest of the procedure is the same as in Song mode.
Using MIDI devices
19
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-303
MV-8800_e.book 304 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Synchronizing the MV-8800 with a connected external sequencer
Synchronized operation with external devices (Slave)
● Receive and synchronize to MIDI Clock
MIDI Clock messages from an externally connected sequencer or recorder (“master device”) can be received
by the MV-8800, causing the MV-8800 to operate in synchronization as a slave device.
The example given below is a setup in which a sequencer is the master device, and the MV-8800 receives
MIDI Clock messages at its MIDI IN.
● When the MV-8800 is operating as a synchronization slave, the synchronization signals can be received
through either the MV-8800’s MIDI IN connector or the MIDI IN connector of the DIF-AT24. However, you must
set the Sync Mode (Screen Guide; p. 81) to specify the connector through which the synchronization signals
are to be received.
fig.MV-MIDI-909.e
MIDI Cable
MIDI Clock
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Sequencer
MV-8800
❍ Song mode
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
2. Press [F1](Song Menu).
The SONG MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 78) will appear.
3. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F2](Sync). Alternatively, select the
SYNC icon and press [ENTER].
The SYNC screen (Screen Guide; p. 81) will appear.
fig.sync-screen.eps
M-304
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 305 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Synchronizing the MV-8800 with a connected external sequencer
4. Set the synchronization parameters.
Here you will set parameters to specify how MIDI Clock synchronization will occur. Refer to the table below,
and make the appropriate settings on the MV-8800 and on the externally connected master device (the
sequencer or recorder that is transmitting the synchronization signals). For details on how to make settings on
your master device, refer to its owner’s manual.
Parameter
Setting on the MV-8800
Settings on the externally connected master device
Sync Mode
Slave-MIDI (MIDI)
Set the device so that it will transmit MIDI Clock messages (Master).
● For an explanation of the other parameters, refer to “SYNC screen” (Screen Guide; p. 81).
● When synchronized as a MIDI Clock slave, “Wait Note” of the Count In setting is not available.
5. Play back the master device.
Press the PLAY button on the master device; the MV-8800 will begin running in synchronization.
❍ Pattern Mode
1. Press [PATTERN].
The PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91) will appear.
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
3. Select Pattern Sync and press [F5](Select).
The PATTERN SYNC screen (Screen Guide; p. 94) will appear.
The rest of the procedure is the same as in Song mode.
Using MIDI devices
19
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-305
MV-8800_e.book 306 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Synchronizing the MV-8800 with a connected external sequencer
● Receive and synchronize to MTC
MTC messages from an externally connected sequencer or recorder (“master device”) can be received by the
MV-8800, causing the MV-8800 to operate in synchronization as a slave device.
The example given below is a setup in which a recorder is the master device, and the MV-8800 receives MTC
messages at its MIDI IN.
● When the MV-8800 is operating as a synchronization slave, the synchronization signals can be received
through either the MV-8800’s MIDI IN connector or the MIDI IN connector of the DIF-AT24. However, you must
set the Sync Mode (Screen Guide; p. 81) to specify the connector through which the synchronization signals
are to be received.
fig.MV-clock-2400CD.e
MIDI Cable
MTC/MMC
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MV-8800
Recorder
❍ Song mode
1. Press [SONG].
The SONG screen (Screen Guide; p. 8) will appear.
2. Press [F1](Song Menu).
The SONG MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 78) will appear.
3. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F2](Sync). Alternatively, select the
SYNC icon and press [ENTER].
The SYNC screen (Screen Guide; p. 81) will appear.
fig.sync-screen.eps
M-306
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 307 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Synchronizing the MV-8800 with a connected external sequencer
4. Set the synchronization parameters.
Here you will set parameters to specify how MTC synchronization will occur. Refer to the table below, and
make the appropriate settings on the MV-8800 and on the externally connected master device (the sequencer
or recorder that is transmitting the synchronization signals). For details on how to make settings on your
master device, refer to its owner’s manual.
Parameter
Setting on the MV-8800
Settings on the externally connected master device
Sync Mode
Slave-MTC (MIDI)
Set the device so that it will transmit MTC messages (Master).
MTC Frame Rate
Same as the frame rate setting
of the master device.
For details on how to make settings on your master device,
refer to its owner’s manual.
5. Set the MMC parameters.
Here you will make settings to allow MMC remote control from the externally connected device.
Refer to the table below, and make the appropriate settings on the MV-8800 and on the externally connected
master device (the sequencer or recorder that is transmitting the synchronization signals). For details on how
to make settings on your master device, refer to its owner’s manual.
Parameter
Setting on the MV-8800
Settings on the externally connected master device
MMC Mode
Slave (MIDI)
Set the device so that it will transmit MMC messages (Master).
6. Play back the master device.
Press the PLAY button on the master device; MMC messages will be transmitted to the MV-8800, and the
MV-8800 will begin running. Then MTC messages will be transmitted from the master device, causing the
MV-8800 to synchronize with the MTC data.
● During synchronized playback as an MTC slave, there may be cases in which a track containing a long audio
event drifts out of playback synchronization with other tracks. This occurs because MTC synchronization is not
able to adjust the playback speed of an audio event, and is not a malfunction.
● When synchronized as a MTC slave, loop playback and count-in recording are not available.
❍ Pattern Mode
1. Press [PATTERN].
The PATTERN screen (Screen Guide; p. 91) will appear.
2. Press [MENU].
The MENU popup will appear.
Using MIDI devices
3. Select Pattern Sync and press [F5](Select).
The PATTERN SYNC screen (Screen Guide; p. 94) will appear.
The rest of the procedure is the same as in Song mode.
19
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-307
MV-8800_e.book 308 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Synchronizing the MV-8800 with a connected external sequencer
If the sequencer does not operate when MMC is received
Since MMC commands are exclusive messages, the MV-8800 will not follow them unless its Device ID matches.
Use the following procedure to set the Device ID.
1. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F3](MIDI). Alternatively,
select the MIDI icon and press [ENTER].
The MIDI screen (Screen Guide; p. 177) will appear.
3. Set the Device ID.
Set this value to match the Device ID setting of the MMC messages that are being sent to the
MV-8800.
● If the incoming messages have a device ID of “7F” (Broadcast), the messages will be received regardless of
the Device ID setting.
M-308
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 309 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Monitoring the MIDI connection status
The MV-8800 can transmit “Active Sensing messages” at regular intervals. If the MIDI cable is broken or
disconnected, these messages will no longer be received by the receiving device.
By continually checking for these messages, the receiving device can determine whether a cable has been
disconnected etc. while a note is sounding, and therefore prevent problems such as “stuck notes.”
1. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F3](MIDI). Alternatively, select the
MIDI icon and press [ENTER].
The MIDI screen (Screen Guide; p. 177) will appear.
3. Set the Tx Active Sensing parameter.
If this is On, the MV-8800 will transmit Active Sensing messages.
● If you switch Tx Active Sensing from On to Off while a MIDI device is connected, the receiving device may
display an error indicating that reception has ceased; this is not a malfunction.
● The MV-8800 can also monitor the connection state by monitoring Active Sensing messages it receives from
an external device. If reception ceases while these messages are being received, it will indicate “MIDI Offline.”
Using MIDI devices
19
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-309
MV-8800_e.book 310 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Monitoring the MIDI connection status
M-310
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 311 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 20
About V-LINK
What is V-LINK?
V-LINK (
) is a function that allows music and images to be performed together. By using MIDI to
connect two or more V-LINK compatible devices, you can easily enjoy performing a wide range of visual
effects that are linked to the expressive elements of a music performance.
● For example...
If you use the MV-8800 with an Edirol PR-50 and MD-P1, you can
• Use the MV-8800 to remotely make performance settings on the Edirol PR-50 and MD-P1.
• Use the MV-8800’s sequencer to create synchronized music and video performances.
• Use the MV-8800’s pads to switch images (clips/palettes).
• Use the MV-8800’s sliders to control the brightness or color of the images.
● In order to use the MV-8800 with the Edirol PR-50 via V-LINK, you will need an Edirol UM-1EX (sold separately)
for connections.
● If you use the MV-8800 with the Edirol MD-P1, you can control section A of MD-P1.
When the MV-8800 is used together with the Roland Fantom-X
• You can use the Roland Fantom-X’s sequencer to enjoy synchronized performance of music and
images.
• You can switch the MV-8800’s images (Pix Jam) from the Roland Fantom-X.
The MV-8800’s V-LINK functionality
About V-LINK
The MV-8800 supports two types of V-LINK functionality: “V-LINK master functionality,” in which the MV-8800
controls an external V-LINK device, and “V-LINK slave” functionality, in which an external V-LINK device
controls the MV-8800.
20
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-311
MV-8800_e.book 312 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using the MV-8800 to operate an external V-LINK device (V-LINK Master)
Example connections
● Before you make connections, you must turn down the volume of all devices and turn off the power to avoid
malfunctions or speaker damage.
● Connections with the Edirol PR-50
Connect the MV-8800’s MIDI OUT connector via an Edirol UM-1EX etc. to the Edirol PR-50’s REMOTE connector.
Edirol UM-1EX
Edirol PR-50
Projector
REMOTE
MIDI OUTA or B
Display
MV-8800
● Connections with the Edirol MD-P1
Use a MIDI cable to connect the MV-8800’s MIDI OUT connector to the Edirol MD-P1’s MIDI IN connector.
MIDI OUT A or B
MIDI IN
USB
Edirol MD-P1
Computer
MV-8800
Switching V-LINK on/off
1. Press [V-LINK].
[V-LINK] will light blue, and the V-LINK function will be turned On (i.e., V-LINK will be available). You can
operate the MV-8800’s pads to control the images in synchronization with your performance on the MV-8800.
● When you press [V-LINK] on the MV-8800, it will operate as the “V-LINK master” which controls an external
V-LINK device.
2. Press [V-LINK] once again.
[V-LINK] will go dark, and the V-LINK function will be turned Off (normal operating mode).
Making V-LINK settings
1. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F4](V-Link). Alternatively, select
the V-LINK icon and press [ENTER].
The V-LINK screen (Screen Guide; p. 179) will appear.
M-312
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 313 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using the MV-8800 to operate an external V-LINK device (V-LINK Master)
3. Specify the MIDI transmit channel and other parameters as desired.
For details on the function of these parameters, refer to “V-LINK screen” (Screen Guide; p. 179).
V-LINK Function chart
When V-LINK function is on, you can use the following functions.
Functions preceded by an indication of “MD:” are MD-P1 functions.
V-LINK function
Uses controller
Transmitted MIDI message
Changing Clip
Velocity Pads
Program change: 00H-0FH
Changing Clip Bank
[PAD BANKS]
CC 00 (Bank select):
00H-1FH (Audio track)
00H-05H (MIDI track)
00H-07H (Pattern track)
Disolve Time
Slider
CC 05 (Porta Time)
Color Cb Ctrl
Slider
CC 70 (SoundCtrl 1)
Color Cr Ctrl
Slider
CC 73 (Attack Tm)
Brightness Ctrl
Slider
CC 75 (Decay Tm)
VFX1 Ctrl
Slider
CC 76 (Vib Rate)
VFX2 Ctrl
Slider
CC 77 (Vib Depth)
VFX3 Ctrl
Slider
CC 78 (Vin Decay)
VFX4 Ctrl
Slider
CC 79 (SoundCtrl10)
Fade Ctrl
Slider
CC 95 (Phaser)
MD:ColorEQ Fore
Slider
CC 01 (Modulation)
MD:ColorEQ Back
Slider
CC 71 (Resonance)
MD:Speed Knob
Slider
CC 08 (Balance)
MD:Total Fader
Slider
CC 10 (Pan)
MD:Cross Fader
Slider
CC 11 (Expression)
MD:Assign Knob
Slider
CC 72 (Release Tm)
MD:Visual Knob
Slider
CC 74 (Cutoff)
MD:Total Select
Slider
CC 85
MD:FX Select
Slider
CC 86
MD:Play Pos
Slider
CC 91 (Reverb)
MD:LoopStartPos
Slider
CC 92 (Tremolo)
MD:LoopEndPos
Slider
CC 93 (Chorus)
MD:LayerModeSel
Slider
CC 94 (Celeste)
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
About V-LINK
● The MV-8800 does not support the Edirol PR-50’s Dual Stream mode.
● The MV-8800 does not support the MD-P1’s section B and MIDI Note plug-in control.
● For the Control Ch parameter, select the MIDI connector to which your V-LINK device is connected.
● You can change the transmitted MIDI message used by sliders. For details refer to “V-LINK screen” (Screen
Guide; p. 179).
● You use [PAD BANK] to switch banks, a CC 00 message and Program Change are successively transmitted
when you strike a velocity pad.
● When switching palettes, the range of selectable banks will depend on the type of the current track (audio track,
MIDI track, and pattern track).
● Please also read the owner’s manual of the V-LINK device you are using.
20
M-313
MV-8800_e.book 314 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using V-LINK from an external device (V-LINK Slave)
You can turn the V-LINK Slave function on from another V-LINK device connected to the MV-8800. In this
case, the MV-8800 will receive control messages from the external device, and will switch the images that it
is outputting.
When the MV-8800 receives a MIDI exclusive V-LINK ON message at the MIDI connector specified by its Rx
Select parameter, its Rx Sw parameter will be turned On. In this state, the MV-8800 can receive various
V-LINK messages for setup or control (V-LINK Slave functionality). The MIDI messages that can be received
when the V-LINK Slave function is on are the same as when V-LINK is off.
1. Connect your external V-LINK device to the MV-8800.
Use a MIDI cable to connect the external device’s MIDI OUT connector to the MV-8800’s MIDI IN connector.
2. Press [SHIFT] + [V-LINK].
The V-LINK screen (Screen Guide; p. 179) will appear.
3. Press [F2](Slave).
The V-LINK (SLAVE) screen (Screen Guide; p. 180) will appear.
fig.vlink.eps
• Rx Select
This switch specifies the connector at which V-LINK ON messages transmitted by an external device will be
received.
Range:
Off, MIDI, R-BUS
• Rx Sw / [F5](V-LINK Rx Sw)
This switch makes the MV-8800 operate as a V-LINK slave device. Normally, this will automatically turn On
when a V-LINK ON message is received from an external device.
Range:
Off, On
• Rx Channel
This specifies the MIDI channel on which V-LINK messages will be received.
Range:
1 – 16, Off
• Note Mode
This lets you use note messages to switch images. The following table shows the note messages that can be
received and the images that they will select.
Note Message
-20(-G#0)
21 (A 0)
22 (A#0)
:
36 (C 2)
37 (C#2)
38 (D 2)
:
52 (E 3)
:
127 (G 9)
Range:
Image
image does not switch
1
2
:
16
1
2
:
16
:
11
Off, On
4. Set the Rx Select parameter to the connector to which you’ve connected your V-LINK
device.
M-314
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 315 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using V-LINK from an external device (V-LINK Slave)
5. Press the V-LINK button of your external device.
The Rx Sw will automatically be turned On. Now control messages from the external device can be received
by the MV-8800 to switch the images that are being output.
● When the MV-8800 receives a V-LINK ON message, it will begin functioning as a V-LINK slave device. Since
images will be output from the VGA OUT connector, the operating screen will automatically be switched to the
built-in LCD.
About the V-LINK messages
• V-LINK (Model ID= 00H 51H)
MV-8800 receives V-Link message only from the MIDI connector specified on Rx Select parameter.
Note regarding using the V-LINK
● The following conditions must be satisfied in order to receive V-LINK messages.
• MV-8800 must be started up before the external MIDI device’s V-LINK button is
pressed.
• In order to receive V-LINK messages, you must set the Rx Select parameter to the
MIDI connector to which the V-LINK device is connected.
• The functions that can be controlled may vary with the V-LINK compatible MIDI
device.
● If the incoming message has a device ID of “7F” (broadcast), the message will be received regardless of the
Device ID parameter setting.
● The functions that can be controlled will depend on the V-LINK device that’s connected.
Refer to the owner’s manual for each MIDI device for more information on the device’s compatibility.
About V-LINK
20
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-315
MV-8800_e.book 316 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Using V-LINK from an external device (V-LINK Slave)
M-316
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 317 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 21
Other functions
Settings for the entire MV-8800
Here’s how to make settings that affect the overall operation of the MV-8800.
1. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F1](Global). Alternatively, select
the GLOBAL icon and press [ENTER].
The GLOBAL screen (Screen Guide; p. 173) will appear.
● For details on all parameters, refer to “GLOBAL screen” (Screen Guide; p. 173).
• Input Select
Specifies the connector that will be used for input to the MV-8800.
• Sampler Output Gain
Adjusts the level (volume) at which the sample will play. The audio output from the sampler may be distorted
if this parameter is set to a high value.
• Digital Out Copy Protect
If this is turned On, copy protection data will be added to the signal that is output from the OUTPUT DIGITAL
A,B connectors.
Other functions
• Digital Output Select
Selects the audio signal that will be output from the OUTPUT DIGITAL A and B connector.
• Master Tune
Adjusts the overall tuning of the MV-8800. The displayed value is the frequency of the A4 key (middle A).
• Preview Length
Specifies the duration of playback when you press PREVIEW [TO (
)] [FROM (
21
)].
• HD Format Protect
If this is On, it will not be possible to format the hard disk.
• Power Up Mode
Selects the mode in which the sequencer will be at power-up.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-317
MV-8800_e.book 318 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Settings for the MV-8800’s velocity pads
1. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F2](Pad/Panel). Alternatively,
select the PAD/PANEL icon and press [ENTER].
The PAD screen (Screen Guide; p. 174) will appear.
● For details on all parameters, refer to “PAD screen” (Screen Guide; p. 174).
• Pad Sens
Specifies the sensitivity of the velocity pads.
• Pad Trigger Threshold
The velocity pads will respond only when struck more strongly than the value you specify here.
• Fixed Velocity Level
Specifies the velocity level at which the pads will be fixed if the [FIXED VELOCITY] is turned on.
• Pad Aftertouch Type
Specifies the type of aftertouch that will be transmitted when you apply pressure to the velocity pads.
• Pad Aftertouch Sens
Specifies the sensitivity for the aftertouch that is transmitted when you apply pressure to the velocity pads.
• Pad Roll Interval
Specifies the spacing of the roll when you use the pads to play a roll.
● Adjusting the sensitivity of the velocity pads
By adjusting the Pad Sens value, you can change the relationship between the strength at which you strike
the velocity pads and the volume that is produced.
● Minimizing double triggering from the velocity pads
In some cases, striking a pad may cause a pad you didn’t strike to sound as well.
This is because depending on the location or force of your strike, the vibration may also affect another pad.
You can reduce such problems by adjusting the Pad Trigger Threshold parameter.
● Performing with aftertouch
Use the Pad Aftertouch Type parameter to specify whether channel aftertouch or polyphonic aftertouch will be
transmitted when you apply pressure to the velocity pads. Use the Pad Aftertouch Sens parameter to adjust
the aftertouch sensitivity. If you turn the Pad Aftertouch Sens parameter Off, aftertouch will not be transmitted.
M-318
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 319 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Setting for the MV-8800’s sliders and buttons
1. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (Screen Guide; p. 172) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F2](Pad/Panel). Alternatively,
select the PAD/PANEL icon and press [ENTER].
The PAD screen (Screen Guide; p. 174) will appear.
3. Press [F2](Panel).
The PANEL screen (Screen Guide; p. 175) will appear.
• Shift Lock
Specifies how the [SHIFT] button will operate.
• Foot Switch
Specifies the behavior of the device connected to the FOOT SWITCH connector.
• Foot Switch Polarity
Switches the polarity of the foot switch.
• Slider Mode
Specifies how operation will occur when the position of the slider differs from the value of the parameter.
• Knob Mode
Specifies how operation will occur when the C (control) knob position differs from the value of the parameter.
• Tap Tempo
If this is turned Off, the Tap Tempo function will not be available.
• Tap Resolution
Specifies the beat interval by which the tempo will be set when you use the Tap Tempo function.
Other functions
21
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-319
MV-8800_e.book 320 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Setting for the MV-8800’s sliders and buttons
● Using a foot switch
You can connect a Roland DP-2 (sold separately) or Boss FS-5U (sold separately) to the rear panel FOOT
SWITCH jack and use it to operate the MV-8800.
This selects the polarity of the foot switch. Select “Standard” if you’re using a Roland DP-2. If you’re using a
Boss FS-5U, select “Standard” and set the polarity switch of the FS-5U as shown in the diagram.
● Changing how the sliders and knobs operate
A wide variety of parameters can be assigned to the sliders and knobs. This means that when you switch
screens, the parameter values displayed in the screen may not match the physical location of the sliders and
knobs. You can specify how the parameter will change when you operate a slider or knob in such cases.
Slider Mode specifies how the parameter will change when you operate a slider. Knob Mode specifies how the
parameter will change when you operate a knob.
M-320
Value
Explanation
Null
The slider (knob) will not begin controlling the value until you move the slider (knob) to a position that
corresponds with the displayed value.
< Example: the slider controls a value in a range of 0 to 10 >
If the slider is positioned at 5 and the displayed value is 2, the displayed value will not change until you
move the slider to the 2 position.
Jump
The instant you move the slider (knob), the displayed value will immediately change to the position of
the slider (knob).
Relative
Moving the slider (knob) will produce a relative change in the displayed value.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 321 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Checking the system status
Viewing the system information
Here’s how to check the MV-8800’s internal software version, the amount of currently-installed memory, and
the options that are installed.
1. Press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM MENU screen (p. 172) will appear.
2. With the cursor located in the upper row of icons, press [F5](SysInfo). Alternatively, select
the SYSTEM INFO icon and press [ENTER].
The SYSTEM INFORMATION screen (Screen Guide; p. 181) will appear.
Testing the installed memory
Here’s how to perform a read/write test of the wave memory installed in the MV-8800.
1. Access the SYSTEM INFORMATION screen as described in “Viewing the system
information” (p. 321).
2. Press [F1](DIMM Diag).
The display will ask “With Diagnosis, samples on the wave memory will be lost. Save current Project before?”
● There is no way to recover the data that has been erased. (Unless, of course, you have previously made a
backup of that data.) Roland Corporation can accept no responsibility for any loss of data or any damages you
incur as a result of such loss.
Other functions
21
F-button
Action
[F1](No)
The message “Samples in wave memory will be lost. Are you really sure?” will appear.
If you press [F5] (Yes), the memory test will be performed without saving the current project.
If you press [F1] (No), the test will be cancelled and you will return to the SYSTEM INFORMATION
screen.
[F5](Yes)
Saves the current project, and then executes the Memory Diagnosis operation.
[EXIT]
Cancels the operation.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-321
MV-8800_e.book 322 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Checking the system status
While the test is being performed the display will indicate “Now Processing...”
When checking is completed, the result will be displayed.
Display
Result
Memory Diagnosis: OK
The memory is functioning normally.
Memory Diagnosis: NG
A problem was found in the installed memory. Please replace the memory as described
in “Exchanging the memory (removing and installing)” (p. 324).
● If this test produces a result of NG, there is a problem with the installed DIMM. Since data cannot be read/written
correctly to this DIMM, it may cause problems with the operation of the MV-8800. Please replace the DIMM (p.
324).
3. After noting the result of the test, press [F5](Close).
Resetting the MV-8800’s parameters to the factory settings
Here’s how to initialize all system parameters of the MV-8800 to their factory settings.
● This operation initializes only system parameters; it does not erase the samples or library data saved on the
hard disk.
1. Access the SYSTEM INFORMATION screen as described in “Viewing the system
information” (p. 321).
2. Press [F3](Initialize).
The display will ask “Initialize system parameters. Are you sure?”
M-322
F-button
Action
[F1](No)
Cancels the operation.
[F5](Yes)
Initializes the system parameters.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 323 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 22
Adding options
Expanding the memory
When shipped from the factory, the MV-8800 contains 128 MB of memory used to load sound samples. This
amount of memory may not be sufficient if you want to load large amounts of sample data. If so, you can
expand the memory by replacing the factory-installed 128 MB memory (DIMM) with a larger DIMM of up to
512 MB.
● The MV-8800 will not operate if no memory (DIMM) is installed.
Precautions for expanding memory
• Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before attempting installation of the memory
DIMM board.
• Install only the specified memory DIMM board. Remove only the specified screws.
• To avoid the risk of damage to internal components that can be caused by static electricity, please carefully
observe the following whenever you handle the board.
• Before you touch the board, always first grasp a metal object (such as a water pipe), so you are sure that
any static electricity you might have been carrying has been discharged.
• When handling the board, grasp it only by its edges. Avoid touching any of the electronic components or
connectors.
• Save the bag in which the board was originally shipped, and put the board back into it whenever you
need to store or transport it.
• Do not touch any of the printed circuit pathways or connection terminals.
• Never use excessive force when installing a circuit board. If it doesn’t fit properly on the first attempt, remove
the board and try again.
• When circuit board installation is complete, double-check your work.
• When turning the unit upside-down, handle with care to avoid dropping it, or allowing it to fall or tip over.
• Use a Philips screwdriver of the appropriate size to avoid damaging the screw heads (a number of 2
screwdriver). If an unsuitable screwdriver is used, the head of the screw may be stripped.
• Turn the screwdriver counter-clockwise to loosen the screws-turn it clockwise to
tighten them.
loosen
Adding options
• When turning the unit upside-down, get a bunch of newspapers or magazines, and place them under the
four corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the buttons and controls. Also, you should try to orient the
unit so no buttons or controls get damaged.
22
tighten
• Be careful not to let the screws drop inside the MV-8800’s body.
• Do not leave the bottom cover removed. After installation of the memory DIMM Board is complete, be sure to
replace the cover.
• Be careful not to cut your hand on the edge of the cover or the opening edge while removing the cover.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-323
MV-8800_e.book 324 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Expanding the memory
Exchanging the memory (removing and installing)
● Be careful not to cut your hand on any sharp edges of the installation slot, cover, or circuit board.
1. Turn off the power of the MV-8800 and the connected devices, and disconnect all cables
from the MV-8800.
2. Turn the MV-8800 upside down, and lay it on its face supported by objects at each corner
so that the panel buttons and knobs are not damaged.
● When you lay the MV-8800 on its face, make stacks of magazines or newspapers to support each of the four
corners so that the weight of the unit does not damage the buttons and knobs. Make sure that no pressure is
being applied to any button or knob.
15 14
3. Remove sixteen screws from the bottom panel
at the locations shown in the illustration, and
detach the bottom cover.
16
13
1
2
12
11
8
3
4
9
5 6
10
7
4. Simultaneously spread apart the two white clips located at
both ends of the DIMM socket.
5. Pull the (old) memory module out of the socket.
6. Make sure that the cutouts in the (new) memory module are
positioned correctly, and press it directly downward into
the guide slots.
7. Continue pressing until the white clips pop upward into
position, locking the memory module into place.
8. Replace the bottom cover as it was originally.
9. Turn on the power (p. 28).
Please wait until the MV-8800 has finished starting up.
● If no memory is installed, the display will indicate “No wave memory (DIMM).” Please install memory as
described in Exchanging the memory (removing and installing) (p. 324).
● If an unsupported type of memory (DIMM) is installed, a message of “Wrong DIMM type! Turn off the power,
and replace with correct one” will appear when you power-on, and the MV-8800 will not operate.
10. Checking the installed memory as described in Testing the installed memory (p. 321).
M-324
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 325 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Chapter 23
Ajout d’options
Expansion de la mémoire
A l’origine le MV-8800 a une mémoire de 128 Mo pour le chargement d’échantillons de son. Si vous voulez
chargez de grosses quantités de données, la mémoire peut être insuffisante. Vous avez la possibilité
d’accroître la mémoire en remplaçant la mémoire d’origine (DIMM) de 128 Mo par une DIMM de 512 Mo.
● Le MV-8800 ne fonctionne pas si aucune mémoire (DIMM) n’est installée.
Precautions concernant l’extension de la mémoire
• Toujours éteindre et débrancher l’appareil avant de commencer l’installation de la carte.
• N’installez que les cartes de mémoire (DIMM). Enlevez seulement les vis indiquées.
• Veuillez suivre attentivement les instructions suivantes quand vous manipulez la carte afin d’éviter tout
risque d’endommagement des pièces internes par l’électricité statique.
• Toujours toucher un objet métallique relié à la terre (comme un tuyau par exemple) avant de manipuler la
carte pour vous décharger de l’électricité statique que vous auriez pu accumuler.
• Lorsque vous manipulez la carte, la tenir par les côtés. Évitez de toucher aux composants ou aux
connecteurs.
• Conservez le sachet d’origine dans lequel était la carte lors de l’envoi et remettez la carte dedans si vous
devez la ranger ou la transporter.
• Ne pas toucher aux circuits imprimés ou aux connecteurs.
• Ne jamais forcer quand vous installez une carte de circuits. Si la carte ne rentre pas correctement,
ressortez-la et ressayez.
• Quand l’installation de la carte de circuits imprimés est terminée, revérifiez si tout est bien installé.
• Lorsque vous déposez le MV-8800 face vers le bas, placez des piles de journaux ou de magazines sous les
quatre coins (ou des deux côtés) pour le soutenir. Ainsi, les boutons, manettes et autres pièces ne seront
pas endommagés.
• Utiliser un tournevis cruciforme correspondant à la taille de la vis (un tournevis numéro 2). En cas
d’utilisation d’un tournevis inapproprié, la tête de la vis pourrait être endommagée.
• Pour enlever les vis, tourner le tournevis dans le sens contraire des
aiguilles d’une montre. Pour resserrer, tourner dans le sens des aiguilles
d’une montre.
desserrer
Ajout d’options
• En plaçant l’appareil sens dessus dessous, manipulez-le avec soin pour éviter de l’échapper, de le laisser
tomber ou de se renverser.
resserrer
23
• Attention de ne pas laisser tomber les vis à l’intérieur du MV-8800.
• Une fois l’installation du module terminée, remettez le couvercle en place.
• Attention de ne pas vous couper les doigts au bord du capot ou au bord de l’ouverture lorsque vous enlevez
le capot.
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-325
MV-8800_e.book 326 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Expansion de la mémoire
Echange de la mémoire (retrait et installation)
● Attention de ne pas vous couper les doigts au bord du capot ou au bord de l’ouverture lorsque vous enlevez le
capot.
1. Eteignez le MV-8800 et tous les appareils raccordés et débranchez tous les câbles du
MV-8800.
2. Retournez le MV-8800 et placez quatre objets aux angles pour le soutenir de sorte que les
touches et boutons du panneau ne risquent pas d’être endommagés.
● Lorsque vous posez le MV-8800, posez des magazines ou des journaux aux angles pour protéger les touches
et les boutons. Aucune pression ne doit être exercée sur les touches ou boutons.
3. Retirez quinze vis du panneau inférieur aux
endroits indiqués sur l’illustration et détachez le
capot inférieur.
15 14
16
13
1
2
12
11
8
3
4
9
5 6
10
7
4. Ecartez en même temps les deux clips blancs se trouvant
aux deux extrémités de la douille DIMM.
5. Détachez le module mémoire d’origine de la douille.
6. Assurez-vous que les entailles dans le nouveau module
sont bien orientées et appuyez tout droit vers le bas dans
les logements.
7. Continuez d’appuyer sur le module jusqu’à ce que les clips
blancs remontent et verrouillent le module mémoire.
8. Remettez le capot inférieur dans sa position d’origine.
9. Mettez l’appareil sous tension (p. 28).
Attendez que le MV-8800 ait démarré.
● Si aucune mémoire n’est installée, «No wave memory (DIMM)» s’affiche. Installez la mémoire comme indiqué
dans Echange de la mémoire (retrait et installation) (p. 326).
● Si le type de mémoire (DIMM) installé n’est pas pris en charge, le message «Wrong DIMM type! Turn off the
power, and replace with correct one» (Mauvais type de DIMM ! Eteindre l’appareil et remplacer par le type
correct.) s’affiche à la mise sous tension de l’appareil, et le MV-8800 ne fonctionne pas.
10. Réinstallez la mémoire comme indiqué dans Testing the installed memory (p. 321).
M-326
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 327 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Master Index
Symbols
.A1P .............................................................................. M:73
.A1S .............................................................................. M:73
.A3P .............................................................................. M:73
.A3S .............................................................................. M:73
.BMP ........................................................................... M:285
.JPG ............................................................................ M:285
.PGM ............................................................................ M:73
.SND ............................................................................. M:73
Numerics
16Grid ........................................................................... S:73
16Notes ........................................................................ S:73
A
Audio CD .................................................................... M:227
import ...................................................................... M:70
playback ................................................................ M:234
writing .................................................................... M:232
Audio event ................................................................... M:58
Audio phrase ....................................................... M:52, M:54
copy ....................................................................... M:117
delete .................................................................... M:119
load ......................................................................... M:80
make settings ........................................................ M:111
play ........................................................................ M:300
quick assign .................................................. M:75, M:78
save ....................................................................... M:118
tempo setting ......................................................... M:113
AUDIO PHRASES button ............................................. M:19
Audio track ........................................................ M:58, M:258
add ........................................................................ M:160
audio event parameter .......................................... M:185
copy & insert ......................................................... M:190
copy & paste ......................................................... M:189
copy as new pattern .............................................. M:200
delete .................................................................... M:169
direct recording ..................................................... M:161
move ..................................................................... M:188
mute ...................................................................... M:133
realtime recording ................................................. M:163
recording ............................................................... M:160
resample mix ......................................................... M:162
sequence edit ........................................................ M:171
solo ........................................................................ M:134
step recording ........................................... M:163, M:281
Auto Divide ...................................................... S:210, S:222
Auto Emphasis ............................................................ S:210
Auto Normalize ........................................................... S:210
AUTO PUNCH button ................................................... M:21
Auto Punch In ...................... S:16, S:19, S:21, S:101, S:103
Auto Punch Out ................... S:16, S:19, S:21, S:101, S:103
Auto Sum ...................................................................... S:27
Automating
audio track ............................................................. M:219
C (Control) knob .................................................... M:225
mixer channel ........................................................ M:219
mute operation ...................................................... M:221
Automation .................................................................. M:219
B
Back Step ............................................................ S:62, S:63
Backing up project .......................................... M:241, M:292
Balance ....................................................................... M:207
Bank.H/L ....................................................................... S:12
BEAT indicator .............................................................. M:22
Bend (Patch) ............................................................... S:120
Bend Range Down ...................................................... S:118
Bend Range Up .......................................................... S:118
Bias ............................................................ S:39, S:41, S:68
Bitmap ......................................................................... M:285
BPF .................................................................. S:126, S:143
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Master Index
A (Envelope) ............................................................... S:126
AC inlet ............................................................... M:24, M:27
Accent Note .................................................................. S:22
Accent Velocity ............................................................. S:22
Active sensing ............................................................ M:309
Adding
audio track ............................................................ M:160
MIDI track .............................................................. M:151
Adjusting
balance ................................................................. M:207
tone ....................................................................... M:208
volume .................................................................. M:207
Aftertouch (Patch) ....................................................... S:120
AIFF
import ...................................................................... M:65
save ...................................................................... M:120
Amp Envelope .............................................................. M:53
Amp, Amplifier
LFO ............................................................ S:127, S:148
partial ...................................................................... M:53
Analog Feel ................................................................ S:118
ANALOG INPUT
MIC/LINE ............................................ M:23, M:27, M:83
PHONO ............................................... M:23, M:27, M:83
Analog input
level ......................................................................... M:83
sensitivity ................................................................ M:83
Analog Modeling Bass ................................................ M:217
Assign Type ................................................................ S:125
ASSIGNABLE SLIDER button ...................................... M:19
Assignable sliders ....................................................... M:296
Assigning
C (control) knob .................................................... M:214
multiple samples ........................................... M:77, M:78
patch ............................................................. M:75, M:89
pattern ................................................................... M:144
sample .................................................................... M:75
Attack .......................................................................... S:199
Attack Offset ............................................................... S:118
M = Owner’s Manual; S = Screen Guide
M-327
MV-8800_e.book 328 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Master Index
BPM
audio event ............................................................. S:28
audio phrase ......................................................... S:155
pattern ................................................... S:70, S:98, S:99
song ............................................ S:52, S:70, S:79, S:83
BPM Base Note ............................................... S:155, S:157
BPM Sync .......................................................... S:28, S:156
BPM/TAP button ........................................................... M:22
Buttons ........................................................... M:253, M:319
C
C (Control) knob ................................... M:19, M:214, M:225
assign .................................................................... M:214
automation ............................................................ M:225
playback ................................................................ M:226
recording operations ............................................. M:225
CD player .................................................................... M:234
CD-R/RW disc eject button ........................................... M:25
CD-R/RW drive tray ...................................................... M:25
Change continuous data ............................................. M:199
Change duration ......................................................... M:193
Change velocity .......................................................... M:192
Changing
color theme ........................................................... M:282
drive ...................................................................... M:243
folder ..................................................................... M:244
MFX routing .......................................................... M:215
tempo .................................................................... M:138
time signature ....................................................... M:138
Channel Aftertouch ..................................................... M:150
Cho (Instruments part) ................................................ S:114
Chop ........................................................................... M:116
Chop Point .................................................................. S:159
Chop Type .................................................................. S:160
Chopping sample .......................................................... M:76
Chord .......................................................................... M:157
Chorus .......................................................................... M:56
Chromatic ................................................................... M:110
Click ............................................................................ M:252
CLIPBOARD ................................................... M:107, M:117
CLIPBOARD button ...................................................... M:20
Coarse, Coarse Tune
audio event ............................................................. S:28
audio phrase ......................................................... S:156
partial .................................................................... S:125
patch ..................................................................... S:118
SMT ...................................................................... S:142
Color Theme ................................................... M:282, S:184
Comment ...................................................................... S:80
Computer
connect ................................................................. M:289
start communication .............................................. M:289
stop communication .............................................. M:294
Connecting
computer ............................................................... M:289
Contrast knob ............................................................... M:18
Control Change .............................................. M:150, M:296
M-328
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M = Owner’s Manual; S = Screen Guide
Control Change Number ............................................. S:120
Control Channel .......................................................... S:179
Control Number .......................................................... S:182
Controller ...................................................................... M:51
Cooling fan vent ............................................................ M:24
Copy & Insert .............................................................. M:190
Copy & Paste .............................................................. M:183
Copy as MIDI clip ........................................................ M:200
Copy as new pattern ................................................... M:200
Copy From Current Song .............................................. S:84
Copy From Source Project ......................................... S:166
Copying
audio phrase ......................................................... M:117
event ......................................................... M:183, M:189
file .............................................................. M:246, M:290
folder ..................................................................... M:246
part .......................................................................... M:93
partial .................................................................... M:107
pattern ................................................................... M:203
sequence ............................................................... M:189
song ........................................................................ S:87
Count In ............................... S:16, S:19, S:21, S:101, S:103
Create continuous data ............................................... M:198
Creating
event ..................................................................... M:182
folder ..................................................................... M:245
pattern ................................................................... M:148
pattern track .......................................................... M:164
project ................................................................... M:239
song ...................................................................... M:146
Current effect .............................................................. M:209
Current part ................................................................... M:89
Cursor buttons .............................................................. M:21
Cutoff ............................................................... S:126, S:143
Cutoff KF ..................................................................... S:144
Cutoff Offset ................................................................ S:118
D
D (Envelope) ............................................................... S:126
Data thin ..................................................................... M:195
DEC/INC buttons .......................................................... M:21
Delay ............................................................................. M:56
Delay KF ..................................................................... S:147
Delay Time .................................................................. S:147
Delay/Chorus
on/off ..................................................................... M:209
select ..................................................................... M:210
Delay/chorus library ...................................................... M:60
DELETE button ............................................................. M:20
Delete measure .......................................................... M:175
Delete Patch ............................................................... S:115
Delete Tracks ................................................................ S:56
Deleting
audio phrase ......................................................... M:119
file .............................................................. M:248, M:293
folder ..................................................................... M:248
locate point ............................................................ M:141
marker ................................................................... M:142
MV-8800_e.book 329 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Master Index
measure ................................................................ M:175
partial .................................................................... M:108
patch ..................................................................... M:101
project ................................................................... M:237
sample .................................................................. M:240
song ........................................................................ S:86
track ...................................................................... M:169
Depth Filter ................................................................. S:144
Depth Pitch ................................................................. S:144
Detune ........................................................................ S:147
Device ID .................................................................... S:177
Digital Out Copy Protect ............................................. S:173
Digital Output Select ................................................... S:173
Direct Recording ......................................................... M:161
Disc access indicator .................................................... M:25
Disk
format .................................................................... M:249
name ..................................................................... M:250
DISK indicator ............................................................... M:18
DISK/USB ................................................................... M:269
DISK/USB button .......................................................... M:19
DlyCho Send
audio phrase ......................................................... S:237
audio track ................................................... S:14, S:235
AUX ....................................................................... S:237
input ...................................................................... S:237
instruments part .................................................... S:236
partial .................................................................... S:125
Dotted note ................................................................. M:202
Double-click ................................................................ M:252
Drag ............................................................................ M:253
Drag&Drop .................................................................. M:253
Drive
change .................................................................. M:243
Drum ................................................................ S:152, S:153
Drum Grid ......................................................... M:158, S:73
Duration ...................................................... S:62, S:73, S:74
E
F
F (function) buttons ....................................................... M:18
Factory settings .......................................................... M:322
Fade-out ..................................................................... M:129
File
copy ........................................................... M:246, M:290
delete ........................................................ M:248, M:293
move ..................................................................... M:247
name ..................................................................... M:245
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Master Index
E.Grp, Excl Group, Excl.Grp
audio phrase ................................... S:152, S:153, S:156
partial .................................................................... S:125
EDIT ........................................................................... M:267
Editing
audio event parameter .......................................... M:185
Delay/Chorus ........................................................ M:211
locate point ............................................................ M:141
MFX ...................................................................... M:211
mute ...................................................................... M:223
note event ............................................................. M:179
patch ....................................................................... M:95
pattern ................................................................... M:167
pattern event ......................................................... M:186
reverb .................................................................... M:211
sample .................................................................. M:121
sequence data ...................................................... M:276
song ...................................................................... M:167
system exclusive message ................................... M:184
track ...................................................................... M:169
Editing commands ...................................................... M:187
Effect ................................................................. M:51, M:209
load ......................................................................... M:81
on/off ..................................................................... M:209
parameters ............................................................ M:211
save ....................................................................... M:213
select ..................................................................... M:210
store ...................................................................... M:212
EFFECTS button .......................................................... M:19
Emergency disc eject hole ............................................ M:25
Emphasis .................................................................... M:122
End Point
audio event .............................................................. S:29
audio phrase .............................................. S:155, S:157
fade In ................................................................... S:138
sample ................................................................... S:128
truncate ................................................................. S:136
ENTER button ............................................................... M:21
EQ ............................................................................... M:208
EQ High Freq ................................................... S:238, S:239
EQ High Gain ................................................... S:238, S:239
EQ Low Freq .................................................... S:238, S:239
EQ Low Gain ................................................... S:238, S:239
EQ Mid Freq .................................................... S:238, S:239
EQ Mid Gain .................................................... S:238, S:239
EQ Mid Q ......................................................... S:238, S:239
EQ Sw .............................................................. S:238, S:239
Equalizer ..................................................................... M:208
Erase All Events .................................................. S:10, S:93
Erasing
event ..................................................................... M:183
pattern ................................................................... M:203
Error Level .................................................................... S:82
Event ................................................................... M:58, S:68
view filter ............................................................... M:201
Event erase ................................................................. M:154
EVENT ERASE button .................................................. M:20
Event list
copy & paste ......................................................... M:183
create .................................................................... M:182
erase ..................................................................... M:183
Event list editing .......................................................... M:181
EXIT button ................................................................... M:18
Expanding
memory ................................................................. M:323
External display .............................................. M:251, M:255
M-329
MV-8800_e.book 330 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Master Index
Filter .............................................................................. M:53
LFO ............................................................ S:127, S:148
Filter Envelope .............................................................. M:53
Finding
zero cross ............................................................. M:106
Fine, Fine Tune
audio event ............................................................. S:28
audio phrase ......................................................... S:156
partial .................................................................... S:125
patch ..................................................................... S:118
SMT ...................................................................... S:142
Fix Quantize ........................................................ S:69, S:88
FIXED VELOCITY button ............................................. M:20
Fixed Velocity function .................................................. M:37
Fixed Velocity Level .................................................... S:174
Folder
change .................................................................. M:244
copy ...................................................................... M:246
create .................................................................... M:245
delete .................................................................... M:248
name ..................................................................... M:245
Folder structure .......................................................... M:242
FOOT SWITCH ............................................................ M:23
Foot Switch ............................... M:27, M:319, M:320, S:175
Foot Switch Polarity .................................................... S:175
Formatting
disk ............................................................ M:249, M:250
Function chart ............................................................. M:313
G
Gap Time .............................................. S:207, S:210, S:222
Gate ................................................................. S:152, S:153
GR .............................................................................. S:199
Grid Resolution .................................................. S:17, S:102
Grid Velocity ................................................................. S:73
Grounding terminal ............................................. M:23, M:27
H
H Position ................................................................... S:184
Hard disk
format .................................................................... M:250
HD Format Protect ...................................................... S:173
High Split .................................................................... S:200
HOLD button ................................................................. M:20
Hold function ................................................................. M:38
HPF ................................................................. S:126, S:143
I
Image
import .................................................................... M:285
recording ............................................................... M:287
switch ........................................................ M:286, M:287
IMPORT button ............................................................. M:18
Importing
AIFF ........................................................................ M:65
audio CD ................................................................. M:70
M-330
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M = Owner’s Manual; S = Screen Guide
image .................................................................... M:285
SMF ......................................................................... M:79
sound libraries ......................................................... M:73
WAV ........................................................................ M:65
Initialize Part ............................................................... S:115
Initialize Pattern ............................................................ S:96
Initializing
part .......................................................................... M:94
pattern ................................................................... M:203
Input ............................................................................ M:317
Input quantize ............................................................. M:153
Input Quantize Type ............ S:17, S:19, S:21, S:102, S:104
Input Select ...................................................... S:173, S:209
Insert Measure .................................................. M:174, S:64
Instrument ................................................. M:52, M:54, M:89
make settings .......................................................... M:90
INSTRUMENTS button ................................................. M:19
J
JPEG .......................................................................... M:285
Jump ............................................................................. S:60
JUMP button ................................................................. M:22
K
Keep Source Tracks ..................................................... S:69
Key Sync ..................................................................... S:148
KF Point ........................................................... S:143, S:145
Knob Mode ................................................................. S:175
Knobs .............................................................. M:254, M:320
L
L1 ..................................................................... S:144, S:146
L2 ..................................................................... S:144, S:146
L3 (S) ............................................................... S:144, S:146
L4 ................................................................................ S:144
LCD ................................................................... M:18, M:251
Legato Switch ............................................................. S:122
Length .................................................................. S:65, S:99
Level KF ...................................................................... S:145
Level, Levl
audio event .............................................................. S:28
audio phrase .................................. S:153, S:156, S:237
audio track .................................................... S:14, S:235
AUX ....................................................................... S:237
delay/chorus .......................................................... S:237
input ...................................................................... S:237
instruments part ......................................... S:114, S:236
mastering tool kit ................................................... S:199
metronome .............................................................. S:22
partial .................................................................... S:125
reverb .................................................................... S:237
sampling ................................................................ S:209
SMT ....................................................................... S:141
LFO ................................................................... M:53, S:127
List of samples ............................................................ M:121
MV-8800_e.book 331 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Master Index
Loading
audio phrases ......................................................... M:80
effect ....................................................................... M:81
patch ..................................................................... M:100
project ................................................................... M:235
song ...................................................................... M:206
Local Switch ............................................................... S:179
Locate point
delete .................................................................... M:141
edit ........................................................................ M:141
move ..................................................................... M:140
name ..................................................................... M:141
set ......................................................................... M:140
Locator ..................................................... M:140, S:64, S:65
LOCATOR button ......................................................... M:22
Loop End ...................................................................... S:48
LOOP ON button .......................................................... M:21
Loop Point
audio event ............................................................. S:29
audio phrase .............................................. S:155, S:157
sample .................................................................. S:128
LOOP QUICK SET button ............................................ M:21
Loop recording ............................................................ M:155
Loop Rest ........................................................ S:101, S:103
Loop Top ...................................................................... S:48
Loop Tune .................................................................. S:129
Loop, Loop Mode
audio event ............................................................. S:29
audio phrase .............................................. S:155, S:157
sample .................................................................. S:128
Low Frequency Oscillator ............................................. M:53
Low Split ..................................................................... S:200
LPF .................................................................. S:126, S:143
M
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Master Index
M (instruments part) ................................................... S:114
Mac ............................................................................. M:291
Magnify ....................................................... S:39, S:40, S:68
Make settings
synchronization ..................................................... M:303
V-LINK .................................................................. M:312
Marker ..................................................... M:142, S:64, S:65
delete .................................................................... M:142
move ..................................................................... M:142
set ......................................................................... M:142
MARKER SET button ................................................... M:22
Master ......................................................................... M:302
Master output knob ....................................................... M:18
Master Tune ............................................................... S:173
MASTERING .............................................................. M:270
Mastering .................................................................... M:230
MASTERING button ..................................................... M:19
Mastering effect .......................................................... M:230
Mastering mode ............................................................ M:61
Mastering tool kit .............................................. M:56, M:230
maximum polyphony ..................................................... M:91
MD-P1 ........................................................................ M:311
Meas
tempo track ............................................................. S:52
MEAS buttons ............................................................... M:22
Measure
delete .................................................................... M:175
insert ..................................................................... M:174
Memory
expand .................................................................. M:323
test ........................................................................ M:321
Menu Bar .................................................................... M:253
MENU button ................................................................ M:18
Merge tracks ............................................................... M:170
Message Type ............................................................ S:183
Metronome Mode ................. S:16, S:19, S:22, S:101, S:103
MFX .............................................................................. M:56
control ................................................................... M:301
on/off ..................................................................... M:209
routing ................................................................... M:215
select ..................................................................... M:210
MFX library ................................................................... M:60
MFX Rx Channel ........................................................ S:178
MIDI clip library ............................................................. M:60
copy as .................................................................. M:200
MIDI clock ................................................................... M:304
MIDI Clock Output ............................................... S:81, S:94
MIDI IN ........................................................................ M:295
MIDI indicator ................................................................ M:18
MIDI keyboard ............................................................ M:297
MIDI OUT .................................................................... M:295
MIDI sound module ..................................................... M:295
MIDI track ......................................................... M:58, M:257
add ........................................................................ M:151
change continuous data ........................................ M:199
change duration .................................................... M:193
change velocity ..................................................... M:192
copy & insert ......................................................... M:190
copy & paste ......................................................... M:189
copy as MIDI clip ................................................... M:200
copy as new pattern .............................................. M:200
create continuous data .......................................... M:198
data thin ................................................................ M:195
delete .................................................................... M:169
drum grid ............................................................... M:158
edit ........................................................................ M:277
event erase ........................................................... M:154
event list ................................................................ M:181
input quantize ........................................................ M:153
loop recording ....................................................... M:155
merge .................................................................... M:170
move ..................................................................... M:188
mute ...................................................................... M:133
piano roll editing .................................................... M:177
play quantize ......................................................... M:136
program change .................................................... M:137
quantize ................................................................. M:191
realtime recording ................................................. M:152
recording ............................................................... M:150
recording filter ....................................................... M:154
sequence edit ........................................................ M:171
shift timing ............................................................. M:194
M-331
MV-8800_e.book 332 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Master Index
solo ....................................................................... M:134
split notes .............................................................. M:197
step recording ........................................... M:156, M:280
transpose .............................................................. M:196
MIDI, MIDI Output ................. M:24, M:295, S:11, S:50, S:54
Mixdown ..................................................................... M:228
pattern ................................................................... M:228
song ...................................................................... M:228
Mixdown mode ................................................. M:61, M:228
enter ...................................................................... M:228
exit ........................................................................ M:228
Mixer ................................................................. M:51, M:207
MIXER button ............................................................... M:19
Mixer channel ............................................................. M:219
Mixer operation
playback ................................................................ M:220
recording ............................................................... M:219
MIXER/EFFECTS ....................................................... M:268
MMC ........................................................................... M:307
MMC Mode .......................................................... S:81, S:94
MMC Output ........................................................ S:81, S:94
Mode Message ........................................................... M:150
Modulation .................................................................. S:120
Mono Mode ................................................................. S:122
MOUSE ........................................................................ M:24
Mouse ............................................................. M:251, M:252
Mouse Pointer Speed ................................................. S:184
Move ........................................................................... M:247
Moving
event ..................................................................... M:188
file ......................................................................... M:247
marker ................................................................... M:142
sequence .............................................................. M:188
MTC ............................................................................ M:306
MTC Error Level ........................................................... S:95
MTC Frame Rate ................................................. S:81, S:94
MTC Offset Time .......................................................... S:95
MTC Output ......................................................... S:82, S:95
MTK .............................................................................. M:56
MTK (mastering tool kit) library ..................................... M:60
Multi Timbre Sampler Mode ........................... M:298, S:177
limitation ................................................................ M:299
multi-effect .................................................................... M:56
MULTILEVEL button ..................................................... M:20
Multilevel function ......................................................... M:37
Multitimbre .................................................................. M:298
Mute
audio track ................................................ M:133, S:235
edit ........................................................................ M:223
instruments part .................................................... S:236
MIDI track .............................................................. M:133
pattern track .......................................................... M:133
Mute Control ............................................... S:11, S:14, S:15
Mute Control Track ................. M:58, S:71, S:77, S:79, S:99
Mute operation
recording ............................................................... M:221
Mute operations
playback ................................................................ M:222
M-332
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M = Owner’s Manual; S = Screen Guide
N
Name editor ................................................................ M:254
Naming
disk ........................................................................ M:250
file .......................................................................... M:245
folder ..................................................................... M:245
locate point ............................................................ M:141
pad bank ................................................................. M:37
partial .................................................................... M:107
patch ....................................................................... M:97
project ................................................................... M:236
Normal Note .................................................................. S:22
Normal Velocity ............................................................. S:22
Normalize ........................................................ M:123, S:211
Note ............................................................................ M:150
dotted note ............................................................ M:202
Note Mode .................................................................. S:180
Note Range ................................................ S:38, S:43, S:66
Numeric keys ................................................................ M:21
Numerical boxes ......................................................... M:254
O
Offset Time ................................................................... S:82
One Shot ..................................................................... S:125
Operating modes ........................................................ M:251
Operating the wheel .................................................... M:253
Org Key, Original Key ...................................... S:131, S:211
OUTPUT
DIGITAL ...................................................... M:23, M:317
MASTER ................................................................. M:23
PHONES ................................................................. M:23
Output, Output Assign
audio phrase ......................................................... S:237
audio track ................................. S:14, S:50, S:55, S:235
AUX ....................................................................... S:237
Instruments part .................................................... S:114
instruments part .................................................... S:236
metronome .............................................................. S:22
MIDI track ............................................. S:11, S:50, S:54
partial .................................................................... S:125
Overall tuning .............................................................. M:317
P
Pad Aftertouch Sens ................................................... S:174
Pad Aftertouch Type ................................................... S:174
Pad bank
naming .................................................................... M:37
switching ................................................................. M:36
PAD BANKS button ...................................................... M:20
Pad Play ..................................................................... S:155
Pad Roll Interval ......................................................... S:174
Pad Sens .................................................................... S:174
Pad Trigger Threshold ................................................ S:174
Pad Tx Channel .......................................................... S:177
Pad Velocity ......................................................... S:73, S:74
MV-8800_e.book 333 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Master Index
solo ........................................................................ M:134
step recording ........................................... M:165, M:281
Patterns ........................................................................ M:57
PHONE knob ................................................................ M:18
Piano roll edit
copy & insert ......................................................... M:190
copy & paste ......................................................... M:189
move ..................................................................... M:188
Piano Roll Editing ....................................................... M:177
Pitch (LFO) ...................................................... S:127, S:148
Pitch Bend .................................................................. M:150
Pitch KF ...................................................................... S:142
Pix Jam ....................................................................... M:285
PLAY button .................................................................. M:22
Play Mode ................................................................... S:153
Play Quantize ............................................................. M:136
Playback
C (Control) knob operations .................................. M:226
mixer operation ..................................................... M:220
mute operation ...................................................... M:222
Playing
audio CD ............................................................... M:234
pattern ................................................................... M:143
Point ............................................................................ M:252
Polarity ........................................................................ M:319
Poly Aftertouch ........................................................... M:150
Portamento Mode ....................................................... S:123
Portamento Start Pitch ................................................ S:123
Portamento Switch ...................................................... S:122
Portamento Time ........................................................ S:123
Portamento Type ........................................................ S:123
POWER ON switch ............................................. M:24, M:28
Power Up Mode .......................................................... S:173
PR-50 .......................................................................... M:311
Pre Emphasis ............................................................. S:222
Pre Sample Time ........................................................ S:209
pre-installed patches
load ......................................................................... M:63
PREVIEW FROM button ............................................... M:21
Preview Length ........................................................... S:173
PREVIEW TO button .................................................... M:21
Prog .............................................................................. S:11
Program Change ............................................ M:137, M:150
PROJECT ................................................................... M:264
Project ........................................................................... M:59
back up ...................................................... M:241, M:292
create .................................................................... M:239
delete .................................................................... M:237
load ....................................................................... M:235
name ..................................................................... M:236
protect ................................................................... M:236
restore ................................................................... M:241
save ....................................................................... M:238
save as new .......................................................... M:238
PROJECT button .......................................................... M:19
Protect ........................................................................ M:236
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Master Index
Pan
audio phrase ......................................................... S:237
audio track ................................................... S:14, S:235
input ...................................................................... S:237
instruments part ......................................... S:114, S:236
LFO ............................................................ S:127, S:148
partial .................................................................... S:125
SMT ...................................................................... S:141
Part
assign ...................................................................... M:89
copy ........................................................................ M:93
initialize ................................................................... M:94
Partial ........................................................................... M:53
assignment ............................................................ M:109
copy ...................................................................... M:107
delete .................................................................... M:108
make settings ........................................................ M:102
name ..................................................................... M:107
Patch ............................................................................ M:52
delete .................................................................... M:101
load ....................................................................... M:100
make settings .......................................................... M:95
Name ...................................................................... M:97
quick assign ............................................................ M:77
save ........................................................................ M:99
patch
quick assign .................................................. M:75, M:76
Patch library .................................................................. M:60
load ......................................................................... M:98
resist ....................................................................... M:97
PATTERN ................................................................... M:265
Pattern
assign .................................................................... M:144
copy ...................................................................... M:203
create new ............................................................ M:148
edit ........................................................................ M:167
erase ..................................................................... M:203
initialize ................................................................. M:203
length .................................................................... M:149
mixdown ................................................................ M:228
name ..................................................................... M:149
paste ..................................................................... M:176
recording ............................................................... M:145
save as SMF ......................................................... M:204
select ..................................................................... M:168
tempo .................................................................... M:149
PATTERN button .......................................................... M:19
Pattern event ................................................................ M:58
Pattern Length ................................................. S:101, S:103
Pattern mode ................................................................ M:61
Pattern track ................................................................. M:58
copy & insert ......................................................... M:190
copy & paste ......................................................... M:189
create .................................................................... M:164
delete .................................................................... M:169
move ..................................................................... M:188
mute ...................................................................... M:133
pattern event parameter ........................................ M:186
realtime recording ................................................. M:165
recording ............................................................... M:164
sequence edit ........................................................ M:171
M-333
MV-8800_e.book 334 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Master Index
Protecting
project ................................................................... M:236
Punch In ....................................................................... S:49
Punch Out ..................................................................... S:49
Q
Quality Adjust ............................................................. S:135
Quantize
piano roll edit ......................................................... M:191
sequence edit ........................................................ M:191
Quantize Resolution ..................................................... S:17
Quantize Type
play quantize ........................................................... S:12
quantize .................................................................. S:38
QUICK EDIT button ...................................................... M:20
QUICK Loop Length ..................................................... S:48
Quick region ............................................................... M:173
R
R (Envelope) ............................................................... S:126
Rate
input quantize ............................................... S:17, S:102
LFO ............................................................ S:127, S:147
play quantize ........................................................... S:12
quantize .................................................................. S:38
Ratio ........................................................................... S:199
Realtime recording
audio track ............................................................ M:163
MIDI track .............................................................. M:152
pattern track .......................................................... M:165
REC button ................................................................... M:22
Rec Mode
audio track ................................................... S:19, S:103
MIDI track ..................................................... S:16, S:101
Recording
audio track ............................................................ M:160
C (Control) knob operation .................................... M:225
image changes ...................................................... M:287
MIDI track .............................................................. M:150
mixer operation ..................................................... M:219
mute operation ...................................................... M:221
pattern ................................................................... M:145
pattern track .......................................................... M:164
song ...................................................................... M:145
Recording filter ........................................................... M:154
Recording parameter
audio track ................................................... S:19, S:103
drum grid ................................................................. S:74
MIDI track ..................................................... S:16, S:101
mute control track ................................................... S:21
pattern track ............................................................ S:20
Release ...................................................................... S:199
Release Offset ............................................................ S:118
Replacing
sample .................................................................. M:114
Resample Mix ............................................................. M:162
Re-sampling ................................................................. M:88
Reso, Resonance ............................................ S:126, S:143
M-334
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M = Owner’s Manual; S = Screen Guide
Resolution
play quantize .................................................. S:12, S:51
quantize ................................................................... S:38
Resonance Offset ....................................................... S:118
Rest ......................................................... M:157, S:62, S:63
Restoring
project ................................................................... M:241
Retrigger ..................................................................... S:122
Rev, Rev Send, Reverb Send
audio phrase ......................................................... S:237
audio track .................................................... S:14, S:235
AUX ....................................................................... S:237
delay/chorus .......................................................... S:237
input ...................................................................... S:237
Instruments part .................................................... S:114
instruments part .................................................... S:236
partial .................................................................... S:125
Reverb .......................................................................... M:56
on/off ..................................................................... M:209
select ..................................................................... M:210
Reverb library ............................................................... M:60
Reverse
audio event .............................................................. S:29
audio phrase .............................................. S:156, S:157
Rhythm-machine style ................................................ M:158
Right-click ........................................... M:259, M:261, M:262
ROLL button ................................................................. M:20
Roll function .................................................................. M:38
Routing ....................................................................... S:229
Rx Channel ................................................................. S:180
Rx Select .................................................................... S:180
Rx Sw ......................................................................... S:180
S
S (Envelope) ............................................................... S:126
Sample .......................................................................... M:52
delete .................................................................... M:240
edit ........................................................................ M:121
emphasis ............................................................... M:122
fade-in ................................................................... M:128
fade-out ................................................................. M:129
make settings ........................................................ M:105
normalize ............................................................... M:123
save as AIFF ......................................................... M:130
save as WAV ......................................................... M:130
set mono ............................................................... M:127
time stretch ............................................................ M:124
truncate ................................................................. M:125
Sample Mix Table ......................................................... M:53
Sample Type .......................................... S:19, S:103, S:209
Sampled result
discard ..................................................................... M:87
SAMPLER ................................................................... M:268
Sampler ........................................................................ M:51
Sampler Output Gain .................................................. S:173
Sampling ....................................................................... M:83
apply effect .............................................................. M:88
initial settings ........................................................... M:83
parameters .............................................................. M:84
MV-8800_e.book 335 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Master Index
SONG ......................................................................... M:265
Song
copy ......................................................................... S:87
create new ............................................................. M:146
delete ...................................................................... S:86
edit ........................................................................ M:167
load ....................................................................... M:206
mixdown ................................................................ M:228
recording ............................................................... M:145
save as SMF ......................................................... M:204
select ..................................................................... M:167
SONG button ................................................................ M:19
Song mode ................................................................... M:61
Songs ............................................................................ M:57
Sound libraries
Import ...................................................................... M:73
Split notes ................................................................... M:197
Standard MIDI file ............................................. M:79, M:204
Start Point
audio event .............................................................. S:29
audio phrase .............................................. S:155, S:157
fade out ................................................................. S:139
sample ................................................................... S:128
truncate ................................................................. S:136
Start Trigger ................................................................ S:209
STEP buttons ................................................................ M:22
Step recording
audio track ............................................................. M:163
chord ..................................................................... M:157
MIDI track .............................................................. M:156
pattern track .......................................................... M:165
rest ........................................................................ M:157
tie .......................................................................... M:157
Step Time .................... M:202, S:58, S:62, S:63, S:73, S:74
STOP button ................................................................. M:22
stop the sound .............................................................. M:34
Storing
effect ..................................................................... M:212
Strength, Strn
input quantize ............................................... S:17, S:102
play quantize .................................................. S:12, S:51
quantize ................................................................... S:38
Stretch Type ...................................................... S:28, S:156
Switching
effect ..................................................................... M:209
image ........................................................ M:286, M:287
LCD mode ............................................................. M:251
pad bank ................................................................. M:36
screen ................................................................... M:283
VGA mode ............................................................. M:251
V-LINK ................................................................... M:312
Switching to
pattern mode ......................................................... M:132
song mode ............................................................ M:132
Sync Mode ........................................................... S:81, S:94
Synchronization .......................................................... M:303
Synchronizing ............................................................. M:302
master ................................................................... M:302
SYSTEM ..................................................................... M:269
SYSTEM button ............................................................ M:19
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
Master Index
SAMPLING button ........................................................ M:18
Save As User Template ................................................ S:10
Saving
AIFF ...................................................................... M:120
audio phrases ....................................................... M:118
Delay/Chorus ........................................................ M:213
effect ..................................................................... M:213
MFX ...................................................................... M:213
patch ....................................................................... M:99
pattern ................................................................... M:204
project ................................................................... M:238
reverb .................................................................... M:213
sample .................................................................. M:130
song ...................................................................... M:204
user track template ............................................... M:147
WAV ...................................................................... M:120
Screen Saver Time ..................................................... S:184
Screen Saver Type ..................................................... S:184
Selecting
effect ..................................................................... M:210
pattern ................................................................... M:168
region .................................................................... M:173
region (Piano roll editing) ...................................... M:180
song ...................................................................... M:167
Sens (Patch) ............................................................... S:120
SENS knobs ....................................................... M:18, M:83
SEQUENCE ............................................................... M:266
Sequence edit
copy & insert ......................................................... M:190
copy & paste ......................................................... M:189
move ..................................................................... M:188
quantize ................................................................ M:191
Sequence editing ........................................................ M:171
Sequencer ............................................ M:51, M:131, M:302
Set Chroma ................................................................ S:124
Set mono .................................................................... M:127
Setting
effect parameters .................................................. M:211
marker ................................................................... M:142
Shift All Notes ............................................................... S:37
Shift All Tracks .............................................................. S:37
SHIFT button ................................................................ M:21
Shift Lock .................................................................... S:175
Shift timing .................................................................. M:194
Shuffle Resolution ............................................. S:17, S:102
SHUTDOWN button ..................................................... M:18
Slave ........................................................................... M:304
Slider Mode ................................................................ S:175
Slider1–8 .................................................................... S:179
Sliders ........................... M:19, M:254, M:296, M:319, M:320
SMF ............................................................................ M:204
import ...................................................................... M:79
SMT .................................................................. M:53, S:125
SMT Control Select .................................................... S:120
SMT Velocity Control .................................................. S:141
Solo
audio track ............................................................ M:134
MIDI track .............................................................. M:134
pattern track .......................................................... M:134
M-335
MV-8800_e.book 336 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Master Index
System exclusive ............................................ M:150, M:184
System information ..................................................... M:321
T
T1 (A) ............................................................... S:144, S:146
T2 .................................................................... S:144, S:146
T3 (D) .............................................................. S:144, S:146
T4 (R) .............................................................. S:144, S:146
Tap ...................................................................... S:70, S:98
Tap function ................................................................ M:138
Tap Resolution ......................................... S:70, S:98, S:176
Tap Tempo ................................................................. S:175
Template
play quantize ........................................................... S:12
quantize .................................................................. S:38
Tempo
add ........................................................................ M:139
change .................................................................. M:138
Tempo track .......................... M:58, M:139, S:64, S:65, S:79
Testing
memory ................................................................. M:321
Threshold .................................................................... S:199
Tie ............................................................ M:157, S:62, S:63
Time KF ........................................................... S:144, S:145
Time Signature ........................ S:52, S:64, S:79, S:83, S:99
add ........................................................................ M:139
Time Stretch ............................................................... M:124
Tone ........................................................................... M:208
TOP button ................................................................... M:22
Track Bank .......................................................... S:75, S:76
Track Layout ................................................................. S:83
Track Mute .................................................................... S:75
Track parameter
audio track .............................................................. S:14
MIDI track ................................................................ S:11
pattern track ............................................................ S:15
Track Solo .................................................................... S:76
Transpose ......................................................... M:196, S:43
Trigger ............................................................. S:152, S:153
Truncate ......................................................... M:125, S:211
Tune Request ............................................................. M:150
Tx Active Sensing ....................................................... S:177
Type
Filter ........................................................... S:126, S:143
play quantize ........................................................... S:51
M = Owner’s Manual; S = Screen Guide
V
V Position .................................................................... S:184
VALUE dial ................................................................... M:21
Velo Curve Sens .............................................. S:143, S:145
Velo Curve Type .............................................. S:143, S:145
Velo Sens T1 (A) ........................................................ S:146
Velo Sens T4 (R) ........................................................ S:146
Velo, Velocity
audio phrase ......................................................... S:153
play quantize .................................................. S:13, S:51
quantize ................................................................... S:38
step recording ......................................................... S:62
Velocity Control ........................................................... S:156
VELOCITY PADS ......................................................... M:20
Velocity pads ................................................................ M:35
fixed velocity ............................................................ M:37
hold ......................................................................... M:38
image .................................................................... M:286
multilevel function .................................................... M:37
mute ...................................................................... M:135
play pattern ........................................................... M:143
roll ........................................................................... M:38
solo ........................................................................ M:135
Velocity Range FadeL ................................................ S:142
Velocity Range FadeU ................................................ S:142
Velocity Range Lower ................................................. S:142
Velocity Range Upper ................................................. S:142
Velocity Sens Filter ..................................................... S:144
Velocity Sens Offset ................................................... S:118
Velocity Sens T1 (A) ................................................... S:144
Velocity Sens T4 (R) ................................................... S:144
VGA ............................................................................ M:251
VGA OUT ...................................................................... M:24
VGA Refresh Rate ...................................................... S:184
View filter .................................................................... M:201
V-LINK ........................................................................ M:311
function chart ......................................................... M:313
make settings ........................................................ M:312
master ................................................................... M:312
on/off ..................................................................... M:312
slave ...................................................................... M:314
V-LINK button ............................................................... M:18
Voice Priority ............................................................... S:119
Voice Reserve .............................................................. M:91
Volume ........................................................................ M:207
Volume Label .............................................................. S:193
VoRsv ......................................................................... S:114
U
Undo/Redo ................................................................. M:166
UNDO/REDO button ..................................................... M:18
USB .................................................................. M:23, M:289
Use Pattern Tempo ...................................................... S:98
User track template .................................................... M:147
save ...................................................................... M:147
use ........................................................................ M:147
M-336
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
W
WAV
import ...................................................................... M:65
save ....................................................................... M:120
Wave Form ................................................................. S:147
Waveform display
zoom-out ................................................................. M:34
MV-8800_e.book 337 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Master Index
waveform display
zoom-in ................................................................... M:34
Windows ..................................................................... M:290
With Delete ................................................................. S:224
Word Clock ................................................................. S:183
Writing
audio CD ............................................................... M:232
Z
Zero-cross .................................................................. M:106
zoom-in
waveform display .................................................... M:34
zoom-out
waveform display .................................................... M:34
Master Index
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
M-337
MV-8800_e.book 338 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
Information
Information
AFRICA
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany
Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
REUNION
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
SOUTH AFRICA
T.O.M.S. Sound & Music
(Pty)Ltd.
2 ASTRON ROAD DENVER
JOHANNESBURG ZA 2195,
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011)417 3400
FAX: (011)417 3462
Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.
Royal Cape Park, Unit 24
Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800
Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 799 4900
ASIA
CHINA
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District Beijing
100011 CHINA
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
HONG KONG
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland
distributor in your country as shown below.
PHILIPPINES
CURACAO
URUGUAY
NORWAY
JORDAN
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (02) 899 9801
Zeelandia Music Center Inc.
Orionweg 30
Curacao, Netherland Antilles
TEL:(305)5926866
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa
1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: 2273 0074
MUSIC HOUSE CO. LTD.
FREDDY FOR MUSIC
P. O. Box 922846
Amman 11192 JORDAN
TEL: (06) 5692696
VENEZUELA
POLAND
Instrumentos Musicales
Allegro,C.A.
Av.las industrias edf.Guitar
import
#7 zona Industrial de Turumo
Caracas, Venezuela
TEL: (212) 244-1122
ROLAND POLSKA SP. Z O.O.
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03 664 Warszawa
POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 4419
EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI
& SONS CO.
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
TEL: 243-6399
SINGAPORE
SWEE LEE MUSIC
COMPANY PTE. LTD.
150 Sims Drive,
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 6846-3676
Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez
Calle Proyecto Central No.3
Ens.La Esperilla
Santo Domingo,
Dominican Republic
TEL:(809) 683 0305
TAIWAN
ECUADOR
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung
Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei,
TAIWAN, R.O.C.
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
Mas Musika
Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma
Guayaquil - Ecuador
TEL:(593-4)2302364
THAILAND
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Soi Verng NakornKasem,
New Road, Sumpantawongse,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 224-8821
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty.,Ltd.
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
INDIA
BRAZIL
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
MALAYSIA
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 7805-3263
Casa Instrumental
Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11
Ciudad de Guatemala
Guatemala
TEL:(502) 599-2888
HONDURAS
Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.
BO.Paz Barahona
3 Ave.11 Calle S.O
San Pedro Sula, Honduras
TEL: (504) 553-2029
For Australia
Tel: (02) 9982 8266
For New Zealand
Tel: (09) 3098 715
BARBADOS
KOREA
GUATEMALA
Musique & Son
Z.I.Les Mangle
97232 Le Lamantin
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 426860
Parsons Music Ltd.
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,
Kowloon, HONG KONG
TEL: 2333 1863
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
OMNI MUSIC
75 Avenida Norte y Final
Alameda Juan Pablo II,
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,
EL SALVADOR
TEL: 262-0788
MARTINIQUE
ARGENTINA
INDONESIA
EL SALVADOR
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
TEL: 2415 0911
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
409, Nirman Kendra
Mahalaxmi Flats Compound
Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,
Mumbai-400011, INDIA
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
A&B Music Supplies LTD
12 Webster Industrial Park
Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados
TEL: (246)430-1100
Roland Brasil Ltda.
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
CHILE
Comercial Fancy II S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
COLOMBIA
Centro Musical Ltda.
Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9
Medellin, Colombia
TEL: (574)3812529
COSTA RICA
JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado
10237,
San Jose, COSTA RICA
TEL: 258-0211
Gigamusic SARL
10 Rte De La Folie
97200 Fort De France
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 715222
MEXICO
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico
D.F. MEXICO
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
NICARAGUA
Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales Nicaragua
Altamira D'Este Calle Principal
de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida
1 Cuadra al Lago.#503
Managua, Nicaragua
TEL: (505)277-2557
PANAMA
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,
Panama City, REP. DE
PANAMA
TEL: 315-0101
PARAGUAY
Distribuidora De
Instrumentos Musicales
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira
Asuncion PARAGUAY
TEL: (595) 21 492147
PERU
Audionet
Distribuciones Musicales SAC
Juan Fanning 530
Miraflores
Lima - Peru
TEL: (511) 4461388
TRINIDAD
AMR Ltd
Ground Floor
Maritime Plaza
Barataria Trinidad W.I.
TEL: (868) 638 6385
EUROPE
AUSTRIA
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Austrian Office
Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,
A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
BELGIUM/FRANCE/
HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Central Europe N.V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
CROATIA
ART-CENTAR
Degenova 3.
HR - 10000 Zagreb
TEL: (1) 466 8493
CZECH REP.
CZECH REPUBLIC
DISTRIBUTOR s.r.o
Voctárova 247/16
CZ - 180 00 PRAHA 8,
CZECH REP.
TEL: (2) 830 20270
DENMARK
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: 3916 6200
FINLAND
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial
Finland
Elannontie 5
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
GERMANY
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844
Norderstedt, GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
GREECE/CYPRUS
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
HUNGARY
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint,
HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511011
IRELAND
Roland Ireland
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount
Avenue, Dublin 12
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 4294444
ITALY
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
PORTUGAL
KUWAIT
LEBANON
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Portugal Office
Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL
TEL: 22 608 00 60
Chahine S.A.L.
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine
Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 165857
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 20-1441
ROMANIA
OMAN
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
535500 Gheorgheni,
ROMANIA
TEL: (266) 364 609
TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.
Malatan House No.1
Al Noor Street, Ruwi
SULTANATE OF OMAN
TEL: 2478 3443
RUSSIA
QATAR
MuTek
Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6
117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 981-4967
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio &
Stores)
P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR
TEL: 4423-554
SLOVAKIA
SAUDI ARABIA
DAN Acoustic s.r.o.
Povazská 18.
SK - 940 01 Nové Zámky
TEL: (035) 6424 330
SPAIN
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
Corniche Road, Aldossary
Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
SWEDEN
SYRIA
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
SWITZERLAND
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
Technical Light & Sound
Center
Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.
Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 223-5384
TURKEY
ZUHAL DIS TICARET A.S.
Galip Dede Cad. No.37
Beyoglu - Istanbul / TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 249 85 10
U.A.E.
UKRAINE
EURHYTHMICS Ltd.
P.O.Box: 37-a.
Nedecey Str. 30
UA - 89600 Mukachevo,
UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai,
U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 3360715
UNITED KINGDOM
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
MIDDLE EAST
BAHRAIN
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Roland Canada Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way
Richmond B. C., V6V 2M4
CANADA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
Moon Stores
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
TEL: 17 211 005
Roland Canada Ltd.
(Toronto Office)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6
CANADA
TEL: (905) 362 9707
IRAN
U. S. A.
MOCO INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
TEL: (021) 285-4169
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
TEL: (323) 890 3700
ISRAEL
Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons
Ltd.
8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
As of November 1, 2006 (ROLAND)
M-338
MV-8800 Owner’s Manual
MV-8800_e.book 339 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
For the USA
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Compliance Information Statement
Model Name :
Type of Equipment :
Responsible Party :
Address :
Telephone :
MV-8800
PRODUCTION STUDIO
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,U. S. A.
(323) 890 3700
MV-8800_e.book 340 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後1時48分
■ Copyright
● Unauthorized recording, distribution, sale, lending, public performance, broadcasting, or the like, in whole or in part, of
a work (musical composition, video, broadcast, public performance, or the like) whose copyright is held by a third party
is prohibited by law.
● This product can be used to record or duplicate audio or visual material without being limited by certain technological
copy-protection measures. This is due to the fact that this product is intended to be used for the purpose of producing
original music or video material, and is therefore designed so that material that does not infringe copyrights belonging
to others (for example, your own original works) can be recorded or duplicated freely.
● Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party. Roland assumes no
responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third-party copyrights arising through your use of this unit.
■ About the License Agreement
● The MV-8800 and its CD-R capability are designed to allow you to reproduce material to which you have copyright, or
material which the copyright owner has granted you permission to copy. Accordingly, reproduction of Music CD or
other copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner avoiding technical prohibiting features of
second-generation and later copying like SCMS or others constitutes copyright infringement and may incur penalties
even in case such reproduction is for your own personal use and enjoyment (private use). Consult a copyright
specialist or special publications for more detailed information on obtaining such permission from copyright holders.
■ Disclaimer of liability
● Roland will take no responsibility for any “direct damages,” “consequential damages,” or “any other damages” which
may result from your use of the MV-8800. These damages may include but are not limited to the following events which
can occur when using the MV-8800.
• Any loss of profit that may occur to you
• Permanent loss of your music or data
• Inability to continue using the MV-8800 itself or a connected device
04348390
*
0
4
3
4
8
3
9
0
-
0
2
*
06-11-2N
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement